Music courses

Top 113 Music Courses 2021

We have collected for you the Top 113 Music Courses to ProducerTech.

Samples list navigation:

  1. The Complete Beginners Guide to Reason
  2. Omnisphere Course
  3. House Production in Logic Pro by Andy Lee
  4. Complete Guide to Sylenth 1
  5. The Making of ‘Do You Wanna 808’ by Santé
  6. DJ Fracture presents Drum and Bass in Ableton Live
  7. Complete Beginners Guide to Logic Pro 9
  8. Advanced Production Techniques in Reason
  9. Advanced Production Techniques in Logic Pro 9
  10. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX
  11. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 4 – Mixing and Mastering
  12. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 1 – Creating Beats
  13. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 3 – Arranging
  14. Building Custom Mastering Weapons in Ableton Live
  15. Mastering in the Box with Ableton Live
  16. Pro Audio Mastering Tips in Ableton Live
  17. Complete Guide to Massive
  18. Creating Classic House in Logic By Dale Anderson
  19. Mastering Now – The Complete Guide
  20. Techno and Tech House Production in Live by Paul Maddox
  21. House Production with Ableton Push Part I by Paul Maddox
  22. Producing Glitch Hop Beats and Bass with Maschine by Defazed
  23. House Production with Maschine by Rob Jones
  24. Producer’s Guide to Music Theory with Maschine
  25. Complete Guide to Maschine MKII
  26. Drum & Bass Production with Maschine by DJ Fracture
  27. Complete Glitch Hop Production with Maschine 
  28. Making Melodic Parts for House with Push by Paul Maddox
  29. Complete Guide to Maschine Studio
  30. Complete Guide to Compression
  31. Secrets of the Mashup by Elite Force
  32. Dubstep Production Techniques by Dodge & Fuski
  33. Creating A Drum & Bass Groove with colo[r]
  34. Essential Guide To Logic Pro Instruments
  35. Complete Guide To Kontakt by Defazed
  36. Arranging Techniques With Push
  37. Breaking Down The Remix By Dodge & Fuski
  38. Remixing Techniques in Ableton Live by Rob Jones
  39. Building ‘Dave’ by BAR9
  40. Complete Guide to Sampling in Live by Rob Jones
  41. Part 2: Adding Foley and Developing the DnB Groove with colo[r]
  42. Techno Production with Maschine
  43. Mainroom Techno Production in Live by Paul Maddox
  44. Arranging and Mixing a DnB Track In Live by colo[r]
  45. Pro DnB Tips & Tricks – The Making of ‘Move It’ By RESO
  46. Producing Classic Deep Bass House in Logic
  47. Complete Guide to Stereo Width By Rob Jones
  48. Bass House Production in Live by Joel Dawes (Spoils)
  49. Chill Trap and Future Bass Production with Maschine by CAPSUN
  50. Cutting Edge Sound Design with Serum by Defazed
  51. Martin Eyerer creates Tech House in Live
  52. Psytrance Production in Logic Pro
  53. Producing Disco House In Live
  54. House And Techno Groove Production Masterclass
  55. DIY Audio Mastering – The Producertech Guide
  56. Drum & Bass Production and Sound Design
  57. Beginners Guide To Traktor Pro
  58. Complete Guide To EQ
  59. Future House and EDM Production in Ableton Live
  60. Complete Guide to Operator
  61. Signal fundamentals and sound design
  62. Pro Techno Tips & Tricks – ‘Catacomb’ Walk-through
  63. Drum & Bass Beats Masterclass by Reso
  64. Producer’s Guide to Vocals
  65. Designing Leads with NI Massive
  66. Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques
  67. Ableton Live DJ’s Guide
  68. Making Music with Ableton Push
  69. Jungle Production Fundamentals
  70. Stutter Edit Producer’s Guide
  71. Precision Drum and Bass Construction in Maschine
  72. Complete Music Production Tutorial
  73. Maschine Hip Hop & Trap Beat Design
  74. Operator Bass Patch Sound Design
  75. Analog Bass Patch Sound Design
  76. Tribal and Tech House Production in Live
  77. Essential Guide To Ableton Racks
  78. Bass Mixing Techniques
  79. Sampler Bass Patch Sound Design
  80. Complete Guide to Maschine Jam
  81. Building a House Anthem – Reconstructing ‘Maasai’
  82. Producer’s Guide to Avenger
  83. Workflow Techniques in Ableton Push By Rob Jones
  84. Reso DnB Bass Masterclass
  85. Producer’s Guide to Ozone 8
  86. Producer’s Guide to Neutron 2
  87. Complete Guide to Maschine MK3
  88. Producer’s Guide to Superior Drummer 3
  89. Producer’s Guide To Spire
  90. Complete Guide to Wavetable
  91. Producer’s Guide to VocalSynth 2
  92. Producer’s Guide To Hybrid 3
  93. EQ Fundamentals
  94. Classic House Production & Sound Design
  95. Neuro Tech DnB Production
  96. Beginner’s Guide to Synthesis
  97. Beginner’s Guide to Studio One
  98. Catching Flies Pro Tips – Creating ‘Mama’s Wisdom’
  99. Creative Sampling Techniques
  100. The Art Of Sampling
  101. DnB Melodies & FX Masterclass
  102. Beginner’s Guide to Music Theory for Producers
  103. Mainroom Future House Production
  104. Serum Sound Design Masterclass
  105. Advanced Guide To Music Theory
  106. Melodic Deep Tech House & Techno Part 3
  107. The Art Of Filtering
  108. Compression Fundamentals
  109. Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques 2
  110. Raw Techno Production Techniques
  111. Music Production Essentials Collection
  112. Beginner’s Guide to Music Production in Ableton Live
  113. Ableton Beginners Complete Music Production Collection

1. The Complete Beginners Guide to Reason (Producertech)

by  Producertech

The Complete Beginners Guide to Reason (Producertech)

Our brand new Reason Level 1 course provides students with all the knowledge necessary to start making music with Reason. As well as being guided through all the main areas of the software, the modules also provide more general information about music, performance and production.

At the end of the course, students should have all the basic skills required to produce their own tracks, with the 15 modules going from the jamming stage right through to final mastering. Students are even introduced to important sound creation methods, such as sampling and synthesizing.

The online Reason course is presented in a series of online videos that you can watch where and when you prefer, with a full complement of accompanying downloadable materials for your future reference.

Check out the free module below and click here to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction and Setting Up

This module is designed to give you a quick tour of Reason and Record, to give you an idea for each section of the software and how they relate to each other. There is also a guide to authorising and setting up the Preferences, which are the first things to do when you load up the software.

2. Starting a Song… What is MIDI?

This module is designed to teach you how to get started with a new song and the basics of MIDI, explaining what it is and how you can use it to create melodic and rhythmic tracks. There is a guide to creating note clips for instruments in the rack, which can be recorded in by playing or drawn in using the pencil tool, as well as some tips for the most important features to consider when editing MIDI.

3. Working with Loops

This module teaches you how to work with audio loops in Record and Reason, either by using Rex loops or importing audio directly.

4. Programming Drums I – Intro to ReDrum

This module teaches you how to create drum parts with the ReDrum instrument, both internally and using tracks in the sequencer. Then, there are some techniques for how to start to arrange a song by creating and laying out the different parts into sections.

5. Recording Audio

This module teaches you how to record audio into a song, which is only possible with Record and version 6 onwards of Reason. Various considerations and methods of recording are shown as well as how to edit the recorded audio after recording.

6. Basic Processing – Compression and Filtering

This module gives you a guide to using insert effects on devices in the rack, beginning with two of the most popular – compressors and filters. There is a demonstration of how each effect works and some of the different ways they can be used, as well as a brief introduction to envelope modulation and the types of sounds it can create when filtering a signal.

7. Programming Drums II – Intro to Kong

This module teaches the basics of working with Reason’s powerful drum instrument Kong, showing how a beat can be constructed and then edited both in the sequencer and on the device itself. There is also a guide to the application of grooves to tracks, enabling their rhythm and feel to be tweaked to create more character and unification between parts.

8. Introduction to Sampling – Using NN19

This module teaches the basics of sampling, explaining what single- and multi- sampling are and how they can be used to create a variety of different instruments, both acoustic and electronic. As well as providing a guide to each of the main sections on NN19, which covers all of the most important parameters in each, there are examples of how samples can be recorded, imported and edited in order to create classic bass and vocal patches.

9. Introduction to Synthesizing – Using Subtractor

This module provides an introduction to the world of synthesizing. There is a guide to Reason’s Subtractor synth, showing how the instrument is constructed and how each section can be used to produce different types of sound. There are also examples of how various techniques can be used to create patches like a classic LFO bass and a dirty lead with velocity effects.

10. Mixing Part I – Levels, Panning and EQ

This module teaches you the basics of mixing a song, beginning with setting appropriate levels for each track, explaining metering and decibel ranges, then moving onto the other mixer controls available. Then, we move onto another important area of music production, equalisation.

11. Mixing Part II – Reverb, Chorus and Delay

This module shows how to apply send effects using the mixers in Reason and Record in order to improve the sound of a mix. There is also a guide to some of the different effects most commonly used as send effects, including reverb, delay and chorus.

12. Introduction to Mastering

This module shows the main considerations for mastering a track, beginning with the ways in which compression and EQ can be applied and then moving onto some techniques not seen so far, including limiting and stereo imaging. There is also a guide to removing clicks and pops from tracks, and creating an audio file of the finished song.

13. More on MIDI – Remote and ReWire

This module explains more about how to control the software remotely using a MIDI keyboard or control surface, both those with advanced control facilities and those without. The automatic systems for controlling are explained as well as the way that these can be overridden to create your own custom setup. Then, there is a guide to ReWire, explaining the basics of how it works and providing a few different examples of situations in which it might be used.

14. Introduction to Combinator and the RPG-8 Arpeggiator

This module introduces the Combinator and RPG-8 devices, showing what they are individually and how they work, then how they can be combined with other devices to produce an instrument patch complete with various effects and performance controls.

15. Bonus Module – New Features in Reason 7 Part I

This module teaches some of the new features in Reason 7, including the addition of slice markers in audio clips, which allow precise timestretching of individual sections of recorded or imported material. The ability to create Rex files from audio clips is also included, showing how to edit them on the device to further transform loops in interesting ways, as well as how the new effects device Audiomatic Retro Transformer works.


2. Omnisphere Course (Producertech)

by Producertech

Omnisphere Course (Producertech)

Want some help getting to know the awesome Sylenth 1 synth? This course takes you from the very beginning right through to more advanced sound design, explaining all of the synthesizing technology and features included in this incredible, cutting- edge instrument. The course delves into all the main stages of subtractive synthesis, covering the oscillators, filters, modulators and effects. The final three modules are then spent showing some different types of patch creation, combining all of the techniques into some useful, practical examples to help students put everything into context.

The course is presented in a series of online videos, with accompanying written notes and synth presets to work to, as well as more than £25 worth of additional presets supplied by our sponsor Loopmasters. Don’t miss out on this essential guide to synthesis and sound design for one of the most popular synths on the market today!

Check out the free module below and CLICK HERE to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction and Overview

Introduces the course style and provides an overview of the instrument, covering the main display areas, where synth presets can be browsed and edited.

2. Oscillators

Introduces Sylenth 1’s oscillator section controls, explaining what they all do and providing an example of how to use both parts to create a simple patch.

3. Filters

Gives an introduction to the different types of filter available and the effect they have on the sound, as well as explaining what each control does.

4. Arp and Effects

Takes a look at the central display area, showing how different effects can be applied. These include arpeggiation, distortion, phasing, chorus, EQ, delay, reverb and compression

5. Envelopes

Starts to get into modulation with a thorough look at envelopes, beginning with the most common amplitude envelope, which changes the level over time, and then checking out use the mod envelopes to manipulate filter frequency and oscillator pitch.

6. More Oscillators and LFOs

Goes back over the oscillator waveform types in more detail and then provides a guide to the LFOs featured on Sylenth 1. Shows how to set up the classic dubstep wobble bass type effects, as well as showing how stacked modulation can be set up, where one modulator controls the parameters of another.

7. Polyphony, Portamento, Misc Modulation and more

Goes over the remaining front panel controls, including the wheels and portamento settings, then polyphony options. The second half of the lesson combines all these features and some from the previous lessons into a cool patch creation example.

8. Making a Bass Patch

Gives a practical example of how to apply many of the techniques taught in order to produce a filthy dubstep bass preset.

9. Making a Lead Patch I

Puts everything together by showing how to make a simple but great-sounding arpeggiated lead patch.

10. Making a Lead Patch II

Gives another example of how to make a nice lead sound, this time focussing more on an evolving pad-style preset.

Sample Module – Intro Lesson


3. House Production in Logic Pro by Andy Lee (Producertech)

by Producertech

House Production in Logic Pro by Andy Lee (Producertech)

Producertech Presents a great course for anyone wanting to know how to make house in Logic, brought to you by Andy Lee – a professional producer and creator of numerous award-winning sample packs on Loopmasters.

In this course, Andy takes you through each of the main stages of making a track, from the initial groove creation to processing and bouncing the final master.

In addition to the lessons, the course also comes with the Logic Projects made in the lessons, some written tips and tricks and a large bonus pack of loops and samples. Before purchasing, listen to the track from the course:

Module Details

1. Creating the Groove

Provides a thorough guide to creating a house groove, by placing individual audio samples in the arrangement, creating EXS drum presets and sequencing them, slicing and editing apple loops, adding vocal sounds and much more. There are also some tips on how to start processing and mixing some of the parts.

2. Mixing Part 1

This lesson focuses on how to mix the various parts in the groove, starting with the bassline, which has distortion and equalisation added. Then, there is a thorough guide to the compressor effect, showing how to use it in all of its modes, in order to achieve effects like transient shaping, frequency-dependent compression, New York compression, drum bus and sidechain compression.

3. Mixing Part 2

This next part on mixing looks at how to create a 3-dimensional space for a mix, beginning with panning techniques, then moving on to sample delay, spreading effects and then reverb. Several reverb aux tracks are created, including a short plate reverb and a longer platinum reverb. There are also some useful tips for how to combine reverb and EQ in order to position parts in the mix.

4. Automation and Arrangement

This lesson looks at how to use automation to add effects sweeps to tracks, so that more space and atmospheric changes can be created in the arrangement, as well as various parts developed. Then there is a guide to how to turn a groove into a full track, showing how to make an intro and create variations and breaks. Additional parts and further automation are then added to provide extra interest and excitement.

5. Mastering

After creating a stereo bounce of the track, the lesson provides an excellent guide to how to make a quality basic master file, first showing how to EQ the mix with Logic’s linear phase EQ effect. Then, offering some very useful tips for how to separate and then process the mono and stereo information in the mix, in order to have proper control over the width and different frequency components of the mastered file.

6. Kick Drum Masterclass

This last lesson is a bonus module showing how to create your own quality kick drums. Multiple drum samples are combined, edited and mixed. Then, Ultrabeat is used to add more low frequency tonal elements to the drum. All three tracks are then processed with overdrive and limiting, and delays are added to the different drum tracks to add extra character to the final combined sound.

Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

4. Complete Guide to Sylenth 1 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Sylenth 1 (Producertech)

Want to learn how one of the most powerful synths on the market really works? This three and a half hour set of tutorials takes you from the very beginning right through to advanced sound design, explaining all of the synthesizing technology and features included in this cutting-edge instrument. The course delves into all the main stages of subtractive synthesis, covering the oscillators, filters, modulators and FX Rack. A third of the modules are also spent showing how to create different presets, combining all of the techniques into some useful, practical examples to help students put everything into context.

The course is presented in a series of online videos, with accompanying written notes and synth presets to work to, as well as more than £25 worth of audio samples supplied by our sponsor Loopmasters. Don’t miss out on this essential guide to synthesis and sound design for one of the most popular synths on the market today!

Check out the free module below and CLICK HERE to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction and Overview

Introduces the course style and provides an overview of the instrument, covering the main display areas, where synth presets can be browsed, managed and edited. Begins to teach the structure of various presets, briefly explaining what soundsources, layers, parts and multis are.

2. Oscillators

Covers Omnisphere’s oscillator section, when working in synth and sample mode. There is an explanation of the different basic waveform types and their frequency (harmonic) content. Some editing tips are revealed, including detuning and applying of unison voices. All techniques are combined into some examples of simple patch creation.

3. Filters

Teaches about the different types of filters available and the effect they have on the sound. Also provides a guide to the way signals can be routed through the filters, showing some examples of parallel and series setups.

4. Envelopes

Takes a look at envelopes, starting with the most common type, the amplitude envelope, which changes the level over time. Then moves on to another popular use of envelope modulation, where the filter frequency is manipulated.

5. LFOs and Looped Envelopes

Continues looking at modulation by exploring the continuous types featured on Omnisphere, those being looped envelopes and LFOs. Includes a guide to making the classic dubstep wobble bass.

6. Advanced Oscillators Controls

Goes back over the oscillator waveform types in more detail and then provides a guide to the LFOs featured on Sylenth 1. Shows how to set up the classic dubstep wobble bass type effects, as well as showing how stacked modulation can be set up, where one modulator controls the parameters of another.

7. Reverb, Delay and Modulation FX

Starts to teach about the huge range of effects featured in Omnisphere’s FX Rack, beginning with a detailed look at reverb and delay, before moving on to modulation effects, such as flanger, chorus and phaser.

8. Arpeggiator

Gives a guide to using Omnisphere’s Arpeggiator to create all sorts of rhythmic and melodic patterns, by holding down one or more notes, including a sequenced bassline and glockenspiel part.

9. Making a Fat Bass Preset

Gives a practical example of how to apply many of the techniques taught in order to produce a fat bass preset.

10. Making a Lead Patch

Provides a wealth of tips on how to make a lead patch, with two slightly edited but very different-sounding results.

11. Making an SFX Multi

Shows how to make a multi preset, containing several different FX sounds, including impacts, sweeps and builds.

10. Making a Groove Multi

Shows the full potential of Omnisphere by demonstrating how it can be used to simultaneously produce drums, bass and lead parts, in order to make a deep dubstep groove.

Sample Module – Intro Lesson


5. The Making of ‘Do You Wanna 808’ by Santé (Producertech)

by Producertech

The Making of 'Do You Wanna 808' by Santé (Producertech)

Producertech Presents a course that uncovers the secrets behind making a classic house track, by one of Berlin’s hottest up and coming DJs and Producers, Santé. 

This series of tutorials were shot live in Santé’s studio and guide you through how to use Ableton Live to construct the hit record ‘Do You Wanna 808’ on Desolat, showing how to sequence the beats, make the bassline and then how to arrange, mix and process all the parts, creating both mastered and pre-mastered versions of the song.

In addition to the lessons, the course also comes with a selection of loops from Santé’s Groove Essentials Loopmasters sample pack, including drums, bass, tops, music and FX.

Module Details

Module 1 – Creating the Beats and Bass

Santé creates and imports the main components in the track, sequencing the beats with a drum rack, playing in the bassline with the V-Station and then adding various loops and sounds which form the basic building blocks of the track.

Module 2 – Improving the Mix

This lesson shows how to process the different sounds using both insert effects such as compressors and EQs, as well as different send effects, to improve the sound of the mix and give the track some professional touches.

Module 3 – Arranging the Track

This lesson is a thorough guide to arranging the track, showing how each part is constructed and the various editing and automation used to create breakdowns, rises in tension and massive dancefloor-destroying drops, whilst ensuring the track also has good continuity and flow.

Module 4 – Final Touches and Mastering

This movie shows how to tweak the final mix and some easy ways of preparing your track for uploading or sending to a label, using Live’s various mastering effects.


6. DJ Fracture presents Drum and Bass in Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

DJ Fracture presents Drum and Bass in Ableton Live (Producertech)

Ever wanted to know the entire process of building a drum and bass track by one of the UK’s most talented producers? In this set of tutorials, Astrophonica label owner DJ Fracture takes you through each stage of working on a track, beginning with setting up the session, creating the beats, bassline and main lead parts, to building the arrangement, breakdowns, intro and outro, right through to tweaking the final mix.

All of the techniques are shown using Live’s built-in instruments and effects, with the main parts created using Drum Racks, Sampler and Analog. As well as improving your knowledge of Live’s instruments and effects, the course will teach you new ways to compose and produce music, helping you gain a fresh perspective and taking your abilities to new heights.

The course is presented in a series of online videos, with accompanying Live sessions to work to, as well as more than £15 worth of additional drum and bass samples, supplied by our sponsor Loopmasters. Don’t miss out on this essential guide to drum and bass production for one of the most popular DAWs on the market today!

Watch the free module below and download the free information pack by clicking here without any obligation to buy, and also check out the track made on the course:

Module Details

1. Introduction and Setup

Briefly covers some tips for setting up, including the addition of certain effects to the master bus to help provide visual references whilst creating the mix.

2. Beats

Shows how to construct a drum and bass break, by slicing samples, re-sequencing drums and editing velocities and timing to refine the groove. Then, processing each drum, as well as all drums together, to make the beats nice and chunky.

3. Bass

Shows how to create a fat bass line, beginning with sample selection and melodic composition, then moving through to processing with various effects. Also teaches a skillful technique of splitting the bass line across multiple tracks so that unique areas of the frequency spectrum can be isolated.

4. Making the Hook

Demonstrates how to make a catchy hook, meaning a main riff that runs through the track to provide further melodic and rhythmic interest. A MIDI clip is created for the part, after which various MIDI and effects parameters are edited to radically alter the sound.

5. Arrangement Part I

Begins constructing the arrangement by recording in the main sections from session view and copying and pasting to get the basic song structure in place.

6. Arrangement Part II

Continues looking at arranging, by adding more percussion and SFX to sections to ease transitions and improve the mix. Also gets into parameter automation, to show how parts can be developed throughout the track.

7. Breakdown

Shows how to create a breakdown, by adding new transitional lead parts and FX, then how these parts can be processed to create a contrasting spacious section, which builds towards the main drop.

8. Intro and Outro

Works on the beginning and end of the track, showing how various parts can be introduced and then used to take the track to its conclusion.

9. Refining the Final Mix

Shows some final checks for polishing the sound and making sure the mix is where it should be, in terms of levels, EQ and other effects.

SAMPLE MODULE – Excerpt from Module 2 on Creating Beats

This movie is the first half of lesson 2 on creating beats.


7. Complete Beginners Guide to Logic Pro 9 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Beginners Guide to Logic Pro 9 (Producertech)

Our Logic Level 1 course provides students with all the knowledge necessary to start making music with Logic Pro 9. As well as being guided through all the main areas of the software, the modules also provide more general producer information about music, performance and production.

At the end of the course, students should have all the basic skills required to produce their own tracks, with the modules going from the jamming stage right through to final mastering. Students are even introduced to important sound creation methods, such as sampling and synthesizing, the latter with Novation’s included classic Bass Station software synth.

Also included with course is nearly 1GB of royalty-free samples from Loopmasters. 

Click here to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction to the Course and Logic Basic Concepts

Introduces the course style and preferred working methods then moves onto the first steps with Logic, beginning with the preferences and setting up and then moving onto the software layout and various display and edit options. As well explaining the basics of what each area of the software is for, there are some tips for how to speed up navigation and how to create your own customised displays using the screensets facility.

2. Getting Started and Creating/Editing Audio Regions – Introduction to Looping and Flex

Shows how to get started with a session and how to create tracks. Covers how to create audio regions from the File Browser, using Apple Loops or with samples from Finder, then how to set up loops in the Arrange window and within regions. Also introduces flex time and how to manipulate an audio region’s waveform.

3. Creating and Editing MIDI Regions – Introduction to the Piano Roll

Briefly explains MIDI and how to set up a MIDI track and Logic instrument. Looks at what a MIDI region is and the various ways it can be created, such as playing and drawing. Then, how to edit MIDI notes in the Piano Roll window, focussing on quantisation and timing, note length, velocity and pitch.

4. More Region Editing and Arranging – Introduction to the Sample Editor

Teaches how to edit audio regions in the Arrange window using the scissors and marquee tools, as well as how to edit audio files in the Sample Editor. Also shows more about transposing regions to stay in key with your song. Demonstrates some methods for laying out a track, as well as showing how to navigate round an arrangement and speed up the editing process.

5. Recording in Logic

Explains the basics of audio recording, such as how to set up a track’s input and monitoring settings. Shows the various ways that audio can be recorded, such as continuously, with autopunch or in cycle mode. Then how to edit the recorded audio, including how to create a comp of the best sections from multiple takes. Also shows how to turn your recording into an Apple loop.

6. Processing Audio – Introduction to Compression and Filtering

Shows how to add one or more inserts to tracks and how to manage them, then explains presets and how to make your own. Explains the basics of compression, and provides a comprehensive guide to the most important parameters. Also introduces the concept of filtering and manipulating of frequencies, including an introduction to frequency modulation.

7. Building a Drum Track – Introduction to Ultrabeat

Describes the process of constructing drums using Ultrabeat. Shows how to create and edit a hip hop break using a MIDI region and adjusting parameters in Ultrabeat’s assignment strip. Also teaches how to make a house drum loop using Ultrabeat’s sequencer, showing how to import your own samples as well as how to edit the key parameters in the synth section like filtering and pitch.

8. Mixing Part 1 – Levels, Panning and EQ

Covers working with the Logic mixer, showing all the different parameters available. Teaches about equalisation, track grouping and various techniques for adjusting levels and panning.

9. Mixing Part 2 – Working with Effects – An introduction to Reverb, Delay and Chorus

Shows some of the most important effects for mixing a track, beginning with reverb. Explains how to create and use send FX, showing how to make an auxiliary reverb bus. Teaches the basics and some more advanced uses for delays – showing a longer delay and higher feedback setting for bridging gaps between sections, and use of smaller delay time for effect. Also introduces chorus.

10. Basic Sampling – Introduction to EXS24

Explains what a sampler is and how it works. Shows how to select different instruments in EXS24 and then how to edit their level and pitch. Teaches how to import sounds and then how to edit them in the EXS and Sample Editor, showing trimming, transposition and looping. Also introduces ADSR envelopes, starting with the amplitude envelope and moving onto the filter envelope.

11. Introduction to Synthesizing – Using the Bass Station plug-in

Explains the basics of synthesizing using the included Novation Bass Station as an example. Shows the main parameters available in each synth section, demonstrating oscillator waveforms and pitch, and envelope and LFO modulation. Ends by showing how to use this knowledge to create your own sounds.

12. More on MIDI – Controlling Logic remotely and using Hardware Synths

Teaches how to control Logic with different types of MIDI controller, including a guide to the Controller Assignments facility for mapping software parameters. There is also an explanation of how to set up key commands for various software functions and a demonstration of how to integrate hardware synthesizers with your song.

13. Introduction to Mastering – Using Multipressor, Limiter and other mastering tools

Explains what mastering is and shows the various stages, focussing mainly on multiband compression and limiting. Also shows Spectral Analysis and EQ, more subtle refining techniques and how to export (bounce) your final track.

14. Introduction to MainStage – Creating a Concert

Teaches you how to use the performance software MainStage to create a concert setup for performing with an instrument or microphone. There is a guide to the layout and usage of the two edit modes, showing you how to construct patches and set up the workspace, as well as how to play along to different audio loops, and also how to map various areas of the concert to your MIDI controller.


8. Advanced Production Techniques in Reason (Producertech)

by Producertech

Advanced Production Techniques in Reason (Producertech)

Our Level 2 Advanced Logic Online Course provides experienced Logic users with all the knowledge needed to get the very best out of all the advanced features and workflow methods available in Logic Pro.

At the end of this course, students will understand advanced techniques for composing, producing and performing music, including sampling, synthesizing and processing with various effects. Throughout the course, techniques are combined and applied to practical situations to show how technical knowledge can be used to take your music in new and exciting directions. Students will be able to free themselves from technical restraints and enable a clear path to channel their artistic vision.

Also included with course are nearly 1GB of samples from Loopmasters and a cult classic Bass Station software synth from Novation.

Click here to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Gating and a Lesson in Sidechaining Techniques

Teaches how to use a gate and various sidechaining techniques in Logic, beginning with the common technique of compressor sidechaining known as ‘pumping’. Then, this concept is expanded by demonstrating other more imaginative ways of sidechaining melodic and percussive tracks using Auto Filter and Noise Gate.

2. Automation and other Advanced Mixing Techniques

Shows how to make the best use of automation in Logic, including how to create automated loops as well as how to make longer, more gradual effects progressions. Then, some different methods for vocal and instrument techniques are taught, such as EQing, de-essing, using auxiliary tracks for FX sends and much more. The module comes with unmixed and mixed versions of a dubstep remix allowing students to practice their mixing techniques.

3. Advanced Drums I – Creating Drum Sounds with Ultrabeat

Provides a thorough guide to the controls available on Ultrabeat so you can confidently edit, enhance and create drums, FX and other synth sounds using the instrument. The various sound generating engines are explained and there are lessons in how to use the filters and 4 envelopes to control the level and frequencies of drums over time. Then, the techniques are applied to creating some of the most common drums like kicks, snares and hats.

4. Advanced Drums II – Creating and Processing a House Beat

Teaches how to sequence drums in Ultrabeat, how to make a groove and how to create automated parameter sequences. Then, there are some techniques for mixing the drums, beginning with routing them individually to auxiliary tracks on the mixer and then showing the various effects that can be applied to improve the sound.

5. Advanced Synthesizing I – Subtractive Synthesis with the ES Range: ES M/P/E

Shows how to use the the first 3 synths from the ES range, ES M, ES P and ES E. These are the simplest instruments in the ES range and are a good build up to the more comprehensive ES 1 and ES 2 synths. After running through each of the synths individually, showing various examples of patch programming, they are combined to make a couple of layered sounds using two creative methods.

6. Advanced Sampling – Creating Layered Sounds and Advanced Modulation with EXS24

A lesson in the more advanced features of EXS24, beginning with how to take layered sounds similar to those made in the previous synthesizing module and turn them into EXS instruments that can be recalled instantly at any point. There is also a guide to using the modulation router to create multiple modulation settings in order to make interesting bassline progressions.

7. Advanced Synthesizing II – Subtractive and Wavetable Synthesis with ES 1 and 2

Teaches how to use ES 1 and 2 to edit or create sounds. After running through the controls on each, focussing mostly on the parameters not looked at on synths and samplers covered up to this point on the course, there are some tips for how to program different sounds with ES 2, including an acoustic plucked string patch and a fat sync’d bass.

8. Advanced Effects – Using Modulation Effects and Delays to Create Glitch

Provides a guide to using delays and some new modulation effects to create interesting sounds and glitch. Glitch is the sound of obvious digital errors and artifacts like distortion and aliasing, which produce a distinctive character that has its own genre of electronic music and is welcomed in many others too. In addition to running through the controls on each effect, there are examples of how to use them in certain ways to radically transform sounds and add an extra dimension to your music.

9. Advanced MIDI – An Introduction to the Environment

Shows how to use Logic’s Environment to create different MIDI effects in your session. After running through Layers and the overall structure, there is a guide to some of the different Objects that are available, including arpeggiator, touch tracks, and transformers. Then, these objects are combined in different ways to produce a range of devices, such as chord and scale effects, in order to create more exciting patterns and melodies with Logic’s instruments.

10. Advanced Synthesizing III – FM Synthesis with EFM, ES2 and Ultrabeat

Explains the concept of FM synthesis and gives examples of how it is applied in Logic’s instruments, beginning with EFM and then moving on to ES2 and Ultrabeat. There are some examples of how to make classic FM sounds, such as bells and metallic patches, as well as some more diverse applications, including making fat bass loops by automating FM parameters.

11. Advanced Synthesizing IV – Component Modelling with Sculpture

Teaches how to use component modelling in Sculpture to make acoustic patches like bass guitars and flutes. Then, shows how the instrument can also be used to make dirtier synth sounds and how the morph section allows the creation of glitchy evolving soundscapes and FX.

12. Piecing it all Together – Producing a Remix


9. Advanced Production Techniques in Logic Pro 9 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Advanced Production Techniques in Logic Pro 9 (Producertech)

Our brand new Level 2 Advanced Reason Online Course continues where the Level 1 course leaves off, and provides experienced Reason users with all the knowledge needed to get the very best out of all the advanced features and workflow methods available in Reason.

Throughout the course, techniques are combined and applied to practical situations to show how technical knowledge can be used to take your music in new and exciting directions. Through learning new skills, students will be able to free themselves from technical restraints and enable a clear path to channel their creativity and artistic vision.

At the end of this course, students will understand advanced techniques for composing, producing and performing music, including sampling, synthesizing and processing with various effects. 

Check out the free module below and CLICK HERE to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction – Gating and Sidechaining

This module is designed to extend your knowledge of effects processing by teaching you about how to use a gate and various sidechaining techniques in Record and Reason, beginning with the common technique of compressor sidechaining known as ‘pumping’. Then, this concept is expanded by demonstrating other more imaginative ways of sidechaining melodic or percussive tracks using the ECF-42 filter and the main mixer channel strip gate.

2. Automation and Advanced Mixing

This module is designed to teach you some advanced mixing techniques, including how automation can be used to create looped sequences as well as longer effects progressions within a song. There is also some advice for how to improve the sound of the main instruments in your song, focussing this time on bass.

3. Advanced Drums I

This module is the first of two lessons focussing on how to produce drums with Reason’s drum instrument Kong. This lesson provides a guide to how to create different drum sounds, explaining what each of the sound generators are and some different ways that they can be used.

4. Advanced Drums II

This module is the second advanced drum module, this time looking at the way drums can be mixed and effects applied, both internally with Kong or externally using other rack devices and the mixer. The first part of the lesson focusses on creating an electro house break, with individual aux effects processing and sub mixing of drums in the rack. The second part then looks at how to create an acoustic drum break, showing a totally different mixing method of routing them out of Kong and onto individual channel strips on the main mixer.

5. Advanced Synthesizing I – Malström

This module is the first advanced synthesizing lesson, taking a detailed look at Malstroem, Reason’s graintable synthesizer. There is a guide to each synth section, largely focussing on the features not seen on other instruments, such as new filter types and waveshaping, as well as examples of how these features can be used to create patches.

6. Advanced Sampling – NN-XT

This module teaches the inner workings of Reason’s advanced sampler NN-XT. Some of the techniques shown include how to create a synchronised vocal loop, how to make a multi-layered bass patch, how to create a monophonic and polyphonic lead and how to use the alternate and velocity range features to produce more realistic and unique patches.

7. Working With a Vocal

This module shows some of the ways a vocal can be recorded and mixed into Record or Reason version 6 onwards. Although recording vocals can’t be done in earlier versions of Reason, the vocals used in the session are imported into NN-XT in the Reason module session so students working with these versions of the software can try out many of the techniques taught. After covering some of the considerations for recording a vocal, there is a guide to the different ways you might want to apply various effects, such as compression, EQ and reverb. Then, some rarer techniques like de-essing and applying parallel compression and EQ are shown, as well as a lesson on how to use the pitch correction and transposing device Neptune.

8. Advanced Synthesizing – Thor

This module takes a close look at Thor, Reason’s powerful semi-modular instrument, capable of many kinds of synthesis, including subtractive, wavetable and FM. FM, or Frequency Modulation, hasn’t been seen so far on the course so this is looked at in more detail, with an explanation of the main principles and how it can be used to make various classic and original patches.

9. Advanced Effects I – Vocoder and Matrix

This module is the first advanced effects lesson, taking a look at two new devices, BV512 Vocoder and Matrix. After giving a detailed rundown of each device, there are some examples of how they can be used to create a range of classic parts in a song.

10. Advanced Effects II – Combinator

This module is the second of the advanced effects modules, this time focussing on Combinator, and how it can be used to create a range of different effects patches, including a simple doubler, a multi-band compressor and a drum slicer and glitcher!

11. Advanced Combinator

This module first expands the principle of multi-band processing to a different effect, namely chorus, where the different bands of the bass track from the previous module are treated. The remainder of the module shows how a fat bass instrument patch can be created with combinator, designed for using in harder styles of dance music such as breaks, drum and bass and dubstep.

12. Putting it All Together – Producing a Remix

This module combines a load of the techniques learned on the course into a remix session. The song is a dubstep track, remixing the ‘Long Lost Sun’ track ‘Who I Am’. The module provides a thorough guide to each part of the arrangement, looking at how tracks are created and developed through the song, with regards to harmony and timbre.

13. New Effects in Reason 6

This module provides a guide to the three new effects in Reason 6: Alligator – a triple-filtered gate for creating rhythmic spectral effects with tracks, Pulveriser – a fat compressor with distortion and filtering, and The Echo – a comprehensive delay and echo device.

14. Bonus Module – New Features in Reason 7 Part II

Teaches some of the new features on the mixer in Reason 7, such as the graphical EQ display, and the ability to create Bus and Parallel channels for instant submixing and parallel processing of parts, all of which is done via the creation of a deep house track.


10. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX (Producertech)

by Producertech

Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX (Producertech)

The extensive set of tutorials takes you from the initial beat construction, right through to final mixing and mastering of a heavy Dubstep track, including numerous composition, arrangement and sound design techniques along the way.

The course is brought to you by FracTroniX, the producer behind the eclectic, bass-driven vibes of Metaphra and the upfront, experimental drum and bass of Defazed. Check out the track made on the course on Producertech’s Soundcloud page below.

The course comes complete with the Logic Project created in the lessons so you can see exactly how everything is done and therefore truly get to grips with every technique explored in this in-depth set of lessons. There are also over 100MB of bonus hits and loops from 2 quality Loopmasters Dubstep Sample Packs.

Module Details

1. Module 1 – Introduction

This lesson provides an introduction to the Logic Project created and developed throughout the course, showing all of the components that make it up. Then, the drums are explored in greater detail, with each individual track being introduced and played in isolation, to help better understand the role it plays.

2. Module 2 – Sample Selection and Basic Sequencing

This lesson shows the various considerations when choosing different drum samples for a dubstep track, using a spectral analyser to help visualise each choice. Then, the samples are sequenced into a simple 4-bar break.

3. Module 3 – Adding Percussion, Fills, Reverse Samples and Balancing the Levels

This lesson fills out the drum break with some additional percussion sounds, showing how they’re selected and sequenced. Then, a drum fill from Logic’s library is added, which is sliced up and rearranged. Reverse samples are added to make the break flow, and finally the levels are adjusted to improve the mix.

4. Module 4 – Adding Effects and Creating a Submix

This lesson looks at how to process the individual drum tracks, largely with compression and EQ, to eliminate problems and improve the sound. Then, send FX are added to create extra depth, and finally a submix track is made, allowing all the drums to be processed and mixed on their own separate mixer track.

5. Module 5 – Creating Bass Patches with ES2

This lesson gives an overview of ES2, showing how it can be used to create some simple but fat-sounding bass patches on multiple tracks, including the reese bass, fat square and band-pass square.

6. Module 6 – Advanced Bass Patch Editing with ES2

This lesson gets more technical with each of the patches, setting up some interesting modulation of the filters and pitch, to provide even more variation to each of the bass sounds. A wobble performance preset is made out of the fat square patch, the reese patch is modulated by an LFO with changing rate to create a ‘shakedown’ preset, and a more human-sounding ‘talking’ bitcrushed bass is constructed by modulating the blend of digital waveforms on ES2.

7. Module 7 – Sequencing the Bass

This module shows how the bassline is created by playing and drawing in MIDI regions for each of the bass parts and then editing them in various ways to create a gnarly sequence. Automated filter sweeps and pitch slides are added and the mix is enhanced through the addition of bus compression and distortion effects.

8. Module 8 – Mixing and Processing the Bass

This lesson teaches how to improve the mix, by making adjustments to the levels and frequencies in each bass part using EQ and sidechain compression, as well as closely examining the stereo width. Then, further processing is applied to individual bass frequency bands, through more stereo imaging and a reverb send effect. Finally, a sub bass track is added to fatten up the bottom end.

9. Module 9 – Working out the Structure and starting the Intro

This movie gives an overview of how the main drums and bass have evolved since the last lesson, then begins to work on the structure and main sections of the track, using Logic’s marker strip to divide the bar ruler into segments. Then, audio regions are consolidated and various drums are pasted across and edited to begin building the Intro.

10. Module 10 – Developing the Intro

This lesson shows how to construct the Intro for the track, by first creating a lead melody, and then making a pad patch, both with ES2. These parts are then processed with various effects to help them evolve and lead up to the breakdown, and various drums are added to help the track build.

11. Module 11 – More Intro development and creating the first Breakdown

This lesson beefs up the Intro with more melodic parts, which help add atmosphere and interest to the start of the track. Then, various FX sounds are created, including impacts, risers and noise sweeps, to help ease the transitions between sections and create extra tension. Finally, the drums are sequenced to arrange the lead up to the first drop. See an excerpt of this module below:

12. Module 12 – Finishing the Arrangement

In this last lesson, the bass parts are edited and resequenced to create some new variations to the main 16-bar groove, which incorporate different synths and accompaniment that lead up to the second Breakdown. The movie ends by embellishing the second Breakdown and Drop, and then creating the track Outro.

13. Module 13 – Adding Sub Bass Drops, Incidental Effects and Movement to Sweep FX

After going through the changes to the Logic Project made throughout the course, the lesson goes on to show how to make final improvements and adjustments to the arrangement. These include adding sub bass drops for further impact at the start of certain sections, adding FX sounds to enhance the texture of the mix and create more interest, and using the Tremelo insert to produce a pseudo sidechaining effect on the sweep FX to add more movement and dynamic excitement.

14. Module 14 – More Sidechain Compression and Parameter Automation

This module covers how to further tweak the mix by adding sidechain compression to one or two parts, to help sounds become less flat and work more with each other. Then, all of the transitions throughout the arrangement are checked, to hear where volume, filter or other effects automation is required.

15. Module 15 – Finishing the Mix

This last mixing lesson shows how to make final adjustments to the each track, to ensure the mix is exactly where it needs to be. Levels are modified and EQ changes are applied, as well as some additional insert and send effects added, to make sure parts are standing out enough or not jumping out too much, and each sound is just right.

16. Module 16 – Mastering

This lesson shows how to master the final mix. Firstly, the submix tracks are saturated with an overdrive effect, then a metering plug-in is used to view the waveform of the output mix. Multipressor is then added, to get full control over the different bands of frequencies in the mix, and two limiters (adaptive and normal) are used to get the level nice and loud. Once mastered, a final bounce of the track is done.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • over 100MB of bonus Dubstep samples

11. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 4 – Mixing and Mastering (Producertech)

by Producertech

Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX - Part 4 - Mixing and Mastering (Producertech)

If you want to know how to arrange Dubstep or similar heavy, hard-hitting styles of music then this course is for you!

The course is brought to you by FracTroniX, the producer behind the eclectic bass-driven vibes of Metaphra and the upfront, experimental drum and bass of Defazed, and is split into several parts. Each part focuses on a different area of production, with this one tackling the arrangement and building of the track.

The course comes complete with the Logic Project used in the lessons so you can see exactly how everything is done and therefore truly get to grips with every technique explored in this in-depth course.

Module Details

1. Working out the Structure and starting the Intro

This movie gives an overview of how the main drums and bass have evolved since the last lesson, then begins to work on the structure and main sections of the track, using Logic’s marker strip to divide the bar ruler into segments. Then, audio regions are consolidated and various drums are pasted across and edited to begin building the Intro.

2. Developing the Intro

This lesson shows how to construct the Intro for the track, by first creating a lead melody, and then making a pad patch, both with ES2. These parts are then processed with various effects to help them evolve and lead up to the breakdown, and various drums are added to help the track build.

3. More Intro development and creating the first Breakdown

This lesson beefs up the Intro with more melodic parts, which help add atmosphere and interest to the start of the track. Then, various FX sounds are created, including impacts, risers and noise sweeps, to help ease the transitions between sections and create extra tension. Finally, the drums are sequenced to arrange the lead up to the first drop. See an excerpt of this module below:

4. Finishing the Arrangement

In this last lesson, the bass parts are edited and resequenced to create some new variations to the main 16-bar groove, which incorporate different synths and accompaniment that lead up to the second Breakdown. The movie ends by embellishing the second Breakdown and Drop, and then creating the track Outro.

Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

12. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 1 – Creating Beats (Producertech)

by Producertech

Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX - Part 1 - Creating Beats (Producertech)

If you want to know how to mix and master Dubstep or similar heavy, hard-hitting styles of music then this course is for you!

The course is brought to you by FracTroniX, the producer behind the eclectic bass-driven vibes of Metaphra and the upfront, experimental drum and bass of Defazed, and is split into several parts. Each part focuses on a different area of production, with this one teaching how to polish the final mix and then master the track.

The course comes complete with the Logic Project used in the lessons so you can see exactly how everything is done and therefore truly get to grips with every technique explored in this in-depth course.

Module Details

1. Adding Sub Bass Drops, Incidental Effects and Movement to Sweep FX

After going through the changes to the Logic Project made throughout the course, the lesson goes on to show how to make final improvements and adjustments to the arrangement. These include adding sub bass drops for further impact at the start of certain sections, adding FX sounds to enhance the texture of the mix and create more interest, and using the Tremelo insert to produce a pseudo sidechaining effect on the sweep FX to add more movement and dynamic excitement.

2. More Sidechain Compression and Parameter Automation

This module covers how to further tweak the mix by adding sidechain compression to one or two parts, to help sounds become less flat and work more with each other. Then, all of the transitions throughout the arrangement are checked, to hear where volume, filter or other effects automation is required.

3. Finishing the Mix

This last mixing lesson shows how to make final adjustments to the each track, to ensure the mix is exactly where it needs to be. Levels are modified and EQ changes are applied, as well as some additional insert and send effects added, to make sure parts are standing out enough or not jumping out too much, and each sound is just right.

4. Mastering

This lesson shows how to master the final mix. Firstly, the submix tracks are saturated with an overdrive effect, then a metering plug-in is used to view the waveform of the output mix. Multipressor is then added, to get full control over the different bands of frequencies in the mix, and two limiters (adaptive and normal) are used to get the level nice and loud. Once mastered, a final bounce of the track is done.

Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

13. Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX – Part 3 – Arranging (Producertech)

by Producertech

Dubstep Production in Logic Pro by FracTroniX - Part 3 - Arranging (Producertech)

If you want to know how to produce beats for Dubstep or similar heavy, hard-hitting styles of music then this course is for you!

The course is brought to you by FracTroniX, the producer behind the eclectic bass-driven vibes of Metaphra and the upfront, experimental drum and bass of Defazed, and is split into several parts. Each part focuses on a different area of production, with this one uncovering the secrets behind producing seriously heavy beats!

The tutorials comes complete with the Logic Project used in the lessons so you can see exactly how everything is done and therefore truly get to grips with every technique explored in this in-depth course.

Module Details

1. Module 1 – Introduction

This lesson provides an introduction to the Logic Project created and developed throughout the course, showing all of the components that make it up. Then, the drums are explored in greater detail, with each individual track being introduced and played in isolation, to help better understand the role it plays.

2. Module 2 – Sample Selection and Basic Sequencing

This lesson shows the various considerations when choosing different drum samples for a dubstep track, using a spectral analyser to help visualise each choice. Then, the samples are sequenced into a simple 4-bar break.

3. Module 3 – Adding Percussion, Fills, Reverse Samples and Balancing the Levels

This lesson fills out the drum break with some additional percussion sounds, showing how they’re selected and sequenced. Then, a drum fill from Logic’s library is added, which is sliced up and rearranged. Reverse samples are added to make the break flow, and finally the levels are adjusted to improve the mix.

4. Module 4 – Adding Effects and Creating a Submix

This lesson looks at how to process the individual drum tracks, largely with compression and EQ, to eliminate problems and improve the sound. Then, send FX are added to create extra depth, and finally a submix track is made, allowing all the drums to be processed and mixed on their own separate mixer track.

Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

14. Building Custom Mastering Weapons in Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Building Custom Mastering Weapons in Ableton Live (Producertech)

These lessons teach you how to build custom mastering weapons racks, including an Aphex-style Exciter, a Bass Maximiser and various Stereo Enhancement tools. The Course is brought to you by professional mastering engineer and owner of Zeitgeist Mastering, Nick D’Ombrain.

In addition to the streamed lessons, all 8 rack presets created on the course come as a downloadable pack, which can be opened up in Live to unleash the power of this devastating mastering arsenal!

These tutorials are part of the complete course – Mastering in the Box with Ableton Live.

Module Details

1. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 1 (Aphex Style Exciter)

It’s time to expand Live’s effects range and think about custom designing a few specific mastering weapons racks. The famous Aphex Aural Exciter sound can be fairly closely simulated in Live, with just a bit of effort. In this chapter we’ll put it together, explaining the thought process and every step along the way.

2. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 2 (Bass Maximiser)

Similarly to the previous lesson, in this module we’ll consider how we can achieve a little extra bass, especially when mastering for good translation on small systems or speakers. It’s not uncommon in the age of the Internet to make sure that the bass or the low end of a track can be heard on systems of all sizes, including tinny PC speakers or trashy mp3 headphones. The plugin we build here will do exactly that and can be compared to the likes of the Waves MaxxBass example.

3. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 3 (Stereo Enhancer)

Stereo Enhancement is a very sought after & necessary tool in any mastering arsenal. Since we do not have anything of mastering quality at our fingertips in the standard range of plugins, we’ll look at how we can best assemble an enhancer that is both flexible and musical. You’ll wonder how you lived without it! By the end of Pt. 3, you’ll be confident with macros, control mapping, audio effects racks and signal chains within Ableton Live.

4. BONUS MODULE – Building and Applying a 3-Band Exciter & Mid Side Compressor

In this lesson, we’ll build 2 more extremely useful mastering tools. The Mid Side Compressor can really achieve results that a standard compressor cannot as we experienced in the mastering of a full track chapter. The 3-Band Exciter is simple in design but also very effective – a plug-in of desired taste but nonetheless a great alternative way to add a touch of bass impact, mid presence or warmth, or even some high sizzle to a master!

Any references to any brands on this site/page, including reference to brands and instruments, are provided for description purposes only. For example references to instrument brands are provided to describe the sound of the instrument and/or the instrument used in the sample. Loopmasters do not have (nor do they claim) any association with or endorsement by these brands. Any goodwill attached to those brands rest with the brand owner. Loopmasters or its Suppliers do not accept any liability in relation to the content of the sample or the accuracy of the description. “RHODES” is a registered trademark of Joseph A Brandstetter.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 8 custom mastering weapons rack presets

15. Mastering in the Box with Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Mastering in the Box with Ableton Live (Producertech)

These lessons teach you how to build custom mastering weapons racks, including an Aphex-style Exciter, a Bass Maximiser and various Stereo Enhancement tools. The Course is brought to you by professional mastering engineer and owner of Zeitgeist Mastering, Nick D’Ombrain.

In addition to the streamed lessons, all 8 rack presets created on the course come as a downloadable pack, which can be opened up in Live to unleash the power of this devastating mastering arsenal!

These tutorials are part of the complete course – Mastering in the Box with Ableton Live.

Module Details

1. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 1 (Aphex Style Exciter)

It’s time to expand Live’s effects range and think about custom designing a few specific mastering weapons racks. The famous Aphex Aural Exciter sound can be fairly closely simulated in Live, with just a bit of effort. In this chapter we’ll put it together, explaining the thought process and every step along the way.

2. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 2 (Bass Maximiser)

Similarly to the previous lesson, in this module we’ll consider how we can achieve a little extra bass, especially when mastering for good translation on small systems or speakers. It’s not uncommon in the age of the Internet to make sure that the bass or the low end of a track can be heard on systems of all sizes, including tinny PC speakers or trashy mp3 headphones. The plugin we build here will do exactly that and can be compared to the likes of the Waves MaxxBass example.

3. Building Custom Mastering Weapons Pt. 3 (Stereo Enhancer)

Stereo Enhancement is a very sought after & necessary tool in any mastering arsenal. Since we do not have anything of mastering quality at our fingertips in the standard range of plugins, we’ll look at how we can best assemble an enhancer that is both flexible and musical. You’ll wonder how you lived without it! By the end of Pt. 3, you’ll be confident with macros, control mapping, audio effects racks and signal chains within Ableton Live.

4. BONUS MODULE – Building and Applying a 3-Band Exciter & Mid Side Compressor

In this lesson, we’ll build 2 more extremely useful mastering tools. The Mid Side Compressor can really achieve results that a standard compressor cannot as we experienced in the mastering of a full track chapter. The 3-Band Exciter is simple in design but also very effective – a plug-in of desired taste but nonetheless a great alternative way to add a touch of bass impact, mid presence or warmth, or even some high sizzle to a master!

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 8 custom mastering weapons rack presets

16. Pro Audio Mastering Tips in Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Pro Audio Mastering Tips in Ableton Live (Producertech)

Want to truly get to grips with NI Massive? This 3-hour set of tutorials takes you from the very beginning right through to advanced sound design, explaining all of the synthesizing technology included in this powerful, cutting-edge instrument. The course delves into all the main stages of subtractive synthesis, covering the oscillators, filters, modulators and global and insert FX. After all of the synth sections have been explored, there are some lessons on preset making, combining all of the techniques into some practical examples to help students put everything into context.

The course is presented in a series of online videos, with accompanying written notes and Massive presets to work to, as well as 100 additional Massive presets from Loopmasters. Don’t miss out on this essential guide to synthesis and sound design for one of the most popular synths on the market today!

Check out the free module below and CLICK HERE to download the free information pack without any obligation to buy.

Module Details

1. Introduction and Overview – Free Module

Introduces the Course Style and provides an overview of the instrument, covering the three main display areas, where synth presets can be browsed, managed and edited. There is also a brief guide to setting up the synth in standalone mode.

2. Oscillators and Noise Generator

Covers Massive’s sound-generators, those being the three oscillators and noise generator, explaining the different types of waveforms available in each, and how they can be edited. In addition to demonstrating how each control works, there is an example of how to combine them in order to create a simple patch.

3. Filters

Teaches about the different types of filters available and the effect they have on the sound. Also provides a guide to the way signals can be routed through the filters, showing some examples of parallel and series setups.

4. Effects and Routing

Goes through all of the effects available on Massive, including a more comprehensive guide to the most popular ones. Shows how different effects can be applied to the main output, as well as various points earlier in the signal path.

5. Introduction to Modulation – Envelopes

Takes a look at envelopes, starting with the most common type, the amplitude envelope, which changes the level over time. Then moves on to some other classic uses of envelope modulation, where filter frequency and oscillator pitch are manipulated.

6. Cyclic Modulation – Looped Envelopes and LFOs

Continues looking at modulation by exploring the continuous types featured on Massive, those being looped envelopes and LFOs. Includes a guide to making the classic dubstep wobble bass.

7. Modulation Part III – Stepper and Performer

Runs through Massive’s 2 onboard sequencers, showing how they can be used to create all sorts of incredible effects. There is also a brief guide to making your own chorus.

8. Modulation Part IV – The Modulation Oscillator

Teaches some of the different ways Massive’s modulation oscillator can be used to modify a preset. There is also a demonstration of the different types of synthesis and modulation it provides, including FM (frequency modulation) and Ring modulation, showing how to create some classic and more diverse sounds.

9. Additional Oscillator Settings and Voicing

Gives a run through of all the additional parameters featured in the central display, including how to apply glide and vibrato, how to set up polyphony and legato, and also the setting up of unisono voices and keyboard tracking.

10. Global Settings, MIDI Control and more

Ties up all the loose ends by explaining the remaining controls and features not covered so far, including how to use the Feedback and Bypass circuits, how to stack modulation and apply sidechain modulation, how to set up the macros and other performance modulators, as well as a whole host of global settings.

11. Making a Fat Bass Preset

Gives a practical example of how to apply many of the techniques taught in order to produce a fat bass preset.

10. Making a Multi-Layered Preset

Shows the full potential of Massive by demonstrating how it can be used to simultaneously produce drums, bass and lead parts, in order to make a house groove.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Massive presets from the course
  • written notes with each lesson
  • extra £25 of Loopmasters Massive presets

17 . Complete Guide to Massive (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Massive (Producertech)

This Producertech course is presented by Dale Anderson, one of the leading DJs and Producers in the house scene since 1998, with hit records on multiple compilations, including Ministry of Sound, Renaissance, Defected and Armada.

In this set of tutorials, Dale shows how to produce the classic anthem ‘Makes Me Feel’, originally created alongside Anil Chawla. After demonstrating how the main parts are put together, such as the beats, bass, pads and other accompaniments, there is a series of lessons that competently show how to create a professional-quality mix, covering the balancing, effects processing, sub-mixing and other essential stages required to achieve the necessary width and depth. The course ends with a bonus lesson, covering the musical theory behind the harmonies and chord progressions used in this style of classic, deep house.

Accompanying the lessons is a download pack, containing not only the Logic Project created in the tutorials, including all audio files and sampler presets, but also a bonus pack of Loopmasters audio samples.

Check out the Free Sample Module below for an example of the lesson format and structure, and listen to the track from the course here:

Module Details

1. Introduction and Setup

In this lesson, Dale introduces the course and explains what the lessons will consist of, then carries out some basic setting up such as getting the tempo correct and configuring screensets.

2. Creating the Beats

In this module, Dale shows how the beats of the track are constructed, largely using different EXS24 instrument presets. After finding the right samples for the main drums and percussion, Dale sequences them, layers additional samples on top and makes sure the tuning is correct.

3. Making the Pads

This lesson shows how to create the lush pads used in the track, which is initially done by working out the chords using one of EXS24’s piano presets. After the MIDI regions are made, they are used to trigger ES2, stepping through some different pad presets until the right one is located and then edited to fine tune the sound.

4. Adding the Bassline

This module shows how the bassline is created, by playing and then editing the MIDI notes, then selecting an appropriate sound for the track.

5. Adding the Shaker and Tuned Percussion

In this module, Dale shows how to create a shaker part, using various samples and delay effects. Then, a tuned percussion part is sequenced and processed with reverb to make the mix sound even larger.

6. Creating the String and Piano parts

In this lesson, Dale adds some additional lead and accompanying sounds, including strings, regular and electric piano, working out their melodies and chord progressions and then slotting them into the arrangement.

7. Adding the Flute and Arranging the Track

This lesson covers the adding of a flute part to the track, which is then processed, after which Dale works out the arrangement of the entire song.

8. Spot FX

In this lesson, Dale shows how to add different FX sounds to the arrangement, such as crashes and reverse crashes, noise sweeps and delayed noise, which are placed in the song to ease between sections and create extra emphasis at appropriate points.

9. Mixing Part I

This module shows how to start organising a session before beginning the mixing process, covering the reordering of tracks, colour coding, creating of a sidechain track and setting up of auxiliary channels for different groups of tracks in order to submix and process with send FX.

10. Mixing Part II

This lesson begins the mixing process, looking at how to create a basic balance of tracks, bringing the levels up one by one, whilst using EQ to shape parts and the Direction Mixer effect to adjust the width. Other inserts such as compressors and modulation effects like chorus are used to refine the mix further.

11. Mixing Part III

This third mixing module continues looking at how to polish the mix, by further adjusting levels, applying more compression and EQ to parts, then setting up two reverb buses of different sizes, which are added to different tracks in varying amounts.

12. Mixing Part IV

This last mixing lesson shows how to add automation throughout the arrangement, to help with each transition, and checks the levels and effects processing on each track again, to ensure the highest quality final mix.

13. A Bit of Theory

In this bonus module, Dale explains the chord progressions and harmonies used in the track, to help provide more of a musical understanding of how this style of deep house is produced.

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – Module 11 – Mixing Part III

 
 
Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.
  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

18. Creating Classic House in Logic By Dale Anderson (Producertech)

by Producertech

Creating Classic House in Logic By Dale Anderson (Producertech)

This Producertech course is presented by Dale Anderson, one of the leading DJs and Producers in the house scene since 1998, with hit records on multiple compilations, including Ministry of Sound, Renaissance, Defected and Armada.

In this set of tutorials, Dale shows how to produce the classic anthem ‘Makes Me Feel’, originally created alongside Anil Chawla. After demonstrating how the main parts are put together, such as the beats, bass, pads and other accompaniments, there is a series of lessons that competently show how to create a professional-quality mix, covering the balancing, effects processing, sub-mixing and other essential stages required to achieve the necessary width and depth. The course ends with a bonus lesson, covering the musical theory behind the harmonies and chord progressions used in this style of classic, deep house.

Accompanying the lessons is a download pack, containing not only the Logic Project created in the tutorials, including all audio files and sampler presets, but also a bonus pack of Loopmasters audio samples.

Check out the Free Sample Module below for an example of the lesson format and structure, and listen to the track from the course here:

Module Details

1. Introduction and Setup

In this lesson, Dale introduces the course and explains what the lessons will consist of, then carries out some basic setting up such as getting the tempo correct and configuring screensets.

2. Creating the Beats

In this module, Dale shows how the beats of the track are constructed, largely using different EXS24 instrument presets. After finding the right samples for the main drums and percussion, Dale sequences them, layers additional samples on top and makes sure the tuning is correct.

3. Making the Pads

This lesson shows how to create the lush pads used in the track, which is initially done by working out the chords using one of EXS24’s piano presets. After the MIDI regions are made, they are used to trigger ES2, stepping through some different pad presets until the right one is located and then edited to fine tune the sound.

4. Adding the Bassline

This module shows how the bassline is created, by playing and then editing the MIDI notes, then selecting an appropriate sound for the track.

5. Adding the Shaker and Tuned Percussion

In this module, Dale shows how to create a shaker part, using various samples and delay effects. Then, a tuned percussion part is sequenced and processed with reverb to make the mix sound even larger.

6. Creating the String and Piano parts

In this lesson, Dale adds some additional lead and accompanying sounds, including strings, regular and electric piano, working out their melodies and chord progressions and then slotting them into the arrangement.

7. Adding the Flute and Arranging the Track

This lesson covers the adding of a flute part to the track, which is then processed, after which Dale works out the arrangement of the entire song.

8. Spot FX

In this lesson, Dale shows how to add different FX sounds to the arrangement, such as crashes and reverse crashes, noise sweeps and delayed noise, which are placed in the song to ease between sections and create extra emphasis at appropriate points.

9. Mixing Part I

This module shows how to start organising a session before beginning the mixing process, covering the reordering of tracks, colour coding, creating of a sidechain track and setting up of auxiliary channels for different groups of tracks in order to submix and process with send FX.

10. Mixing Part II

This lesson begins the mixing process, looking at how to create a basic balance of tracks, bringing the levels up one by one, whilst using EQ to shape parts and the Direction Mixer effect to adjust the width. Other inserts such as compressors and modulation effects like chorus are used to refine the mix further.

11. Mixing Part III

This third mixing module continues looking at how to polish the mix, by further adjusting levels, applying more compression and EQ to parts, then setting up two reverb buses of different sizes, which are added to different tracks in varying amounts.

12. Mixing Part IV

This last mixing lesson shows how to add automation throughout the arrangement, to help with each transition, and checks the levels and effects processing on each track again, to ensure the highest quality final mix.

13. A Bit of Theory

In this bonus module, Dale explains the chord progressions and harmonies used in the track, to help provide more of a musical understanding of how this style of deep house is produced.

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – Module 11 – Mixing Part III

 
 
Please note: whilst this course is taught in Logic Pro 9, the techniques described are applicable to any version of Logic Pro.
  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Logic project from the course
  • bonus samples

19. Mastering Now – The Complete Guide (Producertech)

by Producertech

Mastering Now - The Complete Guide (Producertech)

Up until recent times, mastering audio has been something of a mysterious art that required mega dollars and experience to get release-worthy results… With the rapid evolution of dedicated software and technology, getting professional, release-ready results is now a possibility for everyone with the right knowledge and understanding!

Mastering Now – The Complete Guide is a comprehensive, in-depth look at audio mastering and will give you exactly what you need to begin or go further with your audio mastering with real confidence. The course consists of over 6 hours of dedicated mastering tutorials, including 3 real life example tracks mastered from start to finish, a guide to the tools of the trade, some of the more secret tools and processes used, and a look at how to improve your critical decision making. There is undoubtedly something in this course for everyone!

The tools and the theory you need to compete with today’s mastering standards are covered in a personal manner by Berlin-based and seasoned Mastering Engineer – Nicholas D’Ombrain. As the director of Zeitgeist Mastering and with years of experience mastering some big names and record labels across Berlin and beyond, you can rest assured that this course is tailored to your needs and is packed full of valuable tips and mastering know-how.

Module Details

1. BONUS MODULE – Preparing a Track for Mastering or Premastering

Covering the necessary steps and essential tips to prepare your track for optimum Mastering results. Mastering is only worth it if your track is correctly prepared. A total of 9 essential Premastering tips on how to go about it.

2. What’s It All About?

A look at what Mastering is in today’s industry, including some helpful tips on Acoustics, Monitoring, Mastering Environments and the general attitude towards the overall concept.

3. Analysing your audio and knowing what to work towards

Knowing what to work towards when Mastering can be very tricky to come to grips with, especially in the beginning, so this module looks at the ways in which we can effectively aid these daunting decisions. We’ll take a look at analysing waveforms, spectral analysis and what to expect from our audio.

4. Analogue Vs. Digital Processing

A brief look at Analogue and Digital Processing in modern Mastering applications.

5. The Signal or Processing Chain

Some helpful advice on the Mastering Signal Chain including some rules to remember and the possibility of changing the processing order.

6. Tools of The Trade – EQ

An in-depth look at Mastering EQ principles and possibilities, including the aided use of frequency spectrum analysis.

7. Tools of The Trade – Compression

A detailed look at Singleband Mastering Compression, Level Metering options, know-how and best practice.

8. Tools of The Trade – Multiband Compression

An in-depth look at Multiband Mastering Compression and best practice.

9. Tools of The Trade – Stereo Enhancement and Imaging

Some of the fundamentals behind Stereo Imaging, including accurate metering, treating common issues, adding stereo enhancement and some tips on mastering for vinyl.

10. Tools of The Trade – Maximising and Limiting

A complete look at Mastering Limiting/Maximising, RMS levels and metering scales, and an overview of the Loudness Wars and what they’re all about…

11. Tools of the Trade – Dithering or Applying Dither

Explains what dither is, when to apply it and some of the best dither types available.

12. Secret Tools – Reverb

A look at using Reverb in the Mastering environment.

13. Secret Tools – MaxxBass or Low Frequency Punch

Possible techniques and plug-ins used to treat the often lacking low end of a track… Whether it’s adding more Sub Bass or punch, or making the bass more pronounced on a range of systems (including small speakers), we look at some possible Mastering options.

14. Secret Tools – Harmonic Excitement

A guide to adding some excitement, sparkle and shine to a track using industry-changing effects such as the Aphex Aural Exciter.

15. Secret Tools – Tape Saturation or Analogue Warmth

A look at introducing Analogue warmth to a track in a digital world!

16. Putting Theory into practice – Mastering from start to finish – TRACK 1 (Waves Plug-ins)

Mastering a track from a Berlin-based Electronic duo from start to finish, using predominantly plug-ins from the Waves collection.

17. Putting Theory into practice – Mastering from start to finish – TRACK 2 (A loud Master with iZotope’s Ozone 5)

Here, we look at satisfying a client’s request and competing with the Loudness wars, as we Master an Electro track purely using iZotope’s Ozone 5 to a loud standard. Some more in-depth mastering techniques such as parameter automation are looked at.

18. Putting Theory into practice – Mastering from start to finish – TRACK 3 (A range of Plug-ins)

Here, to mix it up, we cover the mastering of an Italian pop rock track and use a range of the most appropriate plug-ins available.


20. Techno and Tech House Production in Live by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

by Producertech

Techno and Tech House Production in Live by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

This course is a must-see for anyone wanting to learn the secrets of tech house or techno production. The lessons provide a thorough, in-depth guide to constructing a banging dancefloor filler, from one of the most respected producers of the last decade, Paul Maddox.

With numerous releases under his own name and also his co-productions as Spektre, on labels like Data, Positiva, Tidy and Viscious, his tracks have seen support from revered DJs such as Carl Cox, Richie Hawtin and James Zabiela. On this course, Paul shares the secrets of his success, uncovering his methodical and clever approach to producing slamming techno and house.

Accompanying the lessons is a download pack containing the Live set made throughout the course, as well as a huge pack of free bonus samples.

Check out the Track made on the course, Let You Go, as well as the Free Sample Module below for an example of the lesson format and structure.

Module Details

1. Creating the Low Frequency Drums and Bass

In this lesson, Paul shows how to create the bass parts in the track, those being the kick drum, and sub and percussive basslines. A pounding kick is made by layering drums together, then adjusting the frequencies and amplitude envelopes accordingly, after which a modulating sub bassline is made with Operator and a pitched down, sliced percussion part is sequenced and processed to add further rhythmic interest and groove. The parts are all then processed together, to help them gel, add extra warmth and fatness to the very bottom end.

2. Adding High Frequency Drums

This module shows how to create the upper frequency drums and percussion parts, such as hi hats, shaker and claps. Parts are sequenced, mixed and processed, then enhanced with additional loops, which are shaped and moulded to slot perfectly into the track. The timing and groove of drums is then adjusted accordingly, so that all parts are suitable synchronised. Finally, a ride cymbal is added on top, which is panned and delayed to create extra width, as well as sidechained to provide more energy and dynamic interest.

3. Making Synth and Vocal Parts

In this module, Paul creates melodic parts to go with the track, starting with a synth lead, made by layering two of Live’s instruments together to produce a detroit-style, stabbed chord sound, which is then sequenced into several different MIDI patterns and processed with effects. A vocal loop is then chopped up onto several pads of a drum rack, which is then programmed to create another catchy hook, as well as processed and mixed.

4. Arranging Part I – Laying Out and Automation

This lesson provides a lengthy guide to laying out the track, initially by creating the basic foundations, then by more detailed editing, to create automated mixer and device parameter sequences, which help develop parts and smoothly blend from one section to another.

5. Arranging Part II – Adding FX

In this module, Paul demonstrates how to add effects parts to an arrangement, using conventional and more diverse techniques, to help build energy and create more impact and atmosphere in the track. Simple, affected percussion parts are added, a fill is resequenced and processed, and unique FX sounds are made using Live’s instruments and by resampling existing audio in the track.

6. Final Mixing and Mastering

This module shows how to carry out final checks and alterations to the arrangement, then how to complete the mixing stage, getting the levels exactly right. Once the mixdown is complete, Paul creates pre-mastered (for external mastering) and mastered (for playing out) versions of the track.

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – EXCERPT FROM MODULE 1 ON CREATING BEATS

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Live project from the course
  • 200MB of bonus Loopmasters samples

21. House Production with Ableton Push Part I by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

by Producertech

House Production with Ableton Push Part I by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

This is a course for anyone wanting to get into producing House music with Ableton’s Push, by one of the most respected producers of the last decade, Paul Maddox. With numerous releases under his own name and also his co- productions as Spektre, on labels like Data, Positiva, Tidy and Viscious, his tracks have seen support from revered DJs such as Carl Cox, Richie Hawtin and James Zabiela.

On this course, Paul shows a hands-on approach to making music, using Ableton’s revolutionary control surface Push. Multiple drum tracks are created, sequenced, layered and processed, with parts played in live or programmed with Push’s step sequencer and then edited with the hardware controls. A funky bassline is then added to complete the groove, created from scratch with the Live Suite synth Operator.

Accompanying the lessons is a download pack containing the Live Set from the course and over 100 extra house drums hits and bass samples from the Loopmasters collection.

Check out the free sample module below for an example of the course content and delivery….

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – FIRST 10 MINUTES FROM LESSON 1

Module Details

1. Programming the Main Drum Track

In this lesson, Paul loads a 909 kit into track 1 and then uses Push’s step sequencer to program the drums, laying down the kick, snare, hats and other percussion that’s added to inject character and life into the beat. As well as showing how to process the drums from Push, Paul shows a few different ways of adding shuffle and a natural sound to the groove.

2. Adding Extra Drums and Percussion

In this lesson, Paul shows how to take slices from a live drum loop and layer them with the main drums, as well as add some additional percussion, demonstrating some other ways that Push can be used to program drums. He then creates and edits some new clips, to start building fills and variations to the beat.

3. Drum Mixing

The third lesson on the course tackles how to mix the drums, looking at balancing and adding a number of different effects, including EQ, reverb and compression.

4. Adding a Bassline

This final lesson shows how to add a bassline using Push, by first creating the bass sound with Live’s Operator, using FM to add some nice texture to the patch, and then by playing in a cool pattern with the pads. The sound is then processed and the pattern edited to complete the 8-bar sequence.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Live set from the course
  • over 100 extra house drums/bass hits

22. Producing Glitch Hop Beats and Bass with Maschine by Defazed (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producing Glitch Hop Beats and Bass with Maschine by Defazed (Producertech)

Talented producer and tutor Defazed, aka FracTroniX, is back with a brand new course, to coincide with his new musical direction. With a solid background in the heavier, darker side of production, having numerous releases under Defazed and Metaphra in genres like Neurofunk and Drum and Bass, he’s found new inspiration of late in Glitch Hop.

After the creation of his six and half hour set of tutorials on producing Dubstep in Logic Pro, he started to experiment with NI’s awesome Groove Production Studio, Maschine. The powerful software/hardware combo proved the perfect instrument for unleashing the heavy beats, twisted basslines, glitchy accompaniment and huge leads that produce the distinctive and highly appealing style.

In this first part, he guides you through the steps required to create a fat drum break and rude bassline to go with it, with bass sounds created from scratch with Massive and resampled in Maschine, then programmed into various patterns and mixed with the beats. The lessons come with the Maschine project from the course, as well as a bonus pack of samples from Loopmasters.

Check out the final track from the complete course (course out May 2014) on Soundcloud, below:

Module Details

1. Creating the Beats

The first tutorial runs through the main drums in the track, showing the samples used, then how to work them into a break with the Maschine hardware. Patterns are then edited and processed with various effects.

2. Creating the Bass Part I

In this lesson, Defazed provides a step-by-step guide to making the basslines in the track, showing how they are created from scratch with Massive and then made into patterns to go with the drum break.

3. Creating the Bass Part II

Having shown how to create bass sounds from scratch in the last lesson, Defazed now demonstrates how to resample bass. Then, there are some more tips for editing and processing the entire bass group to fatten up the mix.

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – EXCERPT FROM MODULE 3 ON RESAMPLING BASS

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Maschine project made on the course
  • 140MB of bonus glitch hop samples

23. House Production with Maschine by Rob Jones (Producertech)

by Producertech

House Production with Maschine by Rob Jones (Producertech)

This course takes you through all of the stages of creating a classic, melodic, deep house track with Maschine, from the initial creation of the beats, right through to exporting the final mix, with virtually the whole process done from the hardware control surface.

After the beats are constructed in the first lesson, which is available as a free sample of the course (link below), the second lesson shows how all of the melodic parts of the track are conceived, using the main chord sequence as the basis. A lengthy vocal sample is then edited, sliced and processed to form a number of different vocal parts, used throughout the track, which is then arranged and mixed, all within Maschine.

In addition to the Maschine project from the course, there are 4 Maschine kits supplied from Loopmasters’ Niche Audio range, as well as a bonus pack of additional House samples too. Check out the sample module and also track from the course by clicking the links below, for a taster of what the course provides:

Module Details

1. Creating the Beats

In this lesson, which is the free sample from the course, Rob shows how the beats are made, by programming in the main and secondary drums as well as some FX, all of which is done either in step mode or by recording in parts, and then editing and processing individual sounds and the entire drums group with various effects.

2. Creating the Melodic Parts

This lesson shows how all of the melodic parts in the track are conceived, those being the bassline, main chords, other lead sounds and strings. The fundamental theory behind parts is explained, outlining how each one fits with the other sounds in the song, and the overall resulting harmony. Then, once the patterns have been created, Rob jams with them to show how the arrangement could be constructed.

3. Creating the Vocal Parts

This lesson shows how a large vocal sample can be chopped, sliced, edited and rearranged to form a variety of different vocal patterns for a track, either as prominent main elements or subtler accompaniments.

4. Arranging the Track

This lesson shows how to arrange a track from the elements created so far on the course, at first laying down the basic structure and then going in and fine tuning sections, to add smaller edits and variations, parameter automation and so on.

5. The Final Mix

This lesson runs through the finished arrangement, explaining how parts have been developed and tweaked, and the processing used on individual sounds, groups and the master, in order to polish and hone the final mix.

FREE SAMPLE MODULE – MODULE 1 ON CREATING BEATS

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Maschine project of completed track
  • 4 Niche Audio Maschine kits
  • bonus samples pack

24. Producer’s Guide to Music Theory with Maschine (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer’s Guide to Music Theory with Maschine (Producertech)

If you own Maschine and feel you could do with a bit more knowledge on the theoretical side of music, to help you understand how to create basslines, chord sequences and other musical parts in a particular key, then this course is for you.

Created by accomplished music producer and classically trained musician, Rob Jones, the course begins by explaining the principles of the key of a song and what major and minor scales are, before showing how that knowledge can be used to make melodies or riffs using various intervals and chords, in order to produce basslines, a main hook, lead or pad sound, to create the main groove or form the breakdown of a track.

As well as showing many examples of all of the techniques taught, which are outlined in the written notes and saved into the Maschine project files that come with the course, there are also exercise projects, for practicing identifying keys and making basslines or chord sequences, to put your newly acquired skills to the test. Check out the free lesson excerpt below before signing up, for an example of the course content and delivery…

Module Details

1. Key signature and Major/Minor Scales

After explaining what the key of a song means, there is a guide to the major and minor scales, showing what they are and how to play them with Maschine.

2. Creating Basslines in a Minor Key

This lesson teaches how to form basslines in a minor key, applying the knowledge from the previous lesson into a series of examples showing how to play a whole load of patterns, ranging in length and complexity.

3. Intervals

This lesson shows how cool accompaniment can be constructed purely by playing intervals from a particular scale, with each pattern creating a different mood and harmony.

4. Chords Part I

This lesson explains what chords are and many of the different types, from simple triads, to more complex jazzy chords, like sevenths and ninths. The principles are put into practice in an example project, by playing numerous different sustained and stabbed chord patterns over a bassline.

5. Chords Part II

This lesson extends the knowledge from the previous lesson, showing several examples of how to create longer and more complex chord progressions, that either stay in one key or modulate to other keys. These sequences compliment the main groove and also form the basis of an epic breakdown in one example.

6. Creating Melodic Accompaniment

This lesson shows how different melodic parts are conceived, in order to create all of the basic building blocks for a track. In addition to a bassline and main chord sequence, several arpeggiated lead parts are made, as well as a lush strings pattern.

7. Practice your skills!

This lesson gives a rundown of the practice projects that come with the course, providing an example to each of the exercises, which include identifying the key of a song from various musical parts, as well as creating basslines and chord sequences in various keys to form different harmonic sequences.

FREE SAMPLE – FIRST 10 MINS FROM MODULE 3 ON INTERVALS

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • maschine projects for every lesson
  • written notes with each module 
  • diagrams of scales and chord types 
  • 20 practice projects with video guide and answers

25. Complete Guide to Maschine MKII (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Maschine MKII (Producertech)

This course takes you through every part of the Maschine v2 software and hardware, slowly explaining how each one works and the ways they can be used to create a variety of different styles of music.

The lessons begin by showing how a pattern is constructed, by playing the pads, or drawing in events. Then, there are lessons covering the various pad modes, including step mode, keyboard mode and various velocity modes, explaining how to use them and when they are most suitable. There are then lessons on Scenes and building arrangements within Maschine, the Sampling facility and how to record and edit your own samples, and finally 2 lessons on effects, that teach the full range of effects in the library and how they can be used as inserts or sends for processing sounds, groups and the master bus.

The course comes with written notes, as well as the Maschine projects created in the movies. Plus, there are 240MB of royalty-free samples from Loopmasters included in the course pack. Before signing up, check out the free sample lesson embedded below, which provides an introduction to Maschine and the course.

Module Details

Module 1 – Introduction to Maschine – FREE SAMPLE

This movie provides an overview of Maschine, explaining how the software and hardware work and demonstrating all of the main features. This is done in the context of a completed project, from the final module on the course, as well as showing how a project can get up and running with the hardware in no time at all. The lesson is intended as a quick guide to everything, whilst the remainder of the course then goes through each of these things and much more, slowly and in greater detail.

Module 2 – Pattern Creation I

This module starts to teach you how different patterns can be created, predominantly by playing in events with the hardware pads. Then, there is a guide to some important editing operations, including examples of automatic and manual quantizing and adjusting velocity values.

Module 3 – Sound Slots

This module looks at the individual parts that make up each group, which are the 16 sound slots that can be played using Maschine’s pads. These are often single samples, as you find in Maschine’s factory kits, but can also be any instrument or plug-in you choose. However, this lesson focuses on adding and editing samples, so you can see how to create your own group from scratch.

Module 4 – Pattern Creation II – Pad Modes

This module teaches the various pad modes available on Maschine, which allow them to be used in a variety of different ways to create patterns, including fixed velocity and 16-velocity modes, keyboard mode and step mode.

Module 5 – Working with Scenes

This module gives you a thorough explanation of how scenes work, which are the vertical columns in the upper half of the software that contain different combinations of patterns, allowing you to switch from one part of a song to another for realtime jamming, or arrange and play an entire song from start to finish.

Module 6 – Sampling

This module shows how Maschine’s Sampling facility can be used to add your own sounds to songs, by recording and then editing them in a number of ways. There’s also a guide to how to slice up larger samples and assign them to Maschine’s pads for innovative ways of performing live or producing.

Module 7 – Effects

This lesson runs you through how to apply effects processing to sounds within Maschine, be they individual sound slots in a group, whole groups or the master output, so all groups simultaneously. As well as providing a guide to the range of effects on offer and how to use them, this should also help to further develop your understanding of the Modules section of the software.

Module 8 – Advanced Effects and Routing

This module looks at some more advanced effects processing techniques, including how to automate parameters, how to create send effects and then also how to route sounds in and out of Maschine, allowing them to be mixed and processed using other software or hardware.

Bonus Module I – The Controller Editor

This lesson shows how the Controller Editor can be used to turn Maschine into a comprehensive control surface for Ableton Live.

Bonus Module II – Using Maschine in a DAW

This bonus tutorial gives a thorough guide to using Maschine in plug-in mode within a DAW like Live or Logic, including how to automate parameters.

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 3.5 hours of tutorials
  • written notes 
  • maschine projects
  • 240MB of bonus samples

26. Drum & Bass Production with Maschine by DJ Fracture (Producertech)

by Producertech

Drum & Bass Production with Maschine by DJ Fracture (Producertech)

Back by popular demand, Astrophonica label owner DJ Fracture returns with a brand new course for Native Instrument’s Maschine, uncovering the secrets behind producing his distinctive style of Drum and Bass. Focussing mainly on the hardware, the tutorials go through the creation of each rhythmic and melodic part within a track, using a range of pad modes and techniques, before concluding with lessons that focus on the newer aspects of the Maschine version 2 software, like the drum synth and mixer section.

With production expertise that spans the last 13 years, having released on renowned labels like Metalheadz, Hospital and Droppin’ Science, and having a passion for teaching and sharing knowledge, DJ Fracture has proven to be a welcome addition to the skilled team of Producertech tutors. As a follow up to his hugely inspiring Ableton Live course from last year, this latest endeavour into the world of online learning focuses on one of the more recent additions to his studio, Maschine.

In the first few lengthy lessons, Fracture focuses on the main elements of the track, demonstrating how the all important groove is constructed. Using a combination of step sequencing and playing live, patterns are developed, and sounds are carefully mixed and processed, with every action being carried out from the hardware control surface. After the main break is made from layered and compressed samples, sliced and resequenced loops, and sub and tops layers, catchy elements like pitched percussion and musical pad phrases are added to the arrangement, helping create a cohesive flow and add interest and originality to the track.

Once the bulk of the arrangement has been laid out, almost entirely without the use of the mouse, Fracture moves over to the software, taking a look at some of the newer features in Maschine version 2, such as how to beef up drums with the Drum Synth and numerous techniques for refining and polishing the mix. As with all Producertech courses, the final project made throughout the lessons is supplied as a download, along with 200MB of additional rude Drum and Bass samples from the extensive Loopmasters collection.

Track produced on the course:

Module Details

1. Creating the Beats

Fracture begins by showing how a fat DnB break is made, first by step sequencing and playing in sounds from a Maschine kit to create the main rhythm, and then embellishing the pattern with an additional group, containing a sliced and resequenced loop. Drums are processed individually and together to help beef up and unify the break.

2. Creating the Bass Part

The main bassline is created, by slicing a loop and then programming a new pattern, which is then processed with various effects, to produce the sub group. Two additional upper bass layer groups are then made, which are modulated with envelopes and different send effects to create two contrasting main groove sections.

3. Building the Arrangement

Taking the basic building blocks made in the previous 2 lessons, Fracture begins to lay out the track, starting by making a 16-bar section in the Scenes area. Patterns are duplicated and edited, and various automation applied to create interludes and turnarounds. Additional percussion parts are then applied to the next 16-bar section, to create more movement and interest, as well as a mini sub bass impact effect.

4. Making an Intro and Breakdown

Melodic parts such as pads and leads are created and programmed, then developed and woven with new drum patterns to form intro and breakdown sections, which are edited and processed with different insert and send effects.

5. Adding SFX

Numerous sound effects are added to the arrangement, to create atmosphere, smooth transitions, build tension, apply emphasis, fill out the mix and unify the track.

6. Fattening up the drums with Drum Synth

Fracture uses multiple instances of Drum Synth to layer up all the main drums, creating a much fuller sound.

7. Mixing and Mastering the Track

The new mixer section in Maschine version 2 is utilised in full as Fracture demonstrates pro tips for refining and tweaking the mix, including balancing, fine tuning compressors, EQs and other effects, then processing the output bus to create the final mastered track.

SAMPLE MODULE – Excerpt from Module 7 on Mixing

This movie is the first half of lesson 2 on creating beats:

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 3 hours of tutorials
  • maschine project
  • 200MB of bonus samples

27. Complete Glitch Hop Production with Maschine (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Glitch Hop Production with Maschine (Producertech)

In this course from Producertech, experienced producer Rich, aka Defazed, teaches how to make a heavy track in one of the most current and popular styles of electronic music – Glitch Hop. With a career spanning from classic Drum & Bass to the cutting edge of electronic music, and with releases on various record labels in the UK, Germany and the US, as well as a wealth of class-based teaching experience in a number of colleges, Defazed is ideally suited to teach the skills necessary to make professional music with Native Instruments’ Maschine.
 
(Please note, this contains the modules from Defazed’s ‘Producing Glitch Hop Beats and Bass’ course. A discount voucher is available for students who have already signed up for the reduced course)
 
In this course, Defazed breaks down a Glitch Hop track into its components, analysing the beats, bass and glitch elements, and demonstrating how to build up a track and give it the characteristic ambience. In addition, he takes you through Native Instruments’ Massive, a synthesiser with incredible flexibility, showing his techniques for creating hard-edged bass patches and building chord sequences, whilst discussing wavetable synthesis and the principles underpinning this technique, which is vital to electronic music. 
 
The lessons come with the Maschine project from the course, as well as 250MB of bonus samples from Loopmasters. Before signing up, have a listen to the track from the course, featured on The Glitch Shop Vol 2 compilation album:

This Course includes tutorials from Defazed’s Glitch Hop Beats and Bass Production course, so if already signed up to that, use the Coupon Code provided on that course to apply a discount when you check out.

 

Module Details

1: Introduction and Demo-track overview

Defazed starts the course by exploring the demo track. He goes through the different sounds and the processing applied, then shows how to set up the master channel for live performance.

2: Recording and Editing Beats

The existing beats are analysed and selecting the right samples is discussed. Defazed demonstrates how to map the drums to the hardware for maximum playability. He then records and edits a new beat, showing how editing from the hardware is quick and intuitive.

3: Glitch Percussion and Vocal Hits

Defazed demonstrates how to create intricate glitch percussion and loops using filters and automation. He then utilises these techniques to create an 8-bar drop by layering the glitch percussion and high impact hits.

4: Producing Glitch Hop Beats and Bass

In this lesson, Defazed provides a step-by-step guide to making the basslines in the track, showing how they are created from scratch with Massive and then made into patterns to go with the drum break.

5: Bassline Construction and Resampling

From start to finish, Defazed shows how to take a bass sound and sample it, goes through the processing on the bass group in detail and shows how the main hard-edged bass that is so characteristic of Glitch Hop is given its punch and power. A demonstration of his use of mid-side processing using Brainworx BX Control V2 is also given.

6: Melodic and Atmospheric Parts

Defazed shows his use of NI Massive to create chords by altering the fundamental frequency of the oscillators, demonstrating the individual effect on the sound that each one has and how he uses them to great effect. He shows how to add variation to different scenes and builds up a huge, dancefloor-filling sound.

7: Completing the Arrangement

In the penultimate lesson, an outro and additional atmospherics are created. Patterns are edited and additional automated effects applied to complete the arrangement.

8: Final Mix Tweaks, Master and Export

Defazed goes through the track, identifying and explaining weak and problem areas and how to improve them, whilst defining the Glitch Hop vibe. The overall mix is analysed and tweaked. A brief overview of sidechain compression, reverb levels and mastering is given before the final track is exported.

SAMPLE MODULE – Excerpt from Module 3 on Glitch Percussion and Vocal Hits

This movie is the first half of lesson 3, demonstrating how to put the Glitch in Glitch Hop :

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 3 hours of tutorials
  • Maschine project
  • 250MB of bonus samples

28. Making Melodic Parts for House with Push by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

by Producertech

Making Melodic Parts for House with Push by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

Continuing from House Production with Ableton Push Part I, experienced producer Paul Maddox takes you through the next phase of House production with Ableton’s award winning Push hardware controller. With releases under his own name and as part of the duo Spektre, on labels such as Data, Positiva, Tidy and Viscious, achieving BBC Radio 1 airplay and support from DJs Carl Cox, Richie Hawtin and James Zabiela, Paul Maddox is one of the hottest producers of the last decade.
 
In this course, Maddox demonstrates how to create the melodic elements of a House track using the vast instrumental functionality of Push. Slicing vocals, adding chords and using the melodic step sequencer and other techniques to create synth parts are all covered, with Paul’s informative commentary explaining in detail every step of the way. He demonstrates editing parts predominantly from the hardware, as well as processing with numerous effects. 
 
The course is available immediately after purchase, and can be streamed 24/7/365. Help is available on the Producertech forum, where students can interact with one another, as well as any tutors and the enthusiastic Producertech community. Accompanying the course is the Live set from the tutorials, as well as a sample pack containing 100 melodic samples from the Loopmasters collection, providing you with all the tools necessary for making original melodic parts of your own.
This course is a continuation of House Production with Ableton Push Part I by Paul Maddox.

Check out the sample module below! 

Module Details

1: Slicing and Editing a Vocal

In this lesson, Paul takes a vocal sample and demonstrates how to slice it up and map it to the drum rack, then plays it along to the existing beats and bass from House Production Part I, to liven up the track. He then demonstrates how to edit the vocal from the hardware, and adds FX to create variations in the timing and panning of the loop.

2: Creating and Programming Chords using Note Grid

Paul shows how to load a synth patch and change the scale on the note grid. He then discusses the chord shapes and patterns and how to utilise note grid intuitively, then creates a catchy chord pattern that interacts with the bass-line and shows how to vary it during the track, before demonstrating the use of MIDI and audio effects to thicken the texture and sit the sound in the mix.

3: Using the Melodic Step Sequencer to Create Patterns

In this lesson, Paul adds a plucked melodic synth, using Analog in Live. He demonstrates how to take the default patch and alter the settings to create a punchier, filtered sound. He then shows how to use the melodic step sequencer to create a hypnotic pattern, then adds effects and variations. Finally, he discusses the use of quantisation, and subtly alters the sequence so it compliments the other melodies whilst adding an extra dimension.

SAMPLE MODULE – Making a Classic House Chord Sequence with Push

This movie is an excerpt from module two, demonstrating creating chords with Ableton’s Push:

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Over 1hr of Pro Tips and Tricks
  • Live set from the course
  • 100 melodic house samples

29. Complete Guide to Maschine Studio (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Maschine Studio (Producertech)

The second course in the range of Complete Guides to Maschine by Producertech has now arrived, outlining in detail every aspect of the Maschine software and vast Studio hardware. The lengthy set of tutorials, which comes bundled with written notes, Maschine projects and 240MB of bonus samples, not only thoroughly explains each part of Maschine but also shows how to use the powerful groove production studio to create a wide variety of musical styles.
 
Brought to you by Producertech Course Director and professional producer Rob Jones, the lessons begin by taking you through all of the different ways patterns can be created using Studio, including how to play in parts, program in step mode and draw events, all of which are then edited both directly in the software and also entirely from the hardware control surface. In addition, there are lessons outlining how to create your own kits, by importing, editing and recording samples, as well as a thorough look at customising sounds with Maschine’s Sampler.
 
There are also lessons that teach how to lay out a track using Scene mode, how to process sounds and groups with insert and send effects, how to make use of Maschine’s extensive sample slicing and stretching facility, how to automate parameters onboard and in the DAW, how to use the hardware to control external software, and much more.

With nearly 4 hours of tutorials in total, which can be accessed from anywhere in the world at whatever times are preferred, plus a wealth of downloadable materials and support on the Producertech forum whenever help is required, this online course is essential viewing for any Studio owners wanting to truly master Maschine.

Check out the sample module below!
 
 

Module Details

Module 1: Introduction to Maschine

This movie provides an overview of Maschine, explaining how the software and hardware work and demonstrating all of the main features. This is done in the context of a completed project, from the final module on the course, as well as showing how a project can get up and running with the hardware in no time at all. The lesson is intended as a quick guide to everything, whilst the remainder of the course then goes through each of these things and much more, slowly and in greater detail.

Module 2: Pattern Creation 1

This module starts to teach you how different patterns can be created, predominantly by playing in events with the hardware pads. Then, there is a guide to some important editing operations, including examples of automatic and manual quantizing and adjusting velocity values.

Module 3: Sound Slots

This module looks at the individual parts that make up each group, which are the 16 sound slots that can be played using Maschine’s pads. These are often single samples, as you find in Maschine’s factory kits, but can also be any instrument or plug-in you choose. However, this lesson focuses on adding and editing samples, so you can see how to create your own group from scratch.

Module 4: Pattern Creation 2 – Pad Modes

This module teaches the various pad modes available on Maschine, which allow them to be used in a variety of different ways to create patterns, including fixed velocity and 16-velocity modes, keyboard mode and step mode.

Module 5: Working with Scenes

This module gives you a thorough explanation of how scenes work, which are the vertical columns in the upper half of the software that contain different combinations of patterns, allowing you to switch from one part of a song to another for realtime jamming, or arrange and play an entire song from start to finish.

Module 6: Sampling

This module shows how Maschine’s Sampling facility can be used to add your own sounds to songs, by recording and then editing them in a number of ways. There’s also a guide to how to slice up larger samples and assign them to Maschine’s pads for innovative ways of performing live or producing.

Module 7: Effects

This lesson runs you through how to apply effects processing to sounds within Maschine, be they individual sound slots in a group, whole groups or the master output, so all groups simultaneously. As well as providing a guide to the range of effects on offer and how to use them, this should also help to further develop your understanding of the Modules section of the software.

Module 8: Advanced Effects and Routing

This module looks at some more advanced effects processing techniques, including how to automate parameters, how to create send effects and then also how to route sounds in and out of Maschine, allowing them to be mixed and processed using other software or hardware.

Bonus Module 1 – The Controller Editor

This lesson shows how the Controller Editor can be used to turn Maschine into a comprehensive control surface for Ableton Live.

Bonus Module II – Using Maschine in a DAW

This bonus tutorial gives a thorough guide to using Maschine in plug-in mode within a DAW like Live or Logic, including how to automate parameters.

SAMPLE MODULE – Sample Slicing Tips in Maschine Studio – Complete Guide Excerpt

The excerpt shows how samples are internally recorded and then sliced, in order to be performed or resequenced using an individual sound or group.

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365 
  • Nearly 4 Hours of instruction
  • Written notes with every module
  • Maschine projects from the course
  • 240MB of bonus samples

30. Complete Guide to Compression (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Compression (Producertech)

Much used but rarely fully understood, compression is an incredible tool utilised by audio professionals in every field. These detailed lessons, taught by Course Director, professional producer and Music and Sound Recording graduate Rob Jones, will take you from a basic to a thorough understanding of this powerful effect. With visual and aural demonstrations, accompanied by a clear and informative commentary, by the end of the course you will have a thorough grasp of how single band and multiband compression functions and how to apply it to individual and groups of drums, vocals and the master buss.
 
The course starts by giving you a basic understanding of the parameters found on every compressor, including examples of their effects on dynamics and frequency, demonstrating how different settings can alter the sound both positively and negatively. Students learn how to use a compressor both as a precision tool and as a creative device, with specific examples and aural and visual demonstrations, to help get the most out of a mix.
 
The course is available immediately after purchase and is accessible 24/7/365, with help on hand from tutors on the Producertech forum when required. Accompanying the video lectures are the Live projects made throughout and detailed written notes explaining all of the concepts and techniques taught on the course. 
Check out the sample module below!
 

Module Details

Module 1: Compressor Basics

Going straight in with an example, Rob shows you how the different parameters on a standard compressor effect a drum loop. Clearly demonstrating the effects both visually and aurally, you’re given a detailed background on how the different parameters affect the signal.

Module 2: Compression’s Effect on Frequency and Level

In this lesson, Rob introduces you to the effect of compression on extremes of frequency. He demonstrates with the help of an analyser how applying hard compression, with varying attack times, alters the amount of high and low frequencies in relation to each other. This presentation enables you to hear how compression may suck the life out of your drums if overused.

Module 3: An Advanced Analysis of Attack and Release

In this module, you will be given a detailed look into the effect of some of the most commonly used parameters available on all compressors: Attack and Release. Using graphical displays, coupled with Rob’s experienced commentary, by the end of this lesson you will fully understand the application of these important functions.

Module 4: External Sidechain Sources – Pumping/Ducking

In this lesson Rob shows you how to implement one of the best creative compression techniques: ducking. With multiple uses, you will be taught how to create pumping basslines, using the compressor to create synergy between the drums and bass, as well as how to use ducking in podcasts and voiceovers. A detailed explanation and demonstration of common pitfalls round out this module.

Module 5: Sidechain EQ

Beyond the basic controls, the ability to properly use the compressor sidechain will make the biggest difference your sound. In this tutorial, Rob introduces you to the sidechain and demonstrates the use of EQ and filtering to really begin to master the functionality of your compressor.

Module 6: Multiband Compression and Mix Buss Compression

This module takes you into the world of multiband compression by comparing the effect of single band and multi band compressors on the stereo buss. Given the enhanced ability to set different compressor parameters at different frequencies, multiband compression is a highly effective tool to apply to the whole mix. Rob shows you how to manipulate this increased flexibility, alongside information on additional compressor settings, to give you total control over the dynamics of your track..

Module 7: Compressing a Kick Drum

Applying the skills you’ve learnt so far, Rob now demonstrates the best way to apply compression to a kick drum, adding punch and power without losing the attack. He also demonstrates compressing a clap sample to help it cut through the mix and round out the sound.

Module 8: Compressing a Vocal

In this lesson, Rob explains how you can utilise multiband and single band compression simultaneously, to subtly smooth out a voice that was recorded with large changes in level. His demonstration shows how to rectify level problems without introducing unwanted noise to the signal.

Module 9: De-essing a Vocal

In the final tutorial in this course, Rob demonstrates how you can implement any multiband compressor to work as a de-esser, cleaning up your vocals and removing unwanted sibilance (the high frequency ‘s’ and ‘sh’ sounds).

SAMPLE MODULE – Tutorial on Sidechain EQ from the Complete Guide to Compression

This excerpt demonstrates how to utilise the side-chain to get the most out of your compressor.

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Live set from the course
  • Detailed written notes for each lesson

31. Secrets of the Mashup by Elite Force (Producertech)

by Producertech

Secrets of the Mashup by Elite Force (Producertech)

Since 1996, Simon Shackleton has been producing and DJing across the globe as Elite Force. Famed for both his technical prowess and exceptional creative capacity, he has received support from legendary DJs like Sasha and Fatboy Slim. In this lengthy set of tutorials, he provides an insight into how this remixing master created his mix of M.A.D. (with Hatiras, Jelo, Stanton Warriors & Vandal), featured on his 2010 ‘Revamped’ album.

Throughout the course, the methods Elite Force utilises are dissected so you can understand not just how he works, but also the ‘why?’, which is fundamental to his ability to put together such vibrant and memorable mixes. By the end of the course you will have learnt how one of the most respected producers around uses these methods, as he imparts information to you in his clear and concise manner alongside real time demonstrations of these sophisticated techniques.

Alongside the two hours of video tutorials, the course also includes a 100MB bonus pack of samples courtesy of Loopmasters and the track M.A.D. For additional guidance on the techniques demonstrated, or to share your own tips and tricks, you can visit the Producertech forum where you can receive feedback and advice from other students and Producertech tutors. To get a taster for the course, listen to the dancefloor-destroying M.A.D. by Elite Force below!

Module 1: Introduction to the Revamp

Elite Force begins by explaining the concept of the revamp, covering his approach to giving existing material a new voice, including explanations about his workflow and aims that are so important to achieving an exciting mix.

Module 2: Selecting Samples and Creating the Drums

In this module, Elite Force begins to to reverse engineer the track M.A.D, talking about how to select loops and prepare them in Ableton Live. He then discusses the main drums, creating a strong rhythmic underpinning to lay funky samples and catchy hooks over, as well as specific production techniques and their importance to the overall sound.

Module 3: Extra Loops (focus on ‘Pop Your Cork’)

Focusing on the higher frequency elements of the track, Elite Force describes how to incorporate the feel of the original tracks into the mashup whilst maintaining your own musical identity. He describes the processing he uses to remove unwanted aspects of the samples, and use of aux sends to create a unified sound-scape.

Module 4: Transitions

In this lesson, Elite Force demonstrates how smooth changes between very different rhythmic parts can be achieved through careful selection and the right processing. He comments on how to retain focus when selecting different loops to create a coherent whole.

Module 5: Finishing the Drums

This lesson covers layering kick drums and crash cymbals, to add punch and bring together the drums without getting lost in the mud. The use of different cymbals and their purpose in a remix are described, with demonstrations of how to alter the envelope and pitch to add a sizzling, yet organic top end.

Module 6: Creating a Unified Texture

Using effects such as reverb and delay is a time honoured technique for setting the sonic landscape of your track. In this module, Elite Force shows how he utilises them, as well as controlling the stereo image, to set the different samples in their space across the soundscape.

Module 7: Musical Content

In this module, Elite Force breaks down some of the most important concepts to keep in mind when creating your track. He talks about using the bass part from Donkey Punch as the driving groove in the remix and why he selected it, as well as advanced techniques for processing.

Module 8: Breakdowns

Intrinsic to any remix, breakdowns can make or break a track. In this lesson, Elite Force shows you how he took samples from Vandal’s Mad as Hell and used FX and automation to draw in the listener and create huge builds to the drop, as well as how he increased the anticipation further with the second breakdown before leading to the outro.

Module 9: Additional Elements

Having put together the bones of the remix from the three main tracks, the texture of the revamp might be lacking. Rather than spending hours tweaking plugins, Elite Force shows you how he went searching through his expansive record collection and found exactly the right samples to pull the track together. This lesson concludes with a demonstration of using automation and FX sends with melodic elements to add interest.

Module 10: Things to Remember

This module contains tips and tricks and things to bear in mind throughout the creative process to help you get the most out of your revamp.

Module 11: Conclusion

This video concludes the Secrets of the Mashup course.

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • 100MB Pack of Bonus Samples
  • A Copy of the track M.A.D. – Elite Force Mix

32. Dubstep Production Techniques by Dodge & Fuski (Producertech)

by Producertech

Dubstep Production Techniques by Dodge & Fuski (Producertech)

With numerous consecutive number 1 spots in the Beatport Dubstep chart, there’s no denying that Dodge and Fuski are one of the biggest names in electronic music, rocking dancefloors worldwide with their devastating beats. In this new online course from Producertech, you’re invited into the studio to see exactly how that signature sound is created. The 2-part set of tutorials guides you through the process of producing a Dubstep anthem, describing each of the elements in a track and how they’re combined and laid out to form a successful arrangement.

The first part of the course walks through brand new single ‘Killer Bees’, just released on Disciple Recordings, enabling you to listen to each part of the track individually and understand the reasons for including them and the treatment required to make them sit well in the mix. There’s also an analysis of the arrangement and a breakdown of each section, explaining the evolution of the track and how it was conceived.

The second set of tutorials applies all of these techniques and more into creating a basic Dubstep arrangement from scratch, including the laying out and processing of beats, creation of the bassline, sound design and application of FX layers and builds – which are woven together into a simple song structure. Although the tracks are made in Cubase, the techniques can be easily applied to any music making platform, so the course is suitable for anyone, regardless of DAW preference.

After signing up, the tutorials are available to watch immediately, along with a 150MB bonus download pack of Dubstep samples. For more information, check out the course trailer and the free sample module below.

Part 1: ‘Killer Bees’

Module 1: ‘Killer Bees’ Introduction

In this module, Rob Talbott from DNF gives you an introduction to the course.

Module 2: ‘Killer Bees’ Drums

In this lesson, the fundamental drum sounds in the track are shown, how they were selected and the processing applied.

Module 3: ‘Killer Bees’ Main Bass 1

Turning to the bass, Rob shows you the isolated sound, its use in the arrangement and the techniques used to create the characteristic dubstep vibe.

Module 4: ‘Killer Bees’ Main Bass 2

In this module, the additional bass layers are explained and how they are utilised to great effect.

Module 5: ‘Killer Bees’ More Bass

Finishing off the section on bass sounds, Rob gives pro tips and tricks on different processing techniques and their applications.

Module 6: ‘Killer Bees’ Structure and Arrangement

In the penultimate lesson in the first half of the tutorial, the structure and arrangement of the track are analysed – with a focus on how it would be mixed and played out in a set.

Module 7: ‘Killer Bees’ Mix Bus Processing

Wrapping up the section about ‘Killer Bees’, the mix bus processing is explored, with a demonstration of an atypical use of limiters to sit the drums and bass together effectively.

Part 2: Creating a New Track

Module 8: Drums

Going straight in to creating the beats, Rob goes through sample selection, placement and EQing the kick and snare.

Module 9: Bass

In this module, Rob quickly sets up a bass patch in Massive. He then applies processing including reverb and demonstrates a creative use of multiband compression and other effects to sit the bass and drums together.

Module 10: Brass Stab

Adding a melodic part, Rob goes to Kontakt and selects a brass ensemble. He uses a powerful multiband compressor, after the reverb, to create an unusual, synthetic effect.

Module 11: Adding FX

In this section, FX are experimented with, which add interest to the track. Rob also alters some areas of the brass, to fix issues with clashing notes.

Module 12: Creating a Build with an FX Riser

Rob shows you how to create a build by automating various parameters on the drums, including resonance. Next, he creates a riser using Massive – showing some basic techniques for creating an intriguing sound that pulls the audience in to the drop.

Module 13: Sub Bass

In this lesson, the sub bass is split from the main bass part. This makes it possible to apply specific processing to the extreme low-end and mid parts, to add more depth to the track, without cluttering the bass.

Module 14: Finishing the Arrangement

This module gives you an overview of Rob’s approach to arrangement including standard layouts and tips about placement of melodic elements, inclusion of parts and a general discussion of arrangement methodology.

Module 15: Basic Mastering

In the final module, Rob gives you some basic mastering tips then sums up the course.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Nearly 90mins of Pro Tips and Tricks
  • Walkthrough of new single ‘Killer Bees’ 
  • 150MB Pack of bonus dubstep samples

33. Creating A Drum & Bass Groove with colo[r] (Producertech)

by Producertech

Creating A Drum & Bass Groove with colo[r] (Producertech)

In the first of a lengthy three part series, producers Chris Octane and Liam O’Mullane invite you to join them in the studio, where you can observe their methods and advanced techniques for creating a serious Drum and Bass groove. Currently producing as part of newly formed outfit ‘colo[r]’, Chris and Liam bring together a veritable mountain of experience in electronic music production, DJing and sound design.

In the first instalment, Octane and Liam create their signature drum sounds by combining synthesised and acoustic elements. Next, they create a pattern and apply processing and effects to give it the punch and power to carry the track. Their attention to detail is evident when it comes to designing the bass: expertly manipulating synthesisers, filters, and other effects, including altering parameters on the fly using an iPad – which interfaces with Live using Max for Live objects. Following this is a lesson in creating edgy, dynamic percussion using sampling techniques and expansive manipulation. To conclude, colo[r] fine tune the various elements to wrap up the foundations of their new track.

For more information, check out the course trailer or listen to the track from the course below.

Module 1: Introduction

Chris Octane and Liam O’Mullane introduce you to their plan for the session with a brief discussion about where to start the track.

Module 2: Drums – Sound Design

colo[r] start by working on the synthesised elements of the main drums. Skilfully manipulating various oscillators, they create powerful artificial snare and kick drums sounds. These electronic sounds will be combined with acoustically recorded duplicates in the following section, to create realistic and powerful beats.

Module 3: Drums – Acoustic Kits and Sequencing

In the second drums section, Chris and Liam map an acoustic kit to Push. They then combine this with the synth-drums, applying various processing including side-chain compression. Next, they set up a stereo image for the drums, including a novel technique that makes use of the HAAS effect. The combined processed synth and acoustic drums create a beat with tremendous depth.

Module 4: Sub Bass

colo[r] begin working on the bass by creating the super-low-frequency elements. Various processing is applied, including notch filters and an envelope follower working in tandem with EQ.

Module 5: Bass Design 1 Part 1

In this module, Chris and Liam begin work on the bass part. Using Analog, they synthesise the twisted bass sound that the genre is so well known for. They then manipulate the various controls to create the sound they want, before applying various effects including grain delay.

Module 6: Bass Design 1 Part 2

Continuing with the low end, Chris and Liam demonstrate how they use an iPad, mapped to an XY device in Ableton, to control multiple parameters from different plugins simultaneously. This enables automation to be written in a more performance-like manner, which is an integral part of their process for creating bass-lines.

Module 7: Slip Editing

In this section, you will see how colo:r use the arrangement view to perform slip editing, an extremely useful sampling-based technique.

Module 8: Bass Design 2 Part 1

colo[r] return to the bass sound, to further refine it. After multiple automation passes and processing using parametric EQ and multiband compression, they show you how to freeze the sound and map it to the Push, before further manipulation of the sound using macro controls.

Module 9: Bass Design 2 Part 2

In this section, Liam and Chris use the step sequencer to create a bass-line. They make use of the touch sensitive fader on Push for automation passes and really begin to focus in on the DnB groove.

Module 10: More Drums, More Bass

This section is all about refinement. Additional parts are recorded, filters and other processing are applied and automation is used on the drums.

Module 11: Percussion

In the final section from this instalment, colo[r] spice up the track by adding various percussion elements, including parts from Octane’s pack, which they set up to be played using Push. A variety of effects are used to add funky variations to the percussion, including auto-pan, automated EQ and auto-filters. This module the

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Over 2.5 hours of video from the studio
  • Project and completed track included 
  • 100MB Pack of bonus DnB samples

34. Essential Guide To Logic Pro Instruments (Producertech)

by Producertech

Essential Guide To Logic Pro Instruments (Producertech)

Logic Pro is one of the most popular Digital Audio Workstations on the market. Used at every level of audio production, it is well known for being both powerful and flexible, but particularly for the incredible range of instruments it is bundled with. In this course from Producertech Course Director Rob Jones, you will be guided through the methods underpinning synthesis and sampling by means of detailed lessons on each of the instruments packaged with this popular piece of audio software.

From programming drums in Ultrabeat or Drummer, creating exciting sampled sounds in EXS24 to complete explanations of Subtractive, Wavetable, FM and Modelling synthesis in the full range of Logic’s plugins – by the end of this course you will be fully equipped to utilise all of these powerful instruments and techniques to great effect.

Before signing up, check out the free sample lesson below to see an example of the course content and delivery.

Logic Pro X Owners – Although the majority of the tutorials were made with version 9, all content is 100% applicable to version X, as no instruments were changed in the update. 

Lessons in this course are taken from the Beginners and Advanced Guides to Logic Pro.

Sample Module: Drummer and Drum Kit Designer

Module 1: Building a Drum Track – Introduction to Ultrabeat

Describes the process of constructing drums using Ultrabeat. Shows how to create and edit a hip hop break using a MIDI region and adjusting parameters in Ultrabeat’s assignment strip. Also teaches how to make a house drum loop using Ultrabeat’s sequencer, showing how to import your own samples as well as how to edit the key parameters in the synth section like filtering and pitch.

Module 2: Basic Sampling – Introduction to EXS24

Explains what a sampler is and how it works. Shows how to select different instruments in EXS24 and then how to edit their level and pitch. Teaches how to import sounds and then how to edit them in the EXS and Sample Editor, showing trimming, transposition and looping. Also introduces ADSR envelopes, starting with the amplitude envelope and moving onto the filter envelope.

Module 3: Introduction to Synthesizing – Using the Bass Station plug-in

Explains the basics of synthesizing using the included Novation Bass Station as an example. Shows the main parameters available in each synth section, demonstrating oscillator waveforms and pitch, and envelope and LFO modulation. Ends by showing how to use this knowledge to create your own sounds.

Module 4: Guide to Drummer/Drum Kit Designer

This lesson provides a comprehensive guide to Drummer and Drum Kit Designer, from the basic controls right through to advanced editing, showing how to sequence and process your own customised beat.

Module 5: Advanced Drums I – Creating Drum Sounds with Ultrabeat

Provides a thorough guide to the controls available on Ultrabeat so you can confidently edit, enhance and create drums, FX and other synth sounds using the instrument. The various sound generating engines are explained and there are lessons in how to use the filters and 4 envelopes to control the level and frequencies of drums over time. Then, the techniques are applied to creating some of the most common drums like kicks, snares and hats.

Module 6: Advanced Drums II – Creating and Processing a House Beat

Teaches how to sequence drums in Ultrabeat, how to make a groove and how to create automated parameter sequences. Then, there are some techniques for mixing the drums, beginning with routing them individually to auxiliary tracks on the mixer and then showing the various effects that can be applied to improve the sound.

Module 7: Advanced Sampling – Creating Layered Sounds and Advanced Modulation with EXS24

A lesson in the more advanced features of EXS24, beginning with how to take layered sounds similar to those made in the previous synthesizing module and turn them into EXS instruments that can be recalled instantly at any point. There is also a guide to using the modulation router to create multiple modulation settings in order to make interesting bassline progressions.

Advanced Synthesizing I – Subtractive Synthesis with the ES Range: ES M/P/E

Shows how to use the the first 3 synths from the ES range, ES M, ES P and ES E. These are the simplest instruments in the ES range and are a good build up to the more comprehensive ES 1 and ES 2 synths. After running through each of the synths individually, showing various examples of patch programming, they are combined to make a couple of layered sounds using two creative methods.

Module 9: Advanced Synthesizing II – Subtractive and Wavetable Synthesis with ES 1 and 2

Teaches how to use ES 1 and 2 to edit or create sounds. After running through the controls on each, focussing mostly on the parameters not looked at on synths and samplers covered up to this point on the course, there are some tips for how to program different sounds with ES 2, including an acoustic plucked string patch and a fat sync’d bass.

Module 10: Advanced Synthesizing III – FM Synthesis with EFM, ES2 and Ultrabeat

Explains the concept of FM synthesis and gives examples of how it is applied in Logic’s instruments, beginning with EFM and then moving on to ES2 and Ultrabeat. There are some examples of how to make classic FM sounds, such as bells and metallic patches, as well as some more diverse applications, including making fat bass loops by automating FM parameters.

Module 11: Advanced Synthesizing IV – Component Modelling with Sculpture

Teaches how to use component modelling in Sculpture to make acoustic patches like bass guitars and flutes. Then, shows how the instrument can also be used to make dirtier synth sounds and how the morph section allows the creation of glitchy evolving soundscapes and FX.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Detailed written notes
  • Logic Pro projects included 
  • Bonus samples pack courtesy of Loopmasters

35. Complete Guide To Kontakt by Defazed (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide To Kontakt by Defazed (Producertech)

Master the world’s most powerful sampler, Native Instruments Kontakt, in this new online course by Producertech Tutor Defazed. With a career spanning from classic Drum & Bass to the cutting edge of electronic music, in addition to numerous international label releases and a wealth of class-based teaching experience in a number of colleges, Defazed is your ideal guide to the intricate world of sound design!

In this extensive set of tutorials, you’ll not only learn how to use Kontakt to create a wide variety of presets, including drum kits, basses, leads, pads and FX, but you’ll also discover how to use those presets to create a track, as Defazed develops each patch with MIDI clips and automation in Ableton Live. 

The course is available for streaming 24/7/365 and includes over 100MB of Kontakt presets, courtesy of Loopmasters, along with the Live projects from the course. You can find assistance on the Producertech forum if needed, as well as regular remix competitions, where you can try out your new skills, and giveaways of new plugins and hardware. To find out more, check out the free sample modules below, and also listen to the track created on the course…

Module 1 – Course Introduction and Kontakt Overview

In the first module, Defazed gives an overview of Kontakt, including using Kontakt in standalone mode, opening and editing Library Instruments, creating your own instrument from samples, the Wave Editor, Sampler algorithms and the Kontakt effects rack.

Module 2 – Creating the Drums Instrument

Next, Defazed creates a Drums instrument from scratch by importing samples. He discusses sample selection and editing before adding each part of the kit, before sequencing the beat and applying a groove template.

Module 3 – Grouping and Processing the Drums

This module is all about groups, showing how and why to create different groups, and the process of applying effects to whole groups. Defazed adds compression, EQ and saturation to the drums, demonstrating how to sit the different samples together to create a cohesive drum sound.

Module 4 – Creating and Sequencing the Bass Instruments

Moving on to the Bass parts, Defazed sets up audio routing and creates patches in Massive, before sampling them with Kontakt. He then demonstrates how to ensure correct tuning and key range, before creating and editing the main bass sound and stab, and then using them to produce punchy, twisted basslines. 

Module 5 – Creating and Sequencing the Synth Instruments

This module covers the melodic parts of the track. Defazed creates exciting pluck and lead patches in Massive, then resamples them in Kontakt, demonstrating the editing power of the sampler. He manipulates the sounds, adding processing and effects before creating a catchy intro and extending the arrangement.

Module 6 – Atmospherics

In this lesson, Defazed shows how to manipulate samples to create atmospheric sounds using a variety of powerful techniques, including the Time Machine, Granular Synthesis and Tone Machine. He transforms samples into pads, sequences various instruments and creates deep, atmospheric effects. Next, he further develops the drum sounds and automates filters and reverb on the leads, to build interest before the drop.

Module 7 – Completing the Arrangement, Mixing and Mastering

In the final section, Defazed takes a critical look at all of the instruments, creating sub-mixes using groups and honing in on their sounds. He edits the drums for the build-up, further tweaks the drop section, intro and build-up, before tidying up the mix and arrangement. Finally, he covers some basic mastering techniques to complete the track

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Complete with all presets made on the course
  • Ableton Live sets included 
  • Bonus 100MB Kontakt presets pack courtesy of Loopmasters

36. Arranging Techniques With Push (Producertech)

by Producertech

Arranging Techniques With Push (Producertech)

Concluding his three part series, teaching the fundamentals of House production using Ableton Push, Paul Maddox returns to give you the lowdown on arrangement and automation, completing the track he began in parts 1 and 2. As a solo artist and as part of the duo Spektre, Paul has had numerous releases on popular labels and support from headline DJ acts across the globe. His wealth of experience combined with his knowledge of Live and passion for teaching come together in this series of tutorials, as he imparts professional tips and tricks in a clear and concise manner.

In this final instalment, Maddox takes you through preparing the parts created in the previous sections for arrangement, covering various button modes and the creation of scenes, before assigning new effects and device macros, with intuitive settings that add excitement and dynamic movement to the track. Scenes are then recorded into arrangement view, with drum fills triggered in real time, after which Maddox adds the sheen, recording parameter automation that keeps the soundscape fluid and builds up the excitement, whilst the solid beats pump underneath.

Accompanying the lessons is a download pack that contains over 100MB of House FX samples, courtesy of Loopmasters, giving you the tools to add exciting sounds to your own arrangements, as well as the Live set from the course. Before signing up, check out the free sample excerpt below and also listen to the track from the course, featured on the Producertech Soundcloud page.

Module 1: Recap and Session View Launching Modes

In this module, Paul gives a recap of the project and then explains some of the different button modes for launching clips.

Module 2: Creating Scenes

This module shows how to create and organise scenes, in order to work out sections of a track, from which the entire arrangement can be created.

Module 3: Setting Up Automation Parameters

In this module, Paul maps device macros and sets up some new effects, which are then ready to be automated, for adding extra interest and movement to the arrangement.

Module 4: Recording the Arrangement

Paul uses his prepared scenes to lay down the basic track sections by recording them into Arrangement view and then editing them.

Module 5: Adding Automation

Parameter automation is added to various parts, to create tonal and atmospheric shifts that help sounds develop in breakdowns and main groove sections.

SAMPLE MODULE – In this excerpt, Maddox demonstrates how to set up macros and utilise automation

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Complete with Ableton Live set 
  • Over 100MB of House FX samples
  • Over an hour of videos

37. Breaking Down The Remix By Dodge & Fuski (Producertech)

by Producertech

Breaking Down The Remix By Dodge & Fuski (Producertech)

With four consecutive Beatport number 1s, Dodge & Fuski is truly a force to be reckoned with when it comes to all things dance music. Returning after the success of his Dubstep fundamentals course where he broke down the massive track ‘Killer Bees’, Rob Talbott of DnF is back to give you the lowdown on creating a remix. Focusing on arrangement, the course is in two parts – part 1 in the studio with Rob as he demonstrates building a remix from the stems, part 2 is a commentary on a huge new Future House remix of Orla Gartland’s ‘Souvenirs’, made under his 4AM alias, concluding with a comparison of the two arrangements and tips on creative mixing.
 
The course is available immediately after purchase, and can be streamed online 24/7/365. Included with the course is a large pack of bonus samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. You can check out the trailer above, or listen to Rob’s Orla Gartland remix below:

Extract from the course on creating a classic EDM riser:

Module 1: Introduction and preparing the stems

In the first module, Rob introduces the course then jumps straight in with some pro tips and tricks.

Module 2: Editing the stems and planning the arrangement

In this module, Rob edits the stems, adds compression and reverb and begins the arrangement.

Module 3: Adding samples and melodic elements

Rob starts creating drums, choosing samples and applying compression and creative reverb before experimenting with synth sounds using NI Massive.

Module 4: Creating a riser

Next, Rob starts to creates a riser, using samples, which transitions from the soft, melodic introduction into the full dubstep drop.

Module 5: Module 5: Creating a drop

In this module, Rob delves into creating the drop. Experimenting with raw, crunchy synth leads, volume shaping and incorporating the vocals from the original track, the remix starts to take shape.

Module 6: Finishing the arrangement and basic mastering

Finishing off the track, Rob discusses some elements of arrangement before moving on to mastering using iZotope Ozone 6.

(Part 2) Module 7: Introduction to the track breakdown

In the second part of the course, Rob begins by introducing a remix he did of an Orla Gartland track, by describing the arrangement.

Module 8: Manipulating the stems

In this module, Rob shows you the stems from the original track, and how he began to edit, warp and manipulate them.

Module 9: New parts

In module 9, you are shown the new parts that are added to the remix, where they are positioned and how they are processed, with some great tips on creative mixing.

Module 10: Sound design breakdown and finishing up

In the final module, Rob discusses the differences between the second track and the one he created on the fly, commenting on contrasting arrangements and giving some final tips.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Loads of pro tips and tricks 
  • Over 100MB of EDM samples
  • Over an hour of videos

38. Remixing Techniques in Ableton Live by Rob Jones (Producertech)

by Producertech

Remixing Techniques in Ableton Live by Rob Jones (Producertech)

From Producertech Course Director: Rob Jones, comes this comprehensive course, which will take you through the whole process of creating a Remix in Ableton Live. It begins with the initial importing of stems, and ends with detailed editing of the arrangement; showing how the individual elements of the original folk track are skilfully combined into evolving Deep House.
 
In the two hours of tutorials, Rob covers all manner of techniques and remixing concepts, including working out the tempo and key signature, creating catchy basslines and hooks, sampling and resequencing parts, mixing and automating, making epic breakdowns and satisfying drops, and much more.
 
Accompanying the lessons is a download pack that contains over 50MB of bonus samples, as well as the Live set from the course. All of the lessons and downloads are available immediately after purchase and ready for streaming 24/7/365.
 
To see an example of what’s covered on the course, watch the lesson excerpt, or listen to the track from the course, both of which are embedded below

Module 1: Importing and Editing Stems

In this opening module, Rob auditions and imports the stems, then works out the original BPM of the track, before editing and organising the project to create the basic building blocks from which the remix is made.

Module 2: Creating the Bass-line and Groove – Parts 1 and 2

This module starts by making a simple beat, to which various melodic, looped stems are added. These are then analysed and used to work out the key of the song, as well as its groove, from which a bassline is made.

Module 3: Creating Melodic Hooks and Loops

In this lesson, Rob continues working with some of the melodic stems, adjusting clip envelopes and applying various effects, to help shape them into workable parts for the track.

Module 4: Sampling the Organ and Adding Percussion – Parts 1 and 2

Rob begins this lesson by sampling the main organ from the original track and using it to sequence a new melodic phrase, which forms the main motif in the remix. After this, he shows how a looped percussion sample can be recreated using various Drum Rack techniques.

Module 5: Arranging the Remix – Parts 1-3

This set of 3 lessons sees Rob creating the arrangement, starting off by putting it together in realtime and then ending with a walkthrough of the final layout.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Loads of pro tips and tricks 
  • Nearly 100MB of House samples 
  • Two hours of videos

39. Building ‘Dave’ by BAR9 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Building 'Dave' by BAR9 (Producertech)

Mainstays of the Dubstep scene, BAR9, are the latest huge EDM act to invite the Producertech community into their studio, to share their production secrets.

In this set of tutorials, they break down the Dubstep Anthem ‘Dave’, which opened Never Say Die’s BLACK LABEL XL compilation – giving you an incredible opportunity to get inside the head of one of the leading producers in the genre.

The videos are available 24/7/365, immediately after purchase on the whole range of Mac, PC and Mobile devices, and there’s even a bonus Dubstep samples pack courtesy of Loopmasters. To get a feel for the course, check out the module excerpt below, and listen to the slamming track from the course!

Module 1 – Kick Drum and Mix-Bus Processing

Module 1 discusses the drums and how they are processed and mixed, including some sample editing and parallel processing tips. The lesson focuses mainly on kick drum techniques.

Module 2 – Analysing the Main Drum Components

In the second drums module, BAR9 spend time discussing the individual parts of the kit and their impact on the overall sound, before moving on to creative mixing that push your drum sound to the max.

Module 3 – Completing the Beats

In the final section on drums, BAR9 discuss the cymbals and explain how they add extra width to the sound using free plugins. They then talk about processing the drum group as a whole, with some specific tips on making the drums louder without destroying the timbre.

Module 4 – Sound Design I – Building the Intro

In this module, BAR9 give a detailed breakdown of how they created the huge-sounding introduction, demonstrating how they made each instrument and the additional effects and processing.

Module 5 – Sound Design II – Creating Additional Parts

In the second sound design module, BAR9 talk about the additional parts that build up the texture. Covering leads, basses, vocals and effects, this module gives an insight into the techniques utilised in many of their tracks.

Module 6 – Sound Design III – All About Bass

One of the most important components in a Dubstep track, the bass, is given a detailed commentary as BAR9 work through each individual sound, explaining how they created them and the processing chains used to give that dirty, booming bottom end.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Loads of pro tips and tricks 
  • 50MB+ of Dubstep samples 
  • Over an hour of videos

40. Complete Guide to Sampling in Live by Rob Jones (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Sampling in Live by Rob Jones (Producertech)

Unlock the awesome potential of sampling in Ableton Live with this new course from Producertech’s Senior Tutor Rob Jones. Featuring a thorough breakdown of the monstrously powerful Sampler Suite Instrument, the lessons take you through every aspect of this hugely flexible device.

Packed full of inspirational examples, detailed commentary and a massive variety of sounds, the modules will ignite your enthusiasm for this superb tool, whilst giving you a complete understanding of how to utilise its vast audio-manipulating abilities to create your own basses, leads, FX, vocals and more! Plus, there are 12 Bonus Sampler Kits (172 Samples) from various Loopmasters packs to play with along the way.

Alongside the streamed video lessons, accessible on the full range of devices, students can also download comprehensive written notes that accompany each module, featuring clear explanations to aid with the learning process. With feedback and assistance always available on the Producertech forum, this course will truly take your sampling abilities to the next level. Check the free excerpt embedded below for an example of the course content now! 

Sample Module: Using Zones in Sampler to make Multi-Sampled Presets

Module Details

Module 1: Intro to Sampling and Guide to Simpler

After explaining what Sampling is and the reasons for doing it, there is a thorough guide to Simpler, covering sample importing and looping, and showing how the various envelopes, filters and LFO can be used to shape the sound. Sampler is briefly introduced at the end of the module.

Module 2: Sampler Part 1 – Recap and Extended Sample Looping Features

This lesson starts by recapping on how to import samples and change the section that’s triggered, before going into the many ways in which the looping facility is expanded.

Module 3: Sampler Part 2 – Making a Synchronised Vocal Loop

This module shows how to make a complex, looped vocal sample, which has one part looping each beat while a note is held down and another part looping in a syncopated, 3/16-note fashion when a note is let go. Loop lengths are calculated in samples using certain formulae, which are explained in the module movie and accompanying written notes.

Module 4: Sampler Part 3 – Envelopes and LFOs

This module begins by going over the concepts introduced in module 1, like envelope and LFO modulation, extending them to show how much more can be done with Sampler, including setting of envelope curves, envelope looping and using multiple LFOs to modulate some of the unique, morphing filter section parameters.

Module 5: Sampler Part 4 – Modulating LFOs

Taking modulation to the next level, this module begins to demonstrate the sounds that can be achieved by modulating LFO amounts and rates with additional LFOs and envelopes, to create unique and captivating rhythmic and dynamic bassline effects.

Module 6: Sampler Part 5 – Pitch and Osc Modulation Sections

This lengthy module shows how both the pitch and modulation oscillator envelopes can be used to create dramatic shifts in frequency and timbre, which can be applied to leads, pads, FX and basslines.

Module 7: Sampler Part 6 – Making an FX Patch

This lesson provides an example of how all the techniques so far can be put into practice to make an FX patch, which uses a tiny part of a much larger sample to create a long, evolving riser that incorporates multiple envelopes and LFOs to build tension and atmosphere.

Module 8 – Sampler Part 7 – MIDI Section

In this module, the MIDI section is demonstrated, showing how external MIDI controllers can be set up and then used to create basic and then more complex modulation sequences with a new lead sound in Live’s clip editor.

Module 9: Sampler Part 8 – Multi-Sampling and Sample Zones

This lesson explains what can be done with the Zones section, showing how to create more realistic presets with multiple samples mapped across the keyboard, and how to stack up and blend samples in the Zones-Velocity section to make a live-sounding conga preset.

Module 10: Sampler Part 9 – Importing of Sampler Presets

This module shows how to import presets for other samplers, such as EXS24 into Sampler.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Well over an hour of detailed tutorials 
  • Comprehensive written notes and Live sets with each module
     
  • 12 bonus Sampler kits (172 Samples) from Loopmasters

41. Part 2: Adding Foley and Developing the DnB Groove with colo[r] (Producertech)

by Producertech

Part 2: Adding Foley and Developing the DnB Groove with colo[r] (Producertech)

Throughout this course, producers Chris Octane and Liam O’Mullane invite you to join them in the studio, where you can observe their methods and advanced techniques for creating a serious Drum and Bass groove. Currently producing as part of newly formed outfit ‘colo[r]’, Chris and Liam bring together a veritable mountain of experience in electronic music production, DJing and sound design.

In this second instalment, the duo develop the groove they started in part 1, embellishing with extra samples and loops, which are edited and mixed in realtime. Foley is then added, recorded in an outdoors location near the studio, which is combined with a new chords sequence to form an atmospheric intro. Additional arrangement is then carried out, as well as vocal recording and processing, until the track starts to really take shape.

In addition to the streamed movies, the Live project from the course is supplied as a download, along with over 100MB of DnB samples from Loopmasters. For more information, check out the course trailer and sample module, or listen to the track from the course below.

Module 1: Extending the Groove

In this module, colo[r] add additional bass samples to the groove, showing various editing techniques along the way and processing sounds with effects to maintain a cohesive and unified sound.

Module 2 – Micro Mixing and Continued Groove Extension

This module starts with some project organising and micro mixing, focussing predominantly on the bottom end. The groove is then extended once again, this time with an extra drum loop shuffle.

Module 3 – Final Groove Extension

The arrangement starts to take shape in this module, as colo[r] lay out a secondary groove section that incorporates the new drum loop. All parts are then edited and processed with different effects and automation, to add further character and interest.

Module 4 – Field Recording – recording, importing and slicing

This module provides an overview of the foley recording, then spends some time reviewing the recordings and selecting suitable parts to use.

Module 5 – Adding Foley to the Arrangement and Making the Intro

In this module, colo[r] add the new foley clips to the arrangement and show how to edit and process them to start building a cool intro.

Module 6 – Creating the Chords Sequence/Main Melodic Hook

This module begins by working out and recording the main chords sequence, which is then used to trigger multiple chains in an instrument rack, containing various instruments that are processed in unique ways to create a blend of melodic elements for the intro.

Module 7 – Continued Intro Building

More editing and refining techniques are shown in this module, looking at how to retune and improve the sound of the lead, as well add width. Then, hats and foley are arranged to create an atmospheric start to the track.

Module 8 – More Tweaking and Vocal Recording

In this final module, the bass is fattened with wave shaping and other effects, after which a vocal is sung by Liam, which is then edited and used to further embellish the intro. There is then a brief summary of the main achievements of this part of the course.

  • Completed Live Projects included
  • Over 4.5 hours of advanced techniques
  • Over 100MB of Loopmasters DnB samples included
     
  • Available 24/7/365

42. Techno Production with Maschine (Producertech)

by Producertech

Techno Production with Maschine (Producertech)

From parties in Detroit, to 90s underground raves, all the way to Berlin’s buzzing club scene today, Techno has been long-established as one of the world’s biggest and most recognisable genres of electronic music. In this course from Producertech Senior Tutor and Berlin resident Rob Jones, comes a detailed insight into the production techniques behind this legendary style.

Leaving no stone unturned, this lengthy course will take you through the basic elements of the track – kick, bass, low/high percussion and a detailed look at creating melodic parts, before covering effects processing and arrangement – with a focus on utilising the Maschine hardware throughout, demonstrating not only the colossal sound design power available, but also workflow techniques and utilising Maschine as a plug-in in other DAWs.

Available immediately after purchase, 24/7/365 anywhere with an internet connection, the course comes complete with 100MB of Techno Samples, courtesy of Loopmasters, and the projects from the course. Help and information is always available on the Producertech forum, where you can post your work for review and discuss techniques and ideas with fellow students and tutors. Take the leap into Techno production now by checking out the module excerpt and completed track embedded below!

Module 1 – Creating the Kick

This module goes through the process of creating a multi-layered kick group, complete with macro controls for customising the bottom and top ends, kick attack and body, as well as the kick duration, so a pounding 4 to the floor beat can be laid down.

Module 2 – Low Frequency Percussion

In this lesson, the main rhythmic bass part is created using percussion samples, so the distinctive, rumbling low frequency march can be added to the kick. Several groups are layered together and a sidechain compressor used to control dynamics.

Module 3 – Sub Bass and Bass Processing

This last main lesson on the low frequency elements of the track focuses initially on sub bass, adding some very bottom end, to establish a tonal centre and fatten up the sound. All bass groups are then processed together to gel and solidify the mix.

Module 4 – High Frequency Percussion Part I

The first high frequency percussion lesson starts to add some of the classic and syncopated parts, including hats, cabasas, clicks and other miscellaneous samples, to accompany the bass parts and create the main groove of the track.

Module 5 – High Frequency Percussion Part 2

In the second high frequency percussion module, the parts are processed with send effects, and samples are mixed and layered to improve the sound. Then, a new main rhythmic element is added, complete with various effects for automating throughout the arrangement.

Module 6 – Melodic Sounds

This tutorial covers a large number of techniques to consider when creating melodies, showing a few different ways for playing phrases, either using MaschineÍs built in chord and arpeggiator facility, or playing events in live. The new lead is processed with insert and send effects, including resochord, which is used to create new harmonic texture for developing in breakdowns.

Module 7 – Additional Textures

After discussing the different considerations for how the melodic parts in the track can develop throughout the arrangement, some new sounds are created, including a new vocal part, which is constructed using different slices of a larger sample, which are then processed with different inserts to create a cool tape delay effect.

Module 8 – Arrangement

With all the main components now created, the arrangement is started, first building a collection of different scenes, which are named and coloured accordingly, then using that palette to put the main building blocks of the track in place.

Module 9 – Final Arrangement and Mixing

After the basic arrangement is carried out in Maschine, the software is opened as a plug-in in a DAW, in this case Ableton Live, to finish off the arranging and mixing. There is an explanation of how automation is carried out, as well as how to route sounds in and out of Maschine, then various parts of the arrangement and mixdown are shown and discussed.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Over 3 Hours of Streamed Lessons 
  • 100MB of Bonus Techno Samples
     
  • Downloadable Maschine/Live Projects from the Course

43. Mainroom Techno Production in Live by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

by Producertech

Mainroom Techno Production in Live by Paul Maddox (Producertech)

There’s nothing like the energy of a massive crowd, dancing in sync to the hypnotic beats of main-room techno. Now you can jumpstart your techno-production journey with this course from awesome producer Paul Maddox. With numerous label releases and support from huge DJs including techno legend Richie Hawtin, you can trust Paul’s wealth of experience as he takes you through the process of creating a huge, main-room track.

Starting with the drum groove, Paul creates the beats and bass utilising an ingenious technique to make the classic, rumbling techno bass sound. Next he demonstrates how to add ambience and a subtle rhythmic feature, before adding group effects. The following sections cover the melodic parts, including sequencing a modular-style, atonal lead, using M4L devices, macro-mapping and a big section on re-sampling.

Available immediately after purchase, the lessons come with 150MB of bonus techno samples, courtesy of Loopmasters, giving you the tools to add exciting sounds to your own productions, as well as the Live set from the course. Before signing up, check out the excerpt below and listen to the track from the course:

Module 1: Kick and Bass

In the first module, Maddox creates the kick by layering and editing samples, before using pitched percussion to create the classic, rumbling techno bass.

Module 2: Percussion and FX

Next, Maddox sequences the hihats and claps, before setting up an audio effects rack, complete with spacial FX, enabling easy creation of awesome transitions in real time.

Module 3: Atmosphere and Texture

Using an inventive technique, Maddox takes a TV atmosphere sample, slices it up then creates a random sequence, before altering the ADSR envelope to create a rhythmic feature, controlled by an LFO.

Module 4: Drum Group Processing

In the final drum production section, Maddox takes you through the group processing, demonstrating parallel processing chains, the glue compressor and distortion effects.

Module 5: Sequencing a Modular-Style Lead

Turning to the melodic parts, Maddox creates a retro-sounding monosynth patch. Using a Max 4 Live object, he then uses a step sequencer to create an atonal pattern, connecting the M4L device and Analog plugin to alter the tuning and create interesting sequences.

Module 6: Lead Shaping and Processing

Continuing with the Lead sound, Maddox edits the filters, alters the ADSR envelope and adds multiple effects that take the production to the next level.

Module 7: Macro Mapping

In this module, Maddox shows how to create instrument racks and map effects to macro controls. Using these user-friendly mappings, Maddox then creates wide reverb, ping-pong delay and pitch automation.

Module 8: Synthesizing and Sampling – Creating a Vinyl Stab

Beginning by combining a layered piano and pad with some vinyl textures, Maddox then shows how to sample a played chord, to create your own realistic recorded vinyl sample, which is then sequenced to form a classic techno stab phrase.

Module 9: Advanced Lead Processing

In this module, Paul takes the resampled lead part and uses a number of Live’s devices, racks and Max for Live presets, to create modulating, spacial effects and atmosphere.

Module 10: Making a Pad

This last main module shows how to use a different part of the same sample to make a lush pad sound, which is then sequenced, processed and added to the stab part, for extra melodic accompaniment.

Module 11: Arrangement Tips

This final bonus module runs you through some tips for how to arrange and automate the parts created in the course to create classic builds and drops.

  • Streamed lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Over 2 Hours of Streamed Lessons
  • 150MB of Bonus Techno Samples
     

44. Arranging and Mixing a DnB Track In Live by colo[r] (Producertech)

by Producertech

Arranging and Mixing a DnB Track In Live by colo[r] (Producertech)

Throughout this course, producers Chris Octane and Liam O’Mullane invite you to join them in the studio, where you can observe their methods and advanced techniques for creating a serious Drum and Bass groove. Currently producing as part of newly formed outfit ‘colo[r]’, Chris and Liam bring together a veritable mountain of experience in electronic music production, DJing and sound design.

In the third and final instalment, the duo complete the the track – adding new melodic and rhythmic parts, creating FX sounds and vocal effects before completing the arrangement by creating a drop and extending the introduction. Next they move onto mixing, showing the incredible level of detail the pros go into when it comes to sound design and texture. Concluding the series is a module on mastering, where colo[r] show you how to reign in the transients, define the bass and add stereo wideness.

Available immediately after purchase, the videos can be accessed 24/7/365 as many times as you want, anywhere with an internet connection. In addition to the streamed movies, over 100MB of DnB samples from Loopmasters are included. For more information, check out the course trailer and sample module, or listen to the track from the course below.

Module 1: Refining the Main Section and Intro

Introducing the final instalment of their course, Liam and Chris return to the track and start refining the main section. They tidy up the bassline, add new drum fills and improve the sound design.

Module 2: Creating FX sounds from vocal samples

Next, colo[r] create an FX sound from a vocal sample. They manipulate the original sound, utilise a vocoder and refine the automation, altering the interplay between the drums and the vocals in the main section.

Module 3: Adding additional melodic sounds

In the third module, Chris and Liam add variations in the melodic and drum parts to the Main and Intro sections. Utilising Analog, they create a brand new sound before warping drum parts – demonstrating the importance of focusing on the fine details of your sound.

Module 4: Creating drum fills

Returning to the arrangement, colo[r] add drum fills to the end of the introduction. Utilising existing elements of the track, they create a fill that hints at future sections, sequenced using the Ableton Push. They then return to the drum fills in the main section, altering the timings.

Module 5: Adding a new synth part

In this module, colo[r] add a new FM synth part using NI FM8, demonstrating how to manipulate the fine tuning by connecting multiple oscillators. They then add FX and processing, including the filtered HAAS effect setup from Part 1 and build it into a device rack.

Module 6: Creating the breakdown

In module 6, colo[r] extend the arrangement and move on to the breakdown section. Returning to the main part, they add additional bass melody variations using pitch shift automation and new atmospheric parts to create an evolving texture that builds suspense before the drop.

Module 7: Revamping the Intro

Returning to the introduction, colo[r] extend the length of the parts, slowly ramping up the texture – giving a sense of excitement that is enhanced by the reverberant and atmospheric sound that characterises the track. They apply filters and add new percussion and drum parts that further add to the timbre of the track.

Module 8: Finishing the arrangement

In the final arrangement module, colo[r] finish refining the different parts before creating elegant filter sweeps on noise parts, contributing to the huge texture.

Module 9: Mixing

Proceeding with a fast and efficient mix, colo[r] focus on the drums and bass. They add an EQ synced to different parts, altering the EQ in real time depending on what other parts are playing to create a hugely energetic sound. Homing in on individual instruments, they add compression and EQ to sit the parts together.

Module 10: Mastering

Completing the track, colo[r] demonstrate a quick home master using a harmonically exciting EQ from UAD before moving on to using iZotope Ozone 5 for multiband limiting and stereo width.

  • Join two pro producers in their studio
  • Over 3.5 hours of advanced techniques
  • Over 100MB of Loopmasters DnB samples included
     
  • Available 24/7/365

45. Pro DnB Tips & Tricks – The Making of ‘Move It’ By RESO (Producertech)

by Producertech

Pro DnB Tips & Tricks - The Making of 'Move It' By RESO (Producertech)

Hospital Records artist Reso opens his studio doors to share the pro DnB techniques involved in producing his chart-topping anthem ‘Move It’. Follow through the tutorials as he meticulously deconstructs the drums, bass, melodic and vocal parts, as well explaining the mixing and mastering of the track, embedded below…

Module 1 – Intro and Kick/Snare

In this first module, Reso introduces the track and breaks down the course structure. Jumping straight into the drums, he begins by showing how the main kick and snare groove was created, including the sample selection and processing applied.

Module 2 – Additional Drum Parts

Continuing the drums, Reso explains all of the additional sampled and synthesised drum parts that make up each section of the track. From taming volume envelopes to applying compression and distortion – every aspect of the individual drum and percussion sounds are described.

Module 3 – Drum Group Processing

In this module, Reso compares the drums pre and post the drum-buss processing. He breaks down the group processing, showing how the huge DnB drums sound is achieved.

Module 4 – Arranging the Intro Drums

In the last drums module, Reso looks at how the drums are arranged and processed throughout the intro section. He discusses creative FX such as reverb and delay, before demonstrating some novel techniques to add interest to the sound.

Module 5 – Bass Part 1

In this module, Reso walks through the process of creating each bass sound in the track. Starting with NI Massive, he walks through how each part of the synth effects the sound, before showing the additional refinements made using automation and additional plugins.

Module 6 – Bass Part 2

This second bass lesson explains the remaining bass elements, before talking about the various bass group processing effects to create the enormous, dirty bass sounds inherent to Reso’s style.

Module 7 – Pads and Leads

In module 7, Reso moves on to the melodic and polyphonic elements of the track. Beginning with the instrument plugin, Reso explains the sound’s conception, before moving on to detailed FX chains which include automated filters, distortion and subtle reverbs amongst many others.

Module 8: Module 8 – Intro FX

This module shows how different FX sounds are used to embellish the intro section. Reso talks about his sample choices and the automation he uses to modulate the sounds.

Module 9 – Main Break FX

This second FX module continues looking at the different continuous and brief FX sounds that punctuate the arrangement. Using a variety of plugins, Reso takes the original sounds and turns them into aggressive and dramatic interludes for the track.

Module 10 – Mastering

The course ends with a quick look at the master buss, showing how the mix is finished off and how to create pre-masters and alternate versions for playing out. Reso walks through the plugins on his main output, demonstrating how he has used Izotope Ozone to EQ, limit and add harmonic excitation

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Over 2 hours of Pro Tips and Tricks
  • Comprehensive breakdown of the track
  • 100MB of DnB samples

46. Producing Classic Deep Bass House in Logic (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producing Classic Deep Bass House in Logic (Producertech)

Starting out in Dream Frequency on XL Recordings, Ian Bland’s musical career has spanned 26 years and seen him at the forefront of the UK’s dance music scene. More recently, he formed his own house label Maison Records, which regularly releases solid house tracks with great support from DJs and fans alike.

In this 4-hour course, Ian covers every aspect of creating the classic, funky, bass house track ‘Can’t Live Without You’, made exclusively for the tutorials. All parts are individually conceived, before he shows in detail how to lay out and automate each section of the track, as well as add insert and send effects, mix and then master it.

Module 1: Intro

An intro to the course and preview of the track that’s made throughout the tutorials.

Module 2: Drums – Part 1

The drums are individually programmed and edited to create the beat, mainly through a process of playing live and then tweaking afterwards.

Module 3: Drums – Part 2

Auxiliary channels are created for the drums, which are then used to apply different insert and send effect processing. Finally, an A/B effect is used to get the drums roughly mixed.

Module 4: Working With a Vocal – Part 1

Shows the quickest ways of chopping up a long vocal sample and resequencing it to create a unique pattern. Some interesting doubling techniques are employed and then a vocals bus set up with some light processing applied.

Module 5: Working With a Vocal – Part 2

Processes the complete vocal sample with various effects for cleaning up, widening and adding depth and character. Then, flex time is used to correct timing issues and all vocals are bounced in place.

Module 6: Creating the Bass – Part 1

Two different synths are sequenced to create a classic rolling bassline, alternating with some FM warehouse stabs. Then, the basses are processed both individually and together, to ensure the stereo imaging and levels are as they should be.

Module 7: Creating the Bass – Part 2

An additional bass layer is added for extra punch and character, then the main bass sound is EQ’d to help it really stand out. Then, yet more bass is added, via a sub layer, which is processed with various effects, to fill out the bottom end and make the mix nice and fat.

Module 8: Adding an Organ Part

Logic’s organ synth and chords MIDI effect are put to good use to create a nice accompaniment to go with the bass and vocal. The part is then processed and automation applied for extra development and interest.

Module 9: Background FX

A combination of different looping samples are used to add atmosphere and texture, as well as create automated rising FX sequences.

Module 10: More FX and Fills

Additional loops are used to pad out the groove and then various one-shots are selected, which will serve as extra sounds to accent the arrangement later on.

Module 11: Intro Arrangement

The track intro is constructed, from the parts created in the previous tutorials and new sounds made on the fly, making fine edits to everything and adding automation as the song develops.

Module 12: Module 12: First Breakdown Arrangement

The first breakdown is put together, once again fine tuning each part and adding additional automation to help create smooth transitions, a solid build and satisfying drop.

Module 13: Main Drop Arrangement

More editing and processing techniques are employed to make the main drop section, which includes vocals, leads and numerous breaks and fills, to keep the groove rolling with sufficient interest and variation.

Module 14: Main Breakdown Arrangement

After the main groove section comes the main breakdown, which features some interesting bouncing down, editing and automating of parts, to create a spacious pause, with all the right melodic and atmospheric elements, that build in increasing amounts up to the second drop.

Module 15: Second Drop and Outro Arrangement

A new piano part is created to accompany the organ that adds some nice additional melodic content, which is then processed and used to help build and lead into the second drop.

Module 16: Final Mix

Final adjustments are made to the auxiliary channels, to ensure the EQ and dynamics are right across the board, as well as any other aspects of the mix, before a 24-bit audio file is exported.

Module 17: Mastering

In the concluding module, Ian utilises Logic’s built in mastering plugins and A/Bs to a reference track to create a fat-sounding finished product

  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Four hours of Pro Tips and Tricks
  • 250MB of Bonus House Samples
  • Logic Project included

47. Complete Guide to Stereo Width By Rob Jones (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Stereo Width By Rob Jones (Producertech)

A thorough understanding of the width of different elements in a mix is a crucial skill for any producer wanting to create huge, wide-sounding tracks that will translate onto any sound system. On this course by Producertech Senior Tutor Rob Jones, you’ll be armed you with all the knowledge you need to achieve this, whether through basic panning and application of various effects, more complex adjustment of phase and frequency, or independent processing of mid and side signals, both on individual sounds, return tracks and the master bus.
 
Each module discusses a different area of stereo mixing, with in-depth explanations of every technique and examples of how to apply them to drums, synthesisers, vocals and other instruments. Once a multitude of techniques have been thoroughly explored, there are 3 bonus lessons, including a lengthy tutorial that puts everything into practice whilst mixing an actual track. Throughout the tutorials, various Effects Racks are made, which come bundled with the course, so students not only learn about the inner workings of these advanced effects setups but also have instant presets to load up and apply to their mixes.
 
Alongside the streamed video lessons, accessible on any online devices, students can also download comprehensive written notes that accompany each module, featuring clear explanations to aid with the learning process. With feedback and assistance always available via the Producertech website, this course will truly take your stereo mixing abilities to the next level. For more information and to see an example of the course content, check out the sample module movie, featured below:
 
Module 1: Panning and the Utility Effect
 
Beginning with an explanation of what the stereo width of a signal is, this module then goes on to demonstrate how panning can be used to achieve a wider signal. The lesson also shows how the utility effect can be used to gain greater control over mid and side signals.
 
Module 2: Delay
 
This lesson shows how simple delay, ping pong delay, and filter delay can all be used to widen a signal.
 
Module 3: Chorus
 
This lesson shows how the chorus effect can be used to generate stereo width, and how this can be shaped by a filter to clean up the mix.
 
Module 4: Reverb
 
The module begins with a guide on using utility to check the processing on samples. Then, Live’s reverb effect is explored, with each parameter’s effect on the stereo width of a signal clearly demonstrated.
 
Module 5: Detuning
 
The effect of detuning on stereo width is explored in detail, and there is a guide on detuning a synth patch to thicken it, as well some tips on detuning a vocal sample to widen it.
 
Module 6: Adjusting Phase
 
There is an explanation of what phase is, and its impact on a signal. Then, the module teaches how to adjust the phase of a signal using the utility effect.
 
Module 7: Mid/Side EQ
 
This lesson teaches how to EQ left and right, and mid and side signals differently to increase the width of a signal.
 
Module 8: Other Mid/Side Processing
 
A variety of other effects used to process the side signal are demonstrated, including compression, frequency shifter and grain delay.
 
Module 9: Rack Presets
 
This lesson goes though the effect racks built throughout the course so far, and shows how to use them in Live.
 
Bonus Module 1: Building a Chorus Rack
 
A step by step guide to constructing a fully customisable chorus rack using simple delay and other live devices.
 
Bonus Module 2: Stereo Plugins
 
A brief look at some 3rd party stereo width plugins.
 
Bonus Module 3: Putting it all Together
 
A detailed look at the stereo considerations of individual tracks, return tracks and the master channel in a real life mixdown scenario.
  • Streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Over 2 hours of detailed tutorials
  • Comprehensive written module notes
  • 10 included Live effect racks
  • Live project from the course

48. Bass House Production in Live by Joel Dawes (Spoils) (Producertech)

by Producertech

Bass House Production in Live by Joel Dawes (Spoils) (Producertech)

Bass House is one of the freshest new sounds in dance music, tearing up underground club nights and major festival stages alike. This new course from Producertech gives you the opportunity to see for yourself how a dark, heavy, bass house tune is constructed by one of the scene’s leading lights, producer Joel Dawes, renowned for his productions with both Drum and Bass group Klax, and with Deadbeat under the Spoils alias.

Known for their hard hitting, garage influenced take on the bass house sound, Spoils erupted onto the scene with their collaborations with producer Monkey Wrench, including the colossal ‘Enemies in the Dance’, released on thriving London based underground label Stripes Records. Spoils again displayed their production prowess on their thumping 2015 Temptation EP release, garnering support from a host of DJs including Hannah Wants, Zane Lowe, Gorgon City and even UK Garage and dance music legend DJ EZ. Alongside this, Spoils have DJed at venues such as London’s Fabric, and were even invited to play a set for dance music institution Boiler Room, one of the highest honours in the electronic music world.

With a string of well received productions, Joel Dawes is well suited to showing you the ins and outs of an up-front bass house track. He starts off the course by walking you through his drum sounds, both how he processes them and how he creates a rolling groove. Joel then proceeds to explain how he designs his sweeping pads, shimmering leads and signature dance floor destroying basslines, taking care to explain the sound design methods involved. Along the way, Joel also shares a few of his processing techniques and talks you through his custom effect racks, before finishing off the course with a quick section on mastering.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase, and can be watched 24/7/365. Included with the videos is the Live project from the course, giving you the opportunity to see for yourself first hand how Joel’s effect racks, synths, and drum loops are created, and enabling you to use them in your own projects. Also included is a bonus 100MB bass house sample pack courtesy of Loopmasters. Make sure to check out the track created on the course and the sample module below:

Module 1 – Intro and Track Playthrough

In this introductory module, Joel listens through the track from the course, which is then broken down and discussed in the following modules.

Module 2 – Drum Sounds and Processing

Joel begins deconstructing his track, taking you through the drum sounds for the track one by one, giving thorough explanation for his choice of samples, layering of sounds and processing decisions.

Module 3 – Programming the Drum Groove 

This module shows how the groove of the track was achieved, taking inspiration from loops and adding ghost snares to keep the rhythms exciting and fresh.

Module 4 – More Drums and Extra Percussion
 
In this module Joel takes you through some top layers of snares and shakers, sharing a few of his tips on helping the drums cut through the mix.
 
Module 5 – Using Multis 
 
This short module teaches how to make a multi within a drum rack, a vital tool for layering drum sounds.
 
Module 6 – Sidechaining Tips
 
This quick tips video shows how to trigger a sidechain smoothly, removing unwanted clicks and pops.
 
Module 7 – Creating the Pad Sound
 
Joel shows how to make a pad using Operator and midi effects, and demonstrates how he processed it using a mid-side splitter.
 
Module 8 – Lead Synths 
 
In this lesson, Joel walks you through how he made his lead synths in the track, with detailed explanation of his processing and automation methods, used to create interesting and varied sounds.
 
Module 9 – Using Collision to make Percussive Sounds 
 
This quick tip video demonstrates how to use Live’s Collision synth to build a percussive, bell-like sound from scratch.
 
Module 10 – Bass Patches 
 
In the module, Joel guides you through how he made the thunderous bass sounds for the track, with detailed descriptions of the sound design methods and processing involved.
 
Module 11 – Multiband Processing 
 
This quick tip video shows how to create an effect rack that splits a signal into 3 frequency bands, allowing for more accurate processing.
 
Module 12 – FX and Builds 
 
Joel takes you through all the FX used in the track, giving a real insight into how to create effective builds and drops.
 
Module 13 – The Master Channel 
 
The course concludes with an overview of bus routing and a look at processing on the master channel.
  • Streamed Lessons – Access 24/7/365
  • Live project from the course included
  • 2 hours of in depth tutorials

49. Chill Trap and Future Bass Production with Maschine by CAPSUN (Producertech)

by Producertech

Chill Trap and Future Bass Production with Maschine by CAPSUN (Producertech)

Chill Trap and Future Bass is the one of the hottess styles of electronic music right now, popularised by producers such as Flume, Wave Racer and Ryan Hemsworth. In this new course from Producertech, Brighton based producer CAPSUN invites you into his studio to share the secrets behind producing a track in this style with Native Instruments Maschine.

 CAPSUN is a well respected figure amongst producers, known for his meticulous sound design skills which have seen him release a slew of highly successful sample packs with Loopmasters, Native Instruments and his own CAPSUN Pro Audio Label. He also has a string of successful productions under his belt, with releases on Stripes Records and electronic music giant All Trap Music.

 In the course, CAPSUN takes you through the construction of a chill trap and future bass track from scratch, starting off with melodic strings and dreamy arpeggios, before moving on to booming 808 bass, crisp snares, percussion, vocal chops and SFX. The course focuses on getting the best out of both the Maschine software and hardware, with CAPSUN giving you a real insight into his workflow and production methods.

 Available immediately after purchase, the course can be streamed 24/7/365 anywhere with an internet connection. The course also comes complete with a selection of samples from CAPSUN’s very own Chill Trap and Future Bass sample pack, as well as 4 bonus Maschine kits from Niche Audio. Make sure to check out the sample module  and track from the course below.

Module 1 – Intro and Melodic Parts

CAPSUN kicks off the course by recording in the main melodic parts of the track, chords, smooth strings, a dreamy arpeggio sequence and some bass for the track intro.

Module 2 – Programming the Kick and Snare

This lesson teaches how to create a typical chill trap kick and snare pattern to form the fundamentals of the beat.

Module 3 – Filling out the Drum Beat

Continuing on from the previous lesson, CAPSUN continues adding other elements to the beat, including pitched snare fills, hi hats and rims, and also shows how he processes them within Maschine.

Module 4 – Adding Toms

In this module, big 80s sounding Toms are added to beat and processed with transient master to fit with the more

Module 5 – Creating an 808 Snare

CAPSUN shows how to create an 808 style snare, shaped with transient master and D16s Decimort plugin.

Module 6 – Snare Fills and Rolls

In this quick module CAPSUN adds the newly created 808 snare to the beat, with accented hits and snare rolls adding to the groove of the track.

Module 7 – Transposing Melodic Parts

This module teaches how to quickly transpose melodic parts to a more suitable key for the track.

Module 8 – Vocals

This lesson shows how to clean up vocal samples and process them with compression, reverb and pitch shifting to create interesting vocal chops and ad libs.

Module 9 – Creating a Gliding Lead

CAPSUN shows how to process a vocal sample and use portamento in order to create a gliding future bass lead.

Module 10 – Sequencing

This module shows how to use scene mode to start to build up the structure of the track from the patterns created in previous modules.

Module 11 – SFX and 808 Bass

CAPSUN adds a booming 808 bass to fill out the bottom end of the track, along with some SFX. He also adds a sidechain to create a pumping effect around the kick drum.

Module 12 – Basic Mixing and Mastering

This module shows how to achieve a basic mix, carefully blending the levels of the drums and melodic parts. There are also a few tips on EQing and adding stereo width using Plugin Boutique’s Stereo Savage plugin.

Module 13 – Final Arrangement and Mix

The course concludes with this module, in which CAPSUN explains the arrangement of the track, including taking a look at the bridge section. He finishes by giving an insight into some of his mixing and mastering techniques.


50. Cutting Edge Sound Design with Serum by Defazed (Producertech)

by Producertech

Cutting Edge Sound Design with Serum by Defazed (Producertech)

Master one of the most powerful and innovative new software synthesisers on the market today, Xfer Records’ Serum, with this new course from Producertech tutor Defazed. With a background producing a variety of styles including Drum and Bass, Glitch Hop and experimental electronic music, Defazed brings a wealth of experience and sound design knowledge to the table.

With a hands on approach from the outset, Defazed guides you through the intricate workings of this advanced wavetable synth, explaining in detail all the features of Serum, including the LFOs, custom wavetables, inbuilt FX and the multitude of routing and modulation possibilities available, thus enabling you to create awesome sounds from the outset. As well as guiding you through the theoretical background of Serum, Defazed also showcases how this knowledge can be applied in a practical sense. Throughout the course he constructs a variety of patches that make full use of Serum’s immense sound design possiblities. These include an EDM style bass and lead, a cinematic evolving pad, a complex sequenced patch and a riser FX, all built entirely from scratch.

The course is available for streaming 24/7/365 after purchase, and includes the Ableton Live set from the course, as well as the Serum patches created in the tutorials. Make sure to check out the course excerpt and module descriptions below:

Module 1 – Serum Basics and Creating an Initial Patch

Defazed kicks off the course by introducing Serum and some of the basic feautures of the synth, including the oscillators, wavetables and modulation sources.

Module 2 – Voicing, Filters and FX

This module takes you through some more features of Serum, voicing settings, the filter section, the routing matrix and finally the inbuilt FX rack.

Module 3 – Creating a Bass Patch

Using the features discussed in previous modules, this video focuses on the creation of an EDM style bass patch from scratch. The patch incorporates a custom wavetable generated from a sample, showcasing this powerful feature.

Module 4 – Creating an Epic Lead Patch

Defazed guides you through the creation of another patch from scratch, this time building an anthemic lead patch. The module looks at some new areas of Serum, including polyphony and using the modulation wheel as a performance control.

Module 5 – Creating an Evolving Pad Patch

This module shows the construction of an evolving pad patch, equally at home in a dancefloor filler or a cinematic soundtrack. Defazed takes a look at the sound design considerations of making a pad before diving into Serum to build one from scratch.

Module 6 – Creating a Sequenced Patch

Defazed shows how to use a sequenced LFO to expand the modulation possibilities within Serum, resulting in the creation of a sonically evolving sequenced patch.

Module 7 – Creating an FX Patch

The course concludes with this lesson on creating one of dance music’s staple sounds, the riser FX. The module once again takes you though filter settings, routing and modulation before finishing off with a practical demonstration of the patches created.


51. Martin Eyerer creates Tech House in Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Martin Eyerer creates Tech House in Live (Producertech)

Producertech invites you to join DJ and producer Martin Eyerer in his Berlin studio, as he creates a deep and grooving tech house track from scratch. The course gives you the chance to watch an established producer at work, and benefit from his vast amounts of production experience in the electronic music industry.

Martin Eyerer is a hugely respected name in the tech house scene, with over 100 releases on some of the worlds hottest labels including Renaissance, Get Physical, Saved and his very own Kling Klong imprint. His career has spanned over 20 years and his seen him DJ in the far corners of the globe. Aside from this, Martin also has a background in mixing and mastering, having run an analog studio for over 15 years. The tutorials give a real insight into Martin’s production methods, showing the ‘engineer’s approach’ to creating electronic music.

He begins by making the individual elements of the track, which include a thumping kick, bass, arpeggios, and chords, all the while mixing each sound as he goes. Once all the elements are in place, Martin then proceeds to create an arrangement, sharing with you his extensive knowledge on how to structure a tech house record with effective builds and drops that are guaranteed to set any dancefloor alight.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase, and can be watched 24/7/365. Alongside the tutorials are 100MB of bonus tech house samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. For more information, check out the sample module, track from the course, and module descriptions below:

Module 1 – Course Introduction

Martin kicks off the course by showing you his studio set up, explaining his choice of mixer, monitors, DAW and showing his routing methods.

Module 2 – The Studio Setup

This lesson discusses mixing, in particular analog and digital summing, as well as taking a look at some outboard gear, including reverbs and compressors.

Module 3 – Synthesising the Kick and Bass

This module shows the beginnings of a track, starting off with the kick drum. The video takes a look at a couple of kick drum synthesisers, as well as some bass synths to provide the foundation of the track

Module 4 – Developing the Bassline

Martin explains the importance of choosing the correct bass sounds, and uses sidechaining to create a bassline that sits with the kick drum , giving an effective low end for the track.

Module 5 – Building a Groove

In this lesson some noise and loops are added to the track, starting to build up the groove.

Module 6 – Adding Melodic Elements

Martin adds an arpeggio and classic dub techno chord to the track, showing his sound design methods using third party soft synths Promars and Zeta+.

Module 7 – Vocals

The track continues to develop with the addition of some spaced out vocals and a 909 ride to help drive the track along.

Module 8 – Finishing the Main Beat

In this module Martin adds a final hi hat in order to complete the foundations of the track, which is now ready to be arranged.

Module 9 – Session 2 Intro

In this module, Martin gives a rundown of the changes he’s made to a few of the parts and some new additions since part 1.

Module 10 – Preparing and Creating FX

After some pre-arrangement project organising Martin creates an FX sound using some percussion and send effects.

Module 11 – Arrangement I

Martin copies his clips to Arrangement view and starts to lay out the track, explaining his subtractive technique and the overall approach before beginning to construct an intro.

Module 12 Arrangement II

This module focuses on the main drop, working out the rough position and then making edits to clips to find a good balance. Device parameters are also mapped to MIDI controls so automation sequences can be created.

Module 13 – Arrangement III

After recording a long automation sequence with the two main synth lines, Martin makes fine edits to the arrangement and mix, including automating send effects levels, to help smooth transitions between sections.

Module 14 – Final Arrangement

Some more fine editing is carried out and an outro created, before Martin signs off.


52. Psytrance Production in Logic Pro (Producertech)

by Producertech

Psytrance Production in Logic Pro (Producertech)

Psytrance is one of the most distinctive styles of electronic music, characterised by its psychedelic, spiritual atmosphere and high tempo, driving rhythms. This new course from Re:Creation provides all the knowledge needed to create your own futuristic psytrance tunes from scratch.

Adam Goodlet has been creating music for over 15 years and currently operates the Re:Creation studio facility in the UK, which provides music production, video editing, online mastering and tuition services. He produces both under his OverSoul and Re:Creation aliases, with the latter being a live act focusing on genre-bending psychedelic music. As Re:Creation, Adam released his acclaimed Infinite Expansions album, with the title track hitting #4 on the Beatport psytrance chart. Re:Creation continues to be a creative outlet for some of the most forward thinking psychedelic music out there.

In this set of tutorials, Re:Creation shares with you his extensive knowledge of psytrance production, making an epic track from start to finish. The first few modules show how to create the basic elements; kick, bass, percussion, evolving pads and futuristic glitchy lead sounds, with a focus on getting the best out of Logic Pro X plugins Alchemy and ES2. The later modules then go on to discuss the arrangement, using a multitude of advanced automation techniques and effects to blend sections together and create variation. The course concludes with an hour-long bonus module featuring Re:Creation tweaking the mix to produce a professional-sounding end result.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase and can be watched 24/7/365. Accompanying the tutorials is the Logic project and 100MB of bonus psytrance samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. For more information, check out the sample mod and track from the course below.

Module 1 – Intro

Re:Creation kicks off the course by discussing the content in the upcoming modules.

Module 2 – Getting Started

This lesson shows how to download the Bazzism plugin, and the basic setup for the Logic Pro X Project.

Module 3 – Kick and Bass

This module teaches how to synthesise kick drums in the Bazzism plugin, and how to create a classic psytrance bassline using Logic’s Retro Synth.

Module 4 – Percussion

Re:Creation adds a shuffling stereo hi hat pattern, a classic 909 snare and a gritty percussion loop.

Module 5 – Lead Synths

This video shows the creation of four different lead sounds using both ES2 and alchemy, in order to create interesting and varied phrases. The leads are processed with a combination of reverb and delay.

Module 6 – Creating a Pad with Alchemy

In this module, Re:Creation guides you through the sound design processes involved in making an evolving pad with the powerful Alchemy synth.

Module 7 – Main Lead

This lesson walks you through the creation of a heavily modulated lead synth sequence in Alchemy.

Module 8 – Mixdown

Tweaks With all the leads now in place, Re:Creation tweaks the mix, including adding parallel compression to tighten the drums.

Module 9 – Risers and White Noise

This module teaches how to make two common psytrance effects in ES2, the riser and filtered white noise.

Module 10 – Adding Interest to Leads

Revisiting the leads, some processing is added to add more unique character to the sounds, including distortion and delay designer.

Module 11 – Arrangement Part 1

With the main basis of the track in place, Re:Creation starts to create an arrangement, showing how to use filter automation in order to fade in elements of the track.

Module 12 – Intro Arrangement Part 1

This module gives some tips and tricks on structuring the intro for the track, including automating delays to blend sections together.

Module 13 – Intro Arrangement Part 2

This video shows how to create audio bounces from sections of the lead part, and chop them up with automation to create interesting sounds and effects.

Module 14 – Developing the Lead Sounds

A ringshifter effect is added to the intro lead, and the main lead is bounced down and sliced up to create interesting glitchy effects.

Module 15 – Automating the Leads

Re:Creation adds more automation to a multitude of effects parameters, creating more complex variation in the lead parts.

Module 16 – The Drop

This module teaches how to structure the drop, adding an extra pad layers and a thunderous sub in order to ensure maximum impact.

Module 17 – The Second Drop

In this lesson Re:Creation takes a look at creating an effective second drop, ensuring it varies from the first.

Module 18 – Wrapping Up The Arrangement

The main structure of the track is completed with a few tweaks and the addition of some reverse reverb effects to smooth the transitions between sections.

Module 19 – Mix and Master

With the arrangement complete, Re:Creation takes a look at cleaning up the mix with the use of EQ and compression. The module also discusses some quick mastering tips using the adaptive limiter.

Module 20 – Bonus Module

This hour long bonus module gives you a chance to see Re:Creation tweaking the track even further, adding some new sounds and processing to really take it to the next level.


53. Producing Disco House In Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producing Disco House In Live (Producertech)

Following the success of his Classic House course in Logic Pro, Maison Records label owner Ian Bland is back to create another comprehensive set of tutorials, this time on creating upbeat, funky disco house in Ableton Live. With a huge amount of experience in the electronic music scene, dating back from his early days with rave outfit Dream Frequency on XL Recordings, Blandy’s depth of knowledge and passion for teaching make the tutorials well worth a watch.

On the course, Blandy shows his hands-on, old school methods for creating a grooving disco house track from scratch, using a combination of Live’s devices and 3rd party plugins. Starting with drums, he adds layers of funky bass, guitar licks, brass, strings and a soulful vocal to create a classic disco vibe. The course also goes through the entire arrangement process, teaching how to structure a track with builds and drops that will keep the dancefloor on its toes. The final videos then focus on Blandy’s mixing and mastering techniques, ensuring the track sounds polished and professional.

The track from the course, ‘Set Me Free’, is out now on Blandy’s own Maison records label, so be sure to check it out on SoundCloud.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase and can be watched 24/7/365. Included is a bonus 100MB disco house sample pack courtesy of Loopmasters. Make sure to watch the sample module and listen to the track from the course below:

Module 1 – Intro

This video introduces the course, and gives you the chance to listen to the finished track in full.

Module 2 – Choosing the Vocal

Blandy kicks off the track by choosing some vocals, explaining the considerations that need to be made when picking vocal samples. He also adds some processing to liven them up.

Module 3 – Drums Part 1

In this module the drum sounds and layers of loops are added to start to build up a groove for the track.

Module 4 – Drums Part 2

Blandy processes the drums, using a variety of EQ and compression settings to get them sounding as big as possible. He also makes use of Sample Magic’s AB plugin to listen to another track as a reference point.

Module 5 – Bassline Part 1

This lesson teaches how to program a pumping disco bassline, and also goes through some of the processing techniques involved in getting a warm, rich sound.

Module 6 – Bassline Part 2

In this video, some extra embellishments such as slides and pops are added to the bassline to give it a more realistic feel.

Module 7 – Guitars

This module shows how to create funky guitar riffs, using simpler to chop and slice loops.

Module 8 – Brass

Blandy continues to build up the musical elements of the track, this time adding and processing some trumpets and horns.

Module 9 – Keys

A keyboard riff is added using the Korg M1 plugin to get a Rhodes-esque tone.

Module 10 – Strings

This video shows how to create a realistic disco string part by picking out a small section of an existing loop. The strings are then sidechained to help them groove with the rest of the track.

Module 11 – Choosing FX

In this module, Blandy picks out some FX for the track, with a variety of uplifters and downlifters chosen to blend sections of the track together.

Module 12 – Intro Arrangement

With all the parts in place, Blandy takes a look at beginning the arrangement, starting with a DJ-friendly 32 bar intro.

Module 13 – Arrangement Part 2

The arrangement process continues, with the addition of some automation to introduce the strings and vocals, and the addition of some of the FX.

Module 14 – Arrangement Part 3

This module focuses on creating an 8 bar build up, with automation on the filter of the bass and the vocal delay.

Module 15 – Arrangement Part 4

Blandy teaches how to create effective builds and drops, making use of uplifters and downlifter FX, as well as a filtered kick roll.

Module 16 – Arrangement Part 5

In this video the arrangement is completed, with some vocal and drum fills adding extra interest.

Module 17 – Final Mixdown

Blandy demonstrates his ‘on the fly’ approach to mixing down, again using an AB plugin to listen to another track as a reference point.

Module 18 – Final Tweak

This short video shows Blandy adjusting the loops to make sure they are in time.

Module 19 – Mastering

The course concludes with the track being mastered using Ableton’s Full chain master effect rack. The process of bouncing the track down is also discussed.


54. House And Techno Groove Production Masterclass (Producertech)

by Producertech

House And Techno Groove Production Masterclass (Producertech)

Producertech tutor Paul Maddox returns with this comprehensive course focused specifically on creating the solid foundations for any dance music track, the groove. With a successful career under a variety of aliases including Azure, Olive Grooves and Spektre (with Filthy Rich), Paul has a wealth of knowledge ready to share.

The course is broken down into five different popular styles: Deep House, Neapolitan Techno, Tech House, Disco House and Experimental Techno. Paul goes into great depth explaining the rhythmic and sonic characteristics of each style, before showing you how to build the grooves from the ground up. The videos are packed full of useful tips on programming, effects processing and overall workflow that will not only improve your ability to make professional-sounding grooves, but also enhance your knowledge of Ableton Live.

Accompanying the videos are the 5 groove projects for each respective style, giving you access to all the track setups and Live racks in the templates Paul creates. This means you can start manipulating or adding to them right away to have an instant starting point for your own house or techno track. The course is available to stream immediately after purchase, with unrestricted 24/7/365 access, and comes with 100MB of bonus samples. Make sure to check out the sample module below:

Sample Module:

Module 1 – Deep House 1

This first module takes a look at the modern deep house sound popularized by producers such as Sonny Fodera. In this lesson, Paul programs a basic beat.

Module 2 – Deep House 2

Maddox develops the groove with some offbeat snares and fills.

Module 3 – Deep House 3

This module teaches how to process the drums, making use of a custom parallel drum rack.

Module 4 – Deep House 4

The deep house groove is completed with the addition of a big FM bassline, made in operator.

Module 5 – Neapolitan Techno 1

The second style featured on the course is a pounding techno sound popular on labels such as drumcode. This first video shows the creation of the basic groove, with filtered shakers driving the rhythm.

Module 6 – Neapolitan Techno 2

Offbeat snares and claps are added to the beat, with a pumping reverb effect.

Module 7 – Neapolitan Techno 3

The drums are completed with the addition of a ride and a sidechained atmospheric sample.

Module 8 – Neapolitan Techno 4

The Neapolitan Techno groove is finished off with a rumbling bassline, sampled from a kick drum.

Module 9 – European Tech House 1

This module shows the construction of a tech house groove in the style of UMEK and Groovebox.

Module 10 – European Tech House 2

Paul adds a vocal stab, cymbal, and processes both to sit with the drums.

Module 11 – European Tech House 3

This quick video shows parallel processing applied to the drums, helping them to sound crisp and powerful.

Module 12 – European Tech House 4

The tech house groove is finished off with a subby, rolling bassline. Live’s Multiband dynamics plugin is used to tighten up the bottom end.

Module 13 – Disco House 1

This time, Maddox focuses on a disco house groove. He kicks off by programming the basic beat.

Module 14 – Disco House 2

Maddox some resampled live shakers and a disco loop to the beat, loosening up the overall feel.

Module 15 – Disco House 3

This quick module shows the addition of parallel processing to the drums.

Module 16 – Disco House 4

The disco house groove is rounded off with an arpeggiated italo style bassline.

Module 17 – Experimental Techno 1

The course concludes with a look at experimental, aggressive techno inspired by the Berlin scene. The lesson shows how to create a rumbling, driving rhythm.

Module 18 – Experimental Techno 2

Some filtered atmospheric effects, and 808 rim, and a ride are added to bulk up the groove.

Module 19 – Experimental Techno 3

A heavily saturated 909 rim and another atmospheric sample are added to create a twisted, sinister feel to the techno groove.

Module 20 – Experimental Techno 4

This final module shows some final processing being added to the experimental techno beat.


55. DIY Audio Mastering – The Producertech Guide (Producertech)

by Producertech

DIY Audio Mastering - The Producertech Guide (Producertech)

Following on from his successful Psytrance course in Logic, Producertech has invited Adam Goodlet back to create this new set of tutorials, this time focusing on the DIY mastering process. The course teaches his 8-step process, with individual lessons that demonstrate each technique with built-in DAW effects, in addition to an ‘ear training’ bonus module that uses 3rd party plugins to master a track in realtime.

Adam Goodlet has been creating music for over 15 years and currently operates the Re:Creation studio facility in the UK, which provides music production, video editing, tuition and his Really Good Mastering online service. With a wealth of experience, and a reputation for creating powerful, wide and warm masters, Adam is well equipped to share his knowledge with the Producertech community.

The course is an in-depth guide to the DIY mastering process. Kicking off with an explanation of what mastering is, Adam then proceeds to break down his mastering process into easy-to-follow steps. The modules cover a variety of essential mastering techniques, from EQing to achieve spectral balance, to multiband dynamic processing to produce a tight low end and crisp highs. At the end of the course, you’ll have all the knowledge you need to create loud, punchy and powerful mastered tracks that will sound massive on any speaker or sound system.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase and can be watched 24/7/365. Accompanying the videos is an 18-page mastering guide pdf, and both an Ableton Live and Logic Pro X mastering template, using solely the DAWs’ own effects, giving you direct access to Adam’s personal mastering chain for your own usage. For more information, check out the sample module and track excerpt from the course below:

Sample Module

Module 1 – Introduction

Adam gives a brief introduction to the course.

Module 2 – What is Mastering?

This module looks at what the mastering process is, and how to know when a track is ready for mastering.

Module 3 – File Preparation

This video looks at file preparation, explaining the considerations that need to be made regarding file format, headroom and rendering.

Module 4 – The Mastering Process

Adam explains the 8 steps to his mastering process.

Module 5 – Analysis

This lesson explains the importance of carefully listening to a pre-master at a comfortable volume and listening environment.

Module 6 – Headroom

In this module, the concept of headroom is explained and its importance in the mastering process is discussed.

Module 7 – Stereo Balance Pt. 1

This video looks at using mid/ side EQing to achieve a desirable stereo spread at certain frequencies.

Module 8 – Spectral Balance Pt. 1

In this module, Adam makes further use of precise EQing to balance out the frequency spectrum of the track.

Module 9 – Dynamics

This module takes a look at using compression and multiband dynamics processing to ensure that the desired dynamic range for the track is achieved.

Module 10 – Stereo Enhancement

In this video, Adam delves deeper into the stereo considerations of mastering, taking a look at how to make a track sound good in both stereo and mono.

Module 11 – Spectral Balance Pt. 2

Adam adds some post-dynamic EQ to correct the spectral balance, ensuring that the low end sounds big and warm and the highs aren’t too harsh.

Module 12 – Output Volume

This module shows the use of limiting to achieve the required output volume, including some tips on using a series of limiters.

Module 13 – 3rd Party Plugins

This module takes a look at some popular 3rd party mastering plugins from the likes of Slate Digital and FabFilter.

Module 14 – Dithering and Output

The course concludes with a look at how to bounce the final master, taking into account file type, bit rate and dithering.

Bonus Module 1 – Mastering Walkthrough

This module shows Adam conducting the entire mastering process in Logic Pro X with a variety of 3rd party plugins.

Bonus Module 2 – Logic Template

In this second bonus module, Adam briefly guides you through the Logic Pro X mastering template that comes free with the course, featuring only stock plugins.


56. Drum & Bass Production and Sound Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Drum & Bass Production and Sound Design (Producertech)

This new Producertech course comes courtesy of one of the most technically skilled Drum and Bass producers in the industry, Icicle. During the 3 hours of in-depth tutorials, he shares his sought after production techniques, covering synthesis, mixing and arranging. The course will provide you will all the expertise you need to create modern, dancefloor destroying Drum and Bass anthems.

Jeroen Snik aka Icicle is a household name in the electronic music scene, having released on some of drum and bass’s most renowned labels, including Hospital Records, Critical Music, and Shogun Audio. His 2011 debut album ‘Under the Ice’ received widespread critical acclaim, and this was followed up in 2015 by ‘Entropy’, topping DnB charts worldwide and spawning the Entropy Live tour, an audio-visual experience like no other. Icicle has always been hugely respected for his intricate sound design and meticulous productions, which have won him plaudits across the globe and cemented his place as one of DnB’s biggest names.

In this course, Icicle provides a real insight into his detailed production methods, sharing with you a variety of useful tips and tricks. He shows you how to create all the elements of a heavy DnB track, kicking off with some FM synthesised drums. After these are processed with FabFilter plugins, Icicle proceeds to create a warping resampled bassline in FM8 and some FX risers with Massive. The course concludes with a guide to mixing and arrangement, providing you with the knowledge needed to create tense builds and earth-shattering drops.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase and can be watched 24/7/365. Accompanying the videos are the Live Projects from each module and 100MB of bonus DnB samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. For more information, check out the sample module and track from the course below.

Module 1 – Using an Analyser 

The course kicks off with a look at the importance of using a spectrum analyser, specifically Voxengo’s Span plugin, which is a free download.

Module 2 – Synthesising a Kick

Icicle teaches how to synthesise a punchy kick from scratch using Ableton’s Operator synth, and then resamples it.

Module 3 – Kick Drum Processing

The kick drum from the previous module is processed using a selection of FabFilter plugins to create a powerful kick that will cut through the mix.

Module 4 – Creating an FM Snare

Icicle walks through the creation of a crisp DnB snare, synthesised from scratch with Native Instruments FM8 plugin.

Module 5 – Building a Drum Loop

This video shows the construction and processing of a basic DnB loop, using the kick and snare from previous modules, along with some hi hats to add some high frequency elements.

Module 6 – Slicing the Loop

Icicle shows how to slice the drum loop to a MIDI clip, that can be controlled by a variety of macros, and can also be saved to be used in other projects.

Module 7 – Making an FM Bass Sound

Using FM8, Icicle walks through the principles of FM synthesis, before applying this knowledge to create a dark, warping bassline.

Module 8 – Processing the Bass

The bass sound from the previous module is further developed with some processing, and is the resampled, looped and further manipulated using Native Instruments Kontakt.

Module 9 – Bussing

This module shows how to set up a bus in Ableton, that can be used to process the various elements of the track.

Module 10 – Mixing Part 1

Icicle shows how to use multiband sidechain compression to help each individual element cut through the mix.

Module 11 – Adding EQ

In this video, Icicle continues the mixing process, adding a FabFilter EQ plugin to clean up the overall mix.

Module 12 – Limiting

This module shows how to use a limiter to add gain while keeping the overall sound punchy and defined.

Module 13 – The Build Up

Icicle shares some of his techniques for creating tension building moments in a track, including automating pads and creating a kick drum roll.

Module 14 – Creating Risers

This module shows how to create your own pitch and noise risers from scratch, using Native Instruments Massive plugin.

Module 15 – More FX

Icicle adds some more layers of FX to thicken out the track, including manipulating the sounds made in Massive to create noise sweeps.

Module 16 – Finishing Touches

The course concludes with the addition of some crashes from Kontakt’s sample library to fill out the intro and build up sections.


57. Beginners Guide To Traktor Pro (Producertech)

by Producertech

Beginners Guide To Traktor Pro (Producertech)

This course provides a clear and concise look at the fundamentals of one of the world’s most popular DJ software platforms, and will have you mixing like a pro in no time at all. With over an hour of carefully written tutorials, Rob efficiently covers all the basics of the software in his concise yet detailed style.

Starting off with a general overview, Rob then goes on to explain the track browser, giving invaluable tips on how to organise your music collection. He then takes a look at some of the essentials of the software, including the track decks, and discusses vital features such as setting cue points and key controls. Rob also gives an insight into the mixer section, teaching how to use EQ and filtering to create seamless and smooth mixes, before covering a few of the multitude of FX available within Traktor, demonstrating how they can take your mixing skills to the next level.

The course also comes with an extra bonus module that explains the technology behind Traktor’s new stems concept, which is a recent development from Native Instruments that provides DJs with multi-track mixing possibilities. With support from DJs such as global megastar Carl Cox, stems looks set to revolutionise digital DJing!

The videos are available to stream from the Producertech website 24/7/365, and are available immediately after purchase. Accompanying the course are 2 free DJ Mixtools stems tracks in Deep House and Neurofunk styles for you to experiment with, both courtesy of Loopmasters. Make sure to check out the sample module and module descriptions below for more info.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Intro and Overview

The course begins with a quick overview of the Traktor software, explaining some of the key features and showing how easy it is to mix two tracks.

Module 2 – Track Browser

This second module takes a look at the browser, showing how to import tracks, search for them, and also how to categorise them into organised playlists.

Module 3 – Track Decks

This video looks at the main mode for Traktor’s decks, explaining various features such as tempo sync, the beatgrid, and the phase meter.

Module 4 – Cue Points

This lesson teaches how to set cue points on a track, which can be useful if you want to mix in from a later section of the track, or check the track is in time before playing it out.

Module 5 – Looping

Setting loops and changing their length in Traktor is explained, and their usefulness when mixing is also discussed.

Module 6 – Mixer Levels

Rob takes a look a the Mixer section within Traktor, explaining the track faders and crossfader and providing guidance on how to use them to have complete control over the levels of a track when mixing in and out.

Module 7 – Mixer EQ and Filters

Staying within the Mixer section, Rob shows how to use the EQ and filters to create smoother transitions when mixing.

Module 8 -Key Controls

This module takes a quick look at the key lock feature of Traktor, meaning the pitch of the track isn’t altered when the tempo is increased or decreased.

Module 9 – Using FX

This video explains the available FX within Traktor, and how to apply them to create more interesting, varied and fun mixes.

Module 10 – Mixing Externally

This module shows how to set up external mixing within Traktor, which you may use if you have a regular hardware DJ mixer.

Module 11 – Headphones Options

In this lesson, Rob takes a look at the monitoring options within Traktor, showing how to set up a monitor mix with different DJing setups.

Module 12 – Recording a Mix

This quick video shows how easy it is to record a mix within Traktor, which could then be uploaded to Mixcloud/ Soundcloud.

Module 13 – Useful Preferences

The course is concluded with a look at some more useful features within Traktor’s preferences.

Bonus Module – Intro to Stems

As a bonus, Rob takes a look at Native Instruments’ new stems format, explaining what they are and how to use them to have full control over a mix, being able to effectively re-arrange tracks on the fly!


58. Complete Guide To EQ (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide To EQ (Producertech)

After a string of successful mastering courses, Zeitgeist Mastering’s Nick D’Ombrain returns with another high quality, comprehensive course covering one of the most important aspects of music production, EQ.

Currently working as Zeitgeist Mastering’s head engineer, Nick has 17 years of experience in the industry, and has worked with some huge names in the world of dance music, such as Orbital and Sascha Braemer. Having also been affiliated with major production studios including Universal and EMI, his impressive credentials and detailed, methodical approach to teaching make him the ideal man to take you through the ins and outs of EQing.

The course features over 5 hours of in depth tutorials, focusing on the EQ process as a whole. The lessons range from the basic principles of EQing right up to some of the more advanced techniques such as linear phase EQ and dynamic EQ. The modules are packed full of audio examples in a variety of genres, and Nick showcases his EQing methods on a wide range of different DAW and 3rd party plugins, all the while clearly explaining the theory behind what he is doing. At the end of the course, you’ll be armed with the skills you need to create clear, professional quality mixes that sound great on any sound system!

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase and can be watched 24/7/365. Accompanying the videos are some of Nick’s very own graphical frequency reference charts, invaluable tools for any budding producer. For more information, check out the sample module and descriptions below.

Module 1 – Introduction

Nick kicks off the course with a quick introduction, explaining what EQing is and the reasons behind using it.

Module 2 – EQ Fundamentals

This module looks at the basics of EQing, including a clear explanation of the controls found on popular EQ plugins.

Module 3 – Using a Spectral Analyser

This video covers spectral analysers, taking a look at how they can be used to aid EQ decisions, and explaining concepts such as fundamental frequencies and harmonics.

Module 4 – Using Other Aids

Nick takes a look at using other visual aids and graphs to help with making EQ decisions.

Module 5 – Finding Problem Frequencies and Sweet Spots

This video shows how to use harsh EQ boosts and sweeps to identify sweet spots, and frequencies that need to be removed.

Module 6 – Filtering

Nick takes a look at both high pass filtering and low pass filtering, explaining the theory behind them and how to use them to create space in the mix.

Module 7 – Kick Drum Fundamentals

This module shows how to EQ kick drums to give them weight and punch, and help them cut through the mix.

Module 8 – Multiple Kick Drums

Layering kick drums is a common technique, particularly in dance music, and this video teaches how to carefully EQ layers of kick drums to create a cohesive, clear sound.

Module 9A – Mixing Elements – Bass

In this module Nick takes a look at mixing bass, including tips on EQing harmonics to make your bass audible even on the smallest of speakers.

Module 9B – Mixing Elements – Bass and Kick

Nick teaches you how to mix the two key low end elements, bass and kick, in order to create a clear, tight low end.

Module 10A – Mixing Elements – Mid Range Elements

Continuing to focus on specific areas, this lesson shows how to carefully EQ elements such as synths, pads, guitar and FX, to sit above the low end.

Module 10B – Mixing Elements – Hats and Percussion

Nick shares some of his techniques for mixing some of the high end elements, to give the track real sparkle and presence.

Module 11A – Using Track Spacer

This lesson takes a look at Wavesfactory’s TrackSpacer plugin, which can be used like a sidechain compressor to create space in the mix.

Module 11B – Using Match EQ

In this module, the highly useful match EQ is explained, and is used to analyse vocals, generating a frequency curve which can be applied to other elements in the mix.

Module 12 – Linear Phase EQ

This method of EQ avoids changing the phase relationship of signals, and its specific uses and drawbacks are discussed in this video.

Module 13 – Trick for Bigger Sounding Drums

Nick shares one of his top tips for adding warmth and punch to flabby sounding drums, using the Tube-Tech plugin.

Module 14 – Noteworthy Plugins

This module looks at a selection of the best EQ plugins on the market, discussing their various benefits and drawbacks.

Module 15 – Colour or Character Vs Transparency

Nick discusses the differences between EQ plugins that add character and transparent EQs that provide more sonic accuracy. The main uses for both types of EQ are also considered.

Module 16 – Mastering EQ

This lesson teaches some of the more subtle ‘surgical’ EQ techniques associated with the mastering process.

Module 17 – Dynamic EQ

In this module, Nick discusses the key principles and effects of dynamic EQ, and some plugins that can perform this function. 

Module 18 – Mid Side EQ Techniques

The course concludes with a lesson on this powerful form of EQing, teaching you how to EQ accurately across the stereo field.

Bonus Module – Graphic EQs and Live Sound

As a bonus, Nick takes you through the ins and outs of graphic equalisers, and explains their benefits.


59. Future House and EDM Production in Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Future House and EDM Production in Ableton Live (Producertech)

From the clubs and parties of Europe to huge festivals in the USA, Future House and EDM has exploded in popularity in recent years. With this course from Producertech tutor Defazed, you can learn all the tips and tricks needed to create your own Future House anthems.

In the course, Defazed begins by analysing some of the key elements of the future house sound, including swinging drums, euphoric breakdowns, and big, metallic basslines. He then proceeds to guide you through the creation of all the key elements, from making beats in drum racks to a host of sound design tips using popular synth Native Instruments Massive. When all the elements are in place, Defazed then proceeds to create a structured arrangement, with tense builds and crushing drops designed to set the dancefloor alight. The course then concludes with tips on creating a clean, powerful mix.

The course is available to stream immediately after purchase, and is available 24/7/365. Accompanying the course are 100MB of Future House samples, courtesy of Loopmasters, and 10 free Massive patches. The course also comes with a Live template, giving you a solid platform to kickstart your own productions. Be sure to also check out Defazed’s Future House and EDM Massive preset pack.

Note: A copy of Native Instruments Massive is highly recommended for this course!

Module 1 – Introduction and Analysis of Future House

Defazed starts the course with a look at the characteristics of the future house subgenre, such as the tempo, and timbre of bass and lead sounds.

Module 2 – The Drums

This module looks at programming a beat from scratch using Ableton’s drum racks, including tips on adding groove to get the signature swinging sound.

Module 3 – Creating the Bass Patches Part 1

In this lesson, Defazed talks through some of his sound design techniques in Native Instruments Massive synth. There’s also some tips on processing, including sidechaining.

Module 4 – Creating the Bass Patches Part 1

Continuing on from the previous module, Defazed shows how to build a new future house bass patch from scratch in Massive, contrasting with the original bass.

Module 5 – Writing a Bass Hook for the 2nd Drop

This video takes a look at combining the 2 bass sounds to create a new hook, with extra fills and automation to create interesting variations.

Module 6 – Creating and Writing Melodic Parts

Defazed adds a chord stab and a new lead part, ensuring that they fit melodically with the existing bassline. He also shows how to use Ableton’s arpeggiator to create more varied lead parts.

Module 7 – The Main Breakdown and Build Up

This module teaches tips and tricks on structuring build ups and breakdowns, including tips on automating FX and macros on NI Massive.

Module 8 – Intro, Outro and FX

This lesson looks at structuring both the intro and the outro of the track, adding appropriate atmospheres and FX and ensuring the track is DJ-friendly.

Module 9 – Final Mix and Mastering

The course concludes with some tips on group processing, including parallel compression and saturation, all used to create a clean, powerful mix.


60. Complete Guide to Operator (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Operator (Producertech)

combining frequency modulation techniques with subtractive and additive synthesis. In this course from Producertech Senior Tutor Rob Jones, you’ll learn all you need to program any kind of sound with this impressive instrument.

The course begins with a general overview of the synth, taking a look at some of the more basic features such as envelopes and oscillators, and also delving deeper into more advanced elements such as routing matrixes and creating your own wavetables.

Following on from an explanation of the principles of FM synthesis, Rob then proceeds to share his extensive sound design knowledge with you, showing you how to create a wide variety of sounds. These range from simple, 2 oscillator bell-like sounds to complex, evolving bass patches. There’s also a few tips on creating your very own drum and percussion sounds using the FM synthesis techniques discussed in the tutorials.

The course is available to dream directly from our site after purchase, and is accessible 24/7/365. Accompanying the video tutorials are some bonus Operator patches, programmed by Rob himself, as well as the Live Project containing the patches. For more information, be sure to check out the sample module and module decriptions below.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Intro to Operator

Rob begins the course with a general overview of Operator, explaining the oscillators, display, LFO and filters.

Module 2 – Deconstructing a Preset

This module takes a look at picking apart one of Operator’s factory presets, to get a better understanding of how the synthesiser works.

Module 3 – Oscillator Frequency

This lesson explains the controls that can be found in the oscillator section, and also shows the creation of a basic patch combining the four oscillators.

Module 4 – Oscillator Waveform

Moving to the display section of Operator, Rob takes a look at the variety of waveforms that are available, and shows you how to adjust the harmonic content to create your own.

Module 5 – Oscillator Amplitude – Intro to Envelopes

This module covers the envelope section, with a detailed look at the controls available, such as ADSR, peak and the looping feature.

Module 6 – FM Synthesis Fundamentals

Rob explains the theory behind FM synthesis, with audio examples using Operator and Live’s Spectrum analyser.

Module 7 – Simple FM 1 – A Bell

This lesson teaches you how to build a simple bell sounding patch, which can be easily modified to create lead and bass patches.

Module 8 – Simple FM 2 – Sci Fi Bass

In this video, Rob walks through the creation of a Sci Fi like bass sound, with a slow attack and evolving FM component.

Module 9 – Filter Section

This module guides you through the filter section on Operator, with tips on using filter envelopes, modulation and velocity to create more interesting and varied sounds.

Module 10 – LFO Section

Rob takes a look at the Low Frequency Oscillator, showing how to use it as a vibrato and extra modulator for both the oscillators and the filter, before creating an evolving, mutating patch.

Module 11 – Pitch Envelope

This module explains the pitch envelope, and how it can be used to add pitch slides and transients to enhance sounds.

Module 12 – Global Controls

Rob explains some of the more in depth global controls, including a variety of velocity, midi note and filter automation options.

Module 13 – Additional Sound Design Tips

This quick tutorial shows how to draw curves to automate a selection of parameters within operator, creating interesting step-sequenced style effects.

Module 14 – Advanced Sound Design 1 – Kick Drum

Using the knowledge gained from previous modules, Rob shows you how to create an FM kick drum sound from scratch.

Module 15 – Advanced Sound Design 2 – Snare Drum

Continuing on from the last module, Rob shares some more of his sound design tips, this time making a snare drum patch, combining tones with white noise.

Module 16 – Advanced Sound Design 3 – Complex Lead

This module teaches you how to design an evolving, 4-oscillator, gritty lead synth patch.

Module 17 – Advanced Sound Design 4 – Rhythmic Bass

The course concludes with this final advanced sound design module – focusing on the creation of a pitch modulated, rhythmically varying bass patch.


61. Signal fundamentals and sound design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Signal fundamentals and sound design (Producertech)

Master Output’s powerful new Instrument, Signal, with this in depth course from senior Producertech Tutor Rob Jones.

Signal is a Kontakt instrument that combines synthesis with organic sampled sounds, feeding them through its two unique pulse engines, allowing for a mind-bending array of sound design possibilities. With a range of modulation options such as LFOs, Arpeggiators, step sequencers and loopers, as well as a host of onboard FX, Signal looks set to take the electronic music world by storm.

On the course, Rob guides you through the fundamentals of the instrument, explaining not only the theory behind it, but giving continual practical examples as well. Throughout the course, he constructs a range of patches, including a detuned bass, an evolving, multi-layered pad and a looping FX preset. All the patches fully explore the capabilities of Signal, so once you’ve finished the course you’ll be able to apply the knowledge you’ve gained to create your very own unique and cutting edge sounds.

The course is available to stream directly from the site after purchase, and is accessible 24/7/365. Included with the videos are the presets that Rob creates on the course, so you can deconstruct them yourself. For more information, check out the module descriptions and free sample module below:

Sample Module

Module 1 – Deconstructing a Factory Preset 

Rob kicks off the course by taking a look at a factory preset, showing how elements such as the sound generators, pulse engines, and inbuilt FX work.

Module 2 – Creating a Simple Patch

This module teaches you how to create a simple, wobbling sawtooth sound, featuring filter cutoff and rhythm modulation.

Module 3 – Creating a Simple Patch 2

Rob creates another evolving patch, this time a short burst of sound that is fed through the pulse engines where parameters such as filter cutoff and resonance are modulated.

Module 4 – Saving Presets

This quick video shows how to save and tag any presets you’ve made for future use.

Module 5 – Designing a Detuned Bass

In this module, Rob guides you through the creation of a gritty, heavy bass sound, by copying one layer over to another and adding detuning.

Module 6 – Processing the Detuned Bass

Delving deeper into the global effects section, the bass sound from the previous module is processed further with EQ, phasing and a low pass filter.

Module 7 – Creating an Evolving Pad Sound

Rob shows you how to build a pad sound with two contrasting layers. This module focuses on creating a soft-string like layer with a slow attack.

Module 8 – Creating an Evolving Pad Sound 2

Leading on from the previous module, Rob adds the second layer, which is an arpeggiated plucked guitar sound.

Module 9 – Processing the Pad Sound

Rob concludes the creation of the pad by adding effects such as reverb and delay, adding to the ethereal nature of the patch.

Module 10 – Creating an FX Patch

This module shows you how to synthesise your own FX patch, making use of the pitch envelope and rhythmic pulse engine.

Module 11 – Creating an FX Patch 2

Rob continues working on the FX patch, adding filtering to further shape the sound. He also experiments with various synths and instruments, and adds a second modulator to create different textures.

Module 12 – Assigning Macros

This lesson teaches how to assign macros to a range of parameters within Signal, allowing for vast modulation and automation possibilities.

Module 13 – Installing Presets

This quick video shows you how to install any new presets into the Signal library.

Bonus Module – Creating a Lead Patch

This course is rounded off with this bonus module, a step by step guide to creating a pulsing lead patch. Along the way, Rob explains the key sound design decisions that have to be made, and how they can affect the overall sound.


62. Pro Techno Tips & Tricks – ‘Catacomb’ Walk-through (Producertech)

by Producertech

Pro Techno Tips & Tricks - ‘Catacomb’ Walk-through (Producertech)

Learn the secrets behind creating powerful, high quality techno with this new course from Producertech tutor Paul Maddox. As one half of production and DJing duo Spektre, Paul has released a slew of hit records over the years, and these tutorials walk you through one of Spektre’s latest releases – ‘Catacomb’.

Since forming Spektre, alongside Filthy Rich, Paul has seen worldwide success. Their uncompromising and dark take on techno has won them admirers including the likes of Carl Cox, Richie Hawtin and James Zabiela. As well as releasing music via their own Respect Recordings label, the duo have also put out records on the likes of Phobiq and Unity Records.

On the course, Paul provides a clear and in depth guide to the track ‘Catacomb’. He starts off by dissecting the drums and low frequency bass elements, explaining everything from choice of samples and MIDI programming to effects and processing. Paul then proceeds to guide you through the rest of the track, taking a look at the uplifting chords, trance-inspired breakdowns and atmospheric vocals that make ‘Catacomb’ such a dancefloor weapon. Throughout the modules there are a host of useful production tips and tricks, making this course a must for any budding techno producer looking to make professional sounding tracks.

The course is available to stream 24/7/365 after purchase. For more information, be sure to check out the sample module and module descriptions below.

Sample Module:

Module 1 – Intro and Kick

The course begins with a listen through of the completed track, before Paul takes a look at the kick drum, explaining his choice of sample and processing using a selection of Live devices and 3rd party plugins.

Module 2 – Percussion Part 1

This module focuses on the hats and drum synth clap, with Paul explaining his choice of programming to create an interesting groove.

Module 3 – Percussion Part 2

The remaining percussive elements are discussed including the ride, automated snare fill and crash.

Module 4 – Drums Group Processing

This video takes a look at the effects rack used to process the drums, a combination of parallel saturation and compression that glues the elements together.

Module 5 – Bass Elements

In this tutorial, Paul focuses on some of the low frequency elements, including a rumbling effect and a filtered kick drum acting as the bassline.

Module 6 – The Main Lead

Paul deconstructs the main rave-inspired chord part, made with Bazille. The tutorial also shows the in-depth automation that provides interest and variation throughout the track.

Module 7 – Lead Doubling and Group Processing

This video features a useful trick, involving doubling the lead part with a short, percussive sound to add more punch. The group processing on the lead part is also explained.

Module 8 – Orbital Style Lead

Paul walks through the creation of a trance lead inspired by Orbital, with clever use of Ableton’s chord effect to thicken up the sound. He also discussed the processing, making use of Native Instruments and UAD plugins.

Module 9 – Stretched Lead Pad

This module shows the creation of a pad, using a time stretching plugin to manipulate the original Orbital style riff.

Module 10 – Vocals and FX

This video discusses the vocal part, with Paul offering some useful tips on using Mixed in Key to select the right vocals for a track. He then talks through the choice of FX, including risers and splashes which thicken out the track.

Module 11 – Arrangement

The course concludes with the final arrangement, and the processing on the master channel.


63. Drum & Bass Beats Masterclass by Reso (Producertech)

by Producertech

Drum & Bass Beats Masterclass by Reso (Producertech)

Following on from his hugely successful Pro DnB Tips & Tricks – The Making of ‘Move It’ course, Hospital Records artist Reso returns with his new set of exclusive tutorials, focusing on creating a gritty Drum & Bass beat within Logic Pro X.

Reso is well known for his intricate and highly skilled productions, which have won him fans and plaudits worldwide. He burst onto the scene with 2012’s Tangram LP, released on Civil Music, and since then has never looked back, with a string of releases on Drum and Bass powerhouse Hospital cementing him as a key producer on their roster. Aside from his production prowess, Reso is also a hugely competent drummer (a Brit School graduate), making him ideally suited to delivering this course.

In the tutorials, Reso shows how to create a complex, jungle inspired Drum & Bass beat, using only Logic’s stock instruments and effects. Starting with the kick and snare, he then adds layers of shimmering hats, shakers and percussion, explaining in detail his choice of samples. Reso also shares his programming methods, crucial to keeping the beat sounding live and vibrant. After programming the rhythms, he then guides you through his processing techniques, giving an insight into his choice of effects, as well as mix bussing, with tools such as parallel compression and stereo EQ’d reverb returns employed to gel the beat together.

Accompanying the streamed videos – available 24/7/365 – are 10 drum loops and a bonus EXS drum kit from his Drum and Bass Intelligence sample pack, the Logic project from the course, as well as Reso’s own drums template, meaning that you can start creating your own slamming DnB beats right away. For more information, be sure to check out the module descriptions and sample module below.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Intro and Beat

Reso introduces you to the course, and then plays through the rolling DnB that will be constructed in the upcoming tutorials.

Module 2 – Template

This video walks you through the template that comes with the course, with audio and instrument channels, FX busses and a sidechain channel.

Module 3 – Kick Drum

In this lesson, the kick drum is created by bouncing down a live-sounding sample, re-pitching it, and processing it with distortion and an enveloper.

Module 4 – Adding FM to the Kick

Reso adds some low end weight to the kick using Logic’s EFM1 to create a sub tone. This sound is then further shaped with EQ and enveloper.

Module 5 – Snare

This module walks you through the creation of the gritty snare drum, and a secondary snare. Both are made by re-pitching and distorting an acoustic drum kit sample.

Module 6 – Arrangement Part 1

Reso begins to arrange the beat, showing his methods to create a live sounding programmed beat, with varying velocities and ghost notes employed to create a more intricate groove.

Module 7 – Shaker and Hat

In this video, the high end elements including the shaker and hi hats are added to the beat. Reso once again programs the velocity of the shakers and hats to create movement.

Module 8 – Tambourine and Crash

In this video, a tambourine and a crash are added to flesh out the beat. Both are side chained to allow the kick and snare to cut through.

Module 9 – Arrangement Part 2

Reso shows you how he programs different patterns, with some extra added hat and ride sounds to add variation to different sections.

Module 10 – Main Drums Bus

Moving on to the mixer section, this video shows some of the routing, and the processing that’s applied to the drums bus.

Module 11 – Parallel Compression Bus

Reso continues to mix the drums, adding parallel compression to gel the different parts together and add some real dirt to the beat.

Module 12 – Reverb Return

This module looks at the reverb bus, which uses Logic’s Space Designer. Reso also adds different EQ settings to the mid and sides to widen the reverb.

Module 13 – Final Checks and Comments

In this video, the beat is checked in mono, and an adaptive limiter is added to leave suitable headroom.

Module 14 – Outro

Reso concludes the course with one last look at the levels of the busses.


64. Producer’s Guide to Vocals (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer's Guide to Vocals (Producertech)

A good vocal has the power to transform a decent track into an unforgettable global hit, and this course will provide all the knowledge you need to write, record and process your very own vocals.

The course is a comprehensive guide to the entire process of adding vocals to a track, beginning with writing tips and suggestions for selecting and finding a vocalist, before moving onto invaluable guidance on equipment and how to ensure the recording session goes without a hitch. He then gives an in-depth guide to his professional techniques for processing vocals, covering everything from EQing and reverb, to creative slicing of improvised material, using a range of DAWs’ internal effects and 3rd party plugins.

Check out the sample module and module descriptions before signing up for an example of what to expect from the course, which ensures you’ll have all the knowledge you need to add a sparkling vocal line to your productions and elevate them to next level.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Choosing the Vocalist

Blandy kicks off the course by explaining the considerations that need to be made when finding the right vocalist to record.

Module 2 – Songwriting Techniques

This module looks at songwriting, namely writing lyrics for a vocalist. The video looks at some useful apps and websites that can aid you in the process.

Module 3 – Mic Setup

In this video, Blandy looks at the various equipment and hardware needed to run a successful vocal recording session, and also explains how to set up your DAW to record. He also discusses the differences between dynamic and condenser mics.

Module 4 – Recording

This video explains the recording process, with tips on double tracking, recording harmonies and recording ad libs.

Module 5 – Vocal Compression

Blandy shows how to compress the vocals, explaining the various parameters that can be found on compressors in Logic and Ableton, and suitable settings to create the desired effect.

Module 6 – EQing

This module focuses on EQing vocals, looking at techniques to remove unwanted low end, and add presence and sizzle using a variety of different EQ plugins.

Module 7 – Applying Reverb

Blandy shares his techniques for creating a natural sounding reverb to help the vocals sit in the mix, using Logic’s stock plugins, as well as some 3rd party plugins.

Module 8 – Using Delay

This video looks at adding delay to the main vocal part, as well as using the effect creatively to bridge transitions in the track.

Module 9 – Chorus and Special Effects

Blandy walks you through a selection of interesting effects in plugins such as Guitar Rig, CamelPhat and Replika.

Module 10 – Balance and Panning

In this module, the different vocal parts are carefully balanced in the mix, and panned to create a desirable stereo image.

Module 11 – Chopping Vocals

Blandy concludes the course by sharing his techniques for chopping up vocals creatively, taking material from ad libs to create new phrases and ideas.


65. Designing Leads with NI Massive (Producertech)

by Producertech

Designing Leads with NI Massive (Producertech)

Further your sound design skills and unlock new sonic possibilities with this course from producer Liam O’Mullane aka The Sound Tutor, focusing on the creation of soaring lead synths with NI Massive, one of the most popular soft synths on the market.

Liam has been producing music for over 20 years, and is known for his work in the drum and bass scene as TST. He is also an accomplished DJ, having demonstrated his technical mixing and scratching skills on BBC 1Xtra, and having been endorsed by the likes of Serato and Vestax. More recently, he has worked with Chris Octane as part of DnB outfit Colo(r), and has been delivering lectures at SSR London.

On the course, Liam shares his extensive sound design knowledge, walking you through the creation of a variety of differing lead sounds. The patches make full use of Massive’s capabilities, from complex evolving sounds controlled by macros, to rhythmic sounds with routing and envelope mapping allowing for intricate shaping of the timbre. The course concludes with a couple of bonus modules teaching a few compositional tips to help you create effective melodies.

The course is available to stream directly from the site after purchase, and is accessible 24/7/365. Included with the videos are the presets that Liam creates on the course, as well as 15 bonus Massive lead presets, courtesy of Loopmasters . For more information, check out the module descriptions and sample module below.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Short and Rhythmic Lead Sound

This first lesson walks through the creation of a short, percussive lead sound, inspired by the styles of EDM and Hardstyle. The patch makes use of many of Massive’s features, such as phase modulation, and effects such as parallel tube distortion.

Module 2 – Filtering the Lead Sound

Continuing on from the previous module, Liam explains his choice of oscillators, envelopes and filter modulation.

Module 3 – Thickening the Short Lead

The short and rhythmic lead patch is rounded off with some thickening and widening using the voicing, FX and Massive’s on board EQ.

Module 4 – Long and Modulated Lead

This module teaches how to program a sustained lead synth patch, which will make extensive use of modulation and macros enabling you to switch between two distinct timbres.

Module 5 – Adding Macros

Liam further shapes the sound by adding one of Massive’s filters as well as some phase distortion via the modulation oscillator. He also begins to add macros to enable movement between two distinct timbres.

Module 6 – Shaping the Tone

In this lesson, the tone is tweaked by use of vibrato, LFO and some more of Massive’s insert effects such as the frequency shifter.

Module 7 – Adding FX and EQ to the Modulated Lead

Liam moves to the FX section of Massive to add some more finesse to the sound ,with the addition of some distortion, reverb and chorus. He also shows how to EQ the sound to fit into the mix.

Module 8 – Creating a Nasty Broken Lead

This lesson focuses on the creation of an FX like lead patch, making use of pitch envelopes and heavily resonant notch and scream filters.

Module 9 – Thickening the Broken Lead

Liam rounds off the patch by adding macros, changing the voicing settings and adding a flanger and chorus effects.

Bonus Module 1 – Choosing a Musical Key

In this module, Liam teaches you some tips and tricks for working out the key of a track, and choosing the right notes to compose a melody or bassline.

Bonus Module 2 – Jamming with Reference Material

After working out the correct key and scale, Liam jams over the beat to create some melodic phrases and ideas.


66. Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques (Producertech)

by Producertech

Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques (Producertech)

Take your production skills to the next level, with this course from acclaimed UK producer Seppa. Following the release of his hard hitting, sci-fi influenced Homonculus EP,  Seppa is here to give you a thorough breakdown of the advanced techniques he uses to create his genre-hopping style, which will move your feet, and blow your mind.

Demonstrating extensive sound design techniques, Seppa drills down into the fine control of different synthesisers, radical sampling and resampling, and demonstrates a high-tech approach to mixing and fx. Next, he creates the melodic ideas, drums and percussion elements and finally mixes and arranges the track.

Included with the course is the completed Ableton Live project, as well as over 200MB of bonus samples courtesy of Loopmasters for you to use in your own productions! Check out the sample module and module descriptions below.

Radical Sampling Sample Module:

Module 1: Creating the Bass Sound

In the first module, Seppa dives straight into creating the bass sound using Operator.

Module 2: Bass Processing

Next, Seppa demonstrates his high tech approach to processing, using multi-stage EQ and FX and frequency specific saturation.

Module 3: Bass Recording

To create a library of bass samples, Seppa records the bass synth whilst altering its parameters in real time, creating unusual and exciting sounds.

Module 4: Radical Sampling with Simpler

In this module, Seppa shows you how to take an existing loop and alter it to create a range of twisted sounds using LFOs, and then capture the new samples.

Module 5: Extra Sound Design with Serum

In the final sound design module, Seppa first demonstrates how to prepare a clip for resampling. Next, he uses Serum to resample the clip, creating new sounds.

Module 6: Core Creation

In the second section, Seppa starts to create the track, beginning with the drum and percussion elements and a fuzzy sub.

Module 7: Composition

In this extensive module, Seppa creates the additional parts of the track, an arpeggiated melody, new bass sound and a break-down style section.

Module 8: Arrangement and Mixing

In the final module of the course, Seppa arranges the track and shows how to refine it through various mixing techniques.


67. Ableton Live DJ’s Guide (Producertech)

by Producertech

Ableton Live DJ's Guide (Producertech)

Ableton Live is not just a hugely popular and powerful DAW, but also a highly effective and intuitive live performance environment for DJs. Whether you’re an experienced producer, a new Ableton user or an old school DJ looking for a powerful new creative tool, this extremely detailed course from Adam Goodlet, founder and owner of Re:Creation Studio, will fully equip you to step up in front of an audience with Live at your fingertips.

In the first half of the course, Adam demonstrates how to set up Live with all of the functionality of the most popular hardware DJ mixers . You’ll learn how to build a pioneer-style channel strip; add effects including loopers, delays, distortion and reverb; how to customise a cross fader and assign a cue output and how to lay out the mixer for maximum control.

In the second half of the course, you’ll learn the best way to work with samples and how to break down a track into stems for further manipulation, hugely increasing your creative possibilities. Next, you’ll be given an insight into the most popular 3rd party plugins and hardware MIDI controllers in use today, as well as the complete setup that Adam uses to take his DJing to the next level. Finally, you’ll be shown how to record and edit a mix that you can post online.

This comprehensive course can be streamed from the web 24/7/365. and comes with the completed DJ template for Live built during the course, a channel FX rack for shaping and glitching tracks and 100MB of bonus FX samples courtesy of Loopmasters. Check out the sample module below for an example of the course content.

Sample Module

Module 1: Intro

In the first module, Adam introduces himself and explains what you will learn from the course.

Module 2: Import and Warp Audio

Beginning with the fundamentals, module 2 gives a detailed explanation about importing tracks, different warp modes and markers and organising your Project.

Module 3: Gain, EQ and Filter 

Adam continues by demonstrating how to build a Pioneer DJ-mixer style channel strip, with the gain, EQ and filter options optimised to improve upon those you’d find on a hardware unit.

Module 4: Effects and Loop Tools

In module 4, you’ll learn how to add channel effects which let you alter your sounds in real time, with looping, glitching and modulation controls. Adam also shows you how to group effects and use macro controls, so you can control multiple plugins in an intuitive way.

Module 5: Send Effects

In the next section, Adam demonstrates how to add send effects, emulating the buss FX units you’d often find in the booth including: reverb, delays and distortion.

Module 6: Mixer Layout

In module 6, you’ll learn how to set up a DJ mixer in Live. Adam explains how to duplicate channels and customise a cross-fader, including the different modes which you can use. Additionally, Adam discusses proper audio interface settings and assigning the cue output.

Module 7: Master Channel

In the final setup module, Adam discusses global effects processing, as well as how to ensuring you have enough headroom, and how to set up a master buss limiter. Concluding the modules which show you have to implement all of the features of a hardware setup in Live.

Module 8: Session View 

In module 8, focus moves to the session view, where you’ll learn about scrubbing and nudging clips, launch quantisation and using different BPMs for different scenes. Next, you’ll be given an explanation about how to use clip specific automation and resampling.

Module 9: Samples and Effects

In this module, you’ll be shown how to create a sample-deck style system in Live, including importing and tuning of samples, applying FX and using groups and the drum rack to enhance your creative possibilities.

Module 10: Working with Stems

In module 10, Adam demonstrates how to break a track down into multiple pieces of audio, such as drums, bass, chords, vocals, so you can manipulate them individually. You’ll be shown how to set warp points, and the best way to process them as groups and launch them from the session view.

Module 11: 3rd Party Effects

In this module, you’ll be given an insight into some of the most popular 3rd-party plugins available today, including some free plugins, from the likes of Xfer Records, Izotope, Sugar Bytes and more. Adam demonstrates how he uses these plugins to make his mixes more powerful, creative and exciting.

Module 12: Hardware Intro

In the next section, Adam discusses the pros and cons of three different hardware MIDI controllers and how to add them to your DJing workflow.

Module 13: Push Tips

In this module, Adam gives an overview of the Push, before walking you through his custom MIDI mappings for the Push which he uses in his DJing setup. He also describes how to use the Push as a drum machine, like some new DJ mixers are including, as well as some things to watch our for in a live situation.

Module 14: APC40 MKII

Next, you’re given an overview of the AKAI APC40MKII, and how to set it up to work with Live. Adam explains his approach to customising the controls and integrating it into the Live project built earlier.

Module 15: Xone K2 Tips

In this module, Adam shows you how to configure the Xone K2 and integrate it into the DJ setup built earlier, including using its built-in audio interface.

Module 16: Pulling it all together

In module 16, Adam brings together the different elements you’ve built during the course. You’ll be given handy tips for organising the session, create keyboard shortcuts and remove unnecessary clutter from the view to optimise your DJing workflow.

Module 17: Example Setup

In the penultimate module, Adam walks you through his Live and hardware controller DJ setup, using the Push and Xone K2 together. He demonstrates how to maximise your control over the session, without using an overwhelming number of knobs and sliders, ensuring the most important controls fall naturally under your hands.

Module 18: Recording and Exporting

In the final module, you’ll learn how to record an entire mix in Live. Adam shows you how to correct any mistakes made and then export the final version. A comprehensive explanation of file types, samples rate and bit depth and using dither is included.


68. Making Music with Ableton Push (Producertech)

by Producertech

Making Music with Ableton Push (Producertech)

Push, the hardware controller from Ableton, gives you powerful control over Live’s many features and the expressive abilities to create truly musical productions. With years of experience as a producer and DJ, Ableton Live Trainer and Course Director at Producertech, Rob Jones has both a wealth of knowledge and huge experience as a presenter, making him the best person to give you a deep insight into how to put Push at the centre of your workflow.

In this comprehensive three hour course, you’ll discover the massive functionality of Push. You won’t just be shown how it works, instead, Rob gives a detailed tour of its many features, following the natural order you would use to make a track. Individually tackling areas including sampling, drum programming and sequencing, you’ll build drum parts, create basslines and program chords and melodies – truly discovering how to use Push like an instrument. In addition, the course includes a variety of exercises that will have you drumming and playing Push like a pro.

Available 24/7/365, the course includes over three hours of streamed videos, multiple project files and 200MB of bonus samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. Check out the trailer and sample module now, and take your first steps to mastering this tactile, music-making machine!

Sample Module: Playing Basslines with Ableton Push

Modules:

Module 1 – Intro to the Course and Push

To begin, Rob gives an overview of the hardware, introducing its basic features for recording a pattern, quantising and applying effects, to show how easy it is to quickly create the fundamentals of a track.

Module 2 – Playing Loops with Simpler

In Module 2, you’ll learn how to correctly import samples using Simpler, which gives you a huge range of controls for manipulation and editing, including changing the keys of clips.

Module 3 – Slicing in Beat Mode with Simpler

Next, Rob shows how to use Slice mode to rework the samples imported in the previous module and introduces the Step Sequencer.

Module 4 – Making Parts with Simpler

In this three part module, Rob comprehensively breaks down the process of creating original parts using Simpler. He edits, warps and resequences samples using multiple different approaches, with exciting results.

Module 5 – Making Drums with Simpler in 16-velocity Mode

In module 5, Rob demonstrates how to create a grooving drum loop, with precise velocity control , adding dynamics to the track.

Module 6 – Simpler Sampling Techniques Summary

In this module, Rob summarises the techniques taught in the previous section by rapidly creating a new idea, giving a recap of the range of creative possibilities available using Simpler and Push.

Module 7 – Exercises for Playing Beats Part 1

Module 7 is packed full of handy beginner exercises which will help you develop your Push pad-drumming skills. Developing good timing is the key to rhythmic success!

Module 8 – Converting Simpler to a Drum Rack

An option for slicing samples in Simpler, this module shows how and why to convert Simpler to a drum rack for added control.

Module 9 – Making Beats with Drum Racks

In the following section, Rob delves into creating drum parts using the Push, from the basics of using the Drum Rack through to more advanced editing.

Module 10 – Quick Tip – Editing all Notes for One Drum in a Rack

In this quick tip, Rob demonstrates how to edit all of the drum parameters in one go.

Module 11 Drum Rack Editing

In module 11, Rob shows you how to edit and mix the drums, making them punchy, tight and powerful; and shows you how to avoid some simple mistakes. You’ll also see how to audition and swap out individual drums for factory samples, or your own.

Module 12 – Exercises for Playing Beats Part 2

Continuing from the last finger-drumming module, Rob builds up to a variety of realistic drum patterns, steadily increasing the complexity and showing you how to improvise on the fly.

Module 13 – Creating Basslines

Module 13 covers creating basslines with Push. With extremely detailed demonstrations on both sequencing and playing in, you’ll be making powerful basslines for a range of genres in no time.

Module 14 – Creating Melodies

Continuing using the pads, this section on melodies and chords starts with a musical introduction to playing over the bass part form the previous module. Next, you’ll learn how to use the note sequencer to create and edit tasty and exciting patterns.

Module 15 – Exercises for Playing Rhythmic Lead Lines

In the third ‘exercises’ module, Rob demonstrates some more advanced playing techniques focused on melodic parts, rather than rhythmic parts. By applying the same techniques, you’ll learn how to play fast and exciting melodic sequences efficiently and easily, as well as understanding the music theory behind them.

Module 16 – Session and Arrangement Modes

In module 16, you’ll learn how to arrange your track using the Push. Starting with Session Mode, you’ll be shown how to sketch out a track and organise your session intelligently, and Arrangement Mode, where you can record your track into the timeline window.

Module 17 – Automation 

In this module, you’ll be shown how to create automation using the Push, which gives you an excellent degree of control which can be lacking when using just the software. Rob demonstrates how you can add precise an detailed automation, which really improves the intensity and quality of your tracks.

Module 18 – Sound Design Workflow Example: DnB Bass Patch

In the penultimate module, Rob demonstrates a real workflow for creating a Drum & Bass patch, using only Live’s built in instruments and FX. This module gives a valuable insight into how an experienced producer develops the fundamentals of a track.

Module 19 – Outro

In the final module, Rob summarises what you’ve learnt in this detailed and comprehensive course.


69. Jungle Production Fundamentals (Producertech)

by Producertech

Jungle Production Fundamentals (Producertech)

Nomine (aka Andrew Ferguson) is a hugely experienced Producer, DJ and audio engineer whose journey through the UK’s dance music scene began over 20 years ago. Initially known as Outrage, Andrew was one of the pioneers of the jungle sound, DJing on Rinse FM in the station’s early pirate days and releasing tracks on Goldie’s Metalheadz label. With his more recent music now appearing on labels such as Tempa, Dubzilla Recordings and his own Nomine Sound, alongside lecturing at the University of Bedfordshire and SAE, you can trust in Nomine to deliver a truly insightful, and infinitely useful, series of tutorials on Jungle production.  

With over five hours of comprehensive videos, this massive course will teach you all of the ins and outs of creating Jungle, the fast paced and instantly recognisable genre that’s been tearing up dancefloors since the early 90s. You’ll gain a deep understanding of the classic sounds that can be found in countless tracks, as well as a detailed look at Nomine’s meticulous approach to engineering and refined production methodology. Not content to just show you what he does, the course is also packed with workflow tips and tricks to transport your production abilities to the next level.  

With unlimited availability after purchase, the course and accompanying materials are available to stream online 24/7/365. Included with the course are 120MB of bonus Jungle Samples, courtesy of Loopmasters, for use in your own productions. Check out the trailer and sample module now to kick-start your Jungle production journey today!

Sample Module:

Course Modules:

Module 1: Introduction to the Breakbeat
In the first module, Nomine gives you an insight into the foundations of Jungle and suggests some great resources for getting up to speed with the origin of the most famous breakbeats.

Module 2: Sourcing and Resequencing Breakbeats
In module 2, Nomine shows you how to properly import, time stretch and edit your imported drum samples, before converting them to a new sampler track and experimenting with different patterns.

Module 3: Creating the Classic ‘Funky Drummer’ and ‘Amen’ Breaks.
Next, Nomine demonstrates how he uses two classic breaks, the  ‘funky drummer’ and ‘Amen’ break, and includes an explanations of the different flex algorithms used by Logic. He chops up the original sample and resequences the MIDI, carefully editing specific events to remove unwanted sounds.

Module 4: Layering Drum Hits and Individual Drum Processing
In this module, Nomine layers the classic break loops with powerful 808 kick samples to give the foundation of the track a powerful and modern twist. He then demonstrates how to process the individual drum sounds to sit the different parts together and fill the frequency spectrum.

Module 5: Adding Additional Drum Sounds
In module 5, you’ll see how to add and process additional drum parts, to fill out the spectrum without creating any conflicting elements. Nomine adds a ride cymbal and bongos, resulting in an exciting and energetic range of drum sounds.

Module 6: Creating Bass Options
Next, Nomine moves onto the bass parts, creating several different options to use during the track. He creates a classic 808 bass line, using various patterns, before checking that the kick and bass don’t clash by analysing and tuning the pitch of the kick drum.

Module 7: Tuning the Percussion and Breaks
Ensuring you have all of your different parts in the same key to prevent them clashing, Nomine moves onto tuning the bongos and rides, and demonstrates his meticulous approach to production by even tuning the breaks. 

Module 8: Alternative Bass Parts 1
In module 8, Nomine shows you how to build a bass part starting from a sine wave, harking back to the early days of Jungle and the AKAI sampler. Using phase in a creative way, he walks you through synthesizing some bass line wobbles using the EXS24. 

Module 9: Alternate Bass Parts 2
In this module, you’ll first learn how to sequence a gliding bassline to add even more flavour to the track. Then, you’ll be shown how to create a classic ‘Kevin Saunderson’ style Reese bassline, a staple of the genre. 

Module 10: The Track So Far Part 1
After making some changes to the sounds, Nomine gives a thorough recap of the parts he’s created so far, and how he’s started to use them in the track. Next, he begins the process of layering the bass and sub, creating that huge, powerful bottom end. 

Module 11: Adding Strings
Starting to create the melodic elements, Nomine designs a string sound using Logic’s Retro Synth, which models some classic analogue synthesizers, then creates a chord sequence. Next he shows how to EQ this chordal part to prevent it overpowering the other elements. 

Module 12: Music Theory in Production
In module 12, Nomine gives an introduction to the music theory principles that underpin his production and DJing. He describes how to use music theory to create interesting chord sequences, melodies and basslines that express the moods and emotions you want to infuse into your music, and includes some resources to help you use this knowledge in your own tracks. 

Module 13: Creating a Chord Progression
In this module, Nomine creates an electric piano chord progression using the skills taught in the previous module. He then demonstrates the sound design and describes the FX processing used to create the instrument, and discusses his use of FX busses. 

Module 14: Creating Melodic Parts 1: Bleeps
In module 14, Nomine begins to add melodic parts starting with an atmospheric ‘bleep’ line. He adds delay and reverb to the sound and then bitcrushes the part, giving it a dirtier, crunchier tone which cuts through the mix. 

Module 15: The Track So Far Part 2
In this module, Nomine runs through each of the parts, describing the new additions he’s made to the percussion. Next, he goes back into the bass parts, explaining why he’s chosen them and how he makes them fit together. 

Module 16: Scale Quantisation
Not all producers are master of the keyboard. To save time, Nomine gives a demonstration on how you can utilise Logic’s Scale Quantisation feature and uses it to create additional bleep variations in harmonically pleasing ways. 

Module 17: Creating Melodic Parts 2: Dissonant Pad and Mentaz Sample
In module 17, Nomine sequences a dissonant pad sound which adds powerful emotive content to the track. Next, he adds a Mentaz sample, with a tremolo sound, a staple of DnB and Jungle. 

Module 18: Sound Effects
In this module, Nomine recreates many of the classic sound effects and vocal hooks found in the biggest Jungle and DnB tunes, including ones he uses in his own tracks. Going through them one by one, Nomine shows you that it isn’t just the original sounds, but the creative way they’re used, that makes them stick in the brain! 

Module 19: Finishing the ‘Boiling Pot’
In Module 19, Nomine finishes creating the different options that he’ll use to create the track, including a brief discussion about his approach to truly ‘knowing’ a genre. 

Module 20: Preparing for Arrangement 1
Beginning the arrangement section, Nomine starts by comparing all of the existing parts to see what fits together. 

Module 21: Preparing for Arrangement 2
Continuing from the previous module, Nomine performs some pre-mixing, to refine each of the individual parts before beginning the arrangement. Focusing on envelope shaping first, he tightens up the sound and makes it punchier and prouder using a transient shaper plugin and editing of envelopes in the various synths. 

Module 22: Creating the Intro
Beginning the arrangement, Nomine starts by shaping an atmospheric introduction which builds a huge sense of excitement going into the track. Using his methodology described earlier in the course, the track quickly begins to take shape. 

Module 23: Building the First Drop and Breakdown
Continuing the arrangement, Nomine constructs the first drop, bringing in the powerful bass to shake up the dance floor. Next, he begins work on a breakdown, building anticipation before the drop into the main section. 

Module 24: Creating the Main Drop
In module 24, Nomine explains how to create a powerful drop. He simplifies the different elements, removes the slower sounds and refines the resulting massive section. Then, he starts work on a second breakdown, returning to some of the melodic parts created earlier in the course, as well as using automation to build excitement. 

Module 25: Refining the Breakdown
In this module, you’ll see how Nomine continues through the track, refining the breakdown started in the previous section. He then builds another main section, creating variations by adding sound effects and automation. Coming to the end of the track, Nomine begins work on the outro, taking the track to four and a half minutes, before playing through the track so far. 

Module 26: Wrap Up
In the final module, Nomine plays through the finished arrangement and then provides a commentary on the most important mixing and production aspects, before showing how to create a quick DIY mastered bounce of the track.


70. Stutter Edit Producer’s Guide (Producertech)

by Producertech

Stutter Edit Producer’s Guide (Producertech)

iZotope’s Stutter Edit has now established itself one of the most popular effects plugins on the market, finding a home in the collection of most producers and DJs due to its great sound, versatility and multitude of uses both in the studio and on stage. In this course, Producertech senior tutor Rob Jones works his way through the plugin, skilfully explaining how each area works whilst constructing a new bank of presets from scratch.

After showing how to set up the effect in Ableton Live, Logic and Maschine, Rob begins with some examples of how to create simple effects progressions, called gestures, starting off with high- and low- pass filter sweeps. He then moves on to the main Stutter sections, taking you through the principles behind each one before building a number of different presets, including classic, looping buildups, choppy, time-stretched beat destroyers and much more.

As well as using Stutter Edit’s sections to create some more traditional effects like flangers and bit-crushers, Rob shows how they can also be used to make really useful vinyl scrubbing effects and subtler send effects layers. He then moves onto the plugin’s generator engine, which allows the programming of a variety of noise-based impacts and riser FX presets.

The 2 hours of streamed tutorials come with the bank from the course, containing 15 highly usable presets. Before signing up, check out the sample module, for an example of the teaching style and course content.

Sample Module:

Course Modules:

Module 1: Ableton Live Setup
Guide to setting up and using the plugin in Ableton Live.

Module 2: Logic Pro Setup
Guide to setting up and using the plugin in Logic Pro.

Module 3: Maschine Setup
Guide to setting up and using the plugin in Maschine.

Module 4: Guide to setting up and using the plugin in Maschine.
In this module, Rob shows you how to use any available banks, including the free Producertech bank.

Module 5: Gesture Basics Part 1 – Creating a High-Pass Filter Sweep
In module 5, you’ll gain a complete understanding of the filter gesture.

Module 6: Gesture Basics Part 2 – Creating a Low-Pass Filter Sweep
In this module, Rob demonstrates a second example of a filter sweep, delving deeper into the different configurations.

Module 7: Filter Gesture Summary and Preset Saving
Recaps on the Filter Gestures and then saves them into a new Producertech bank.

Module 8. Intro to the Stutter Effects
In module 8, you’ll be given a thorough insight into the powerful stutter controls that make this plugin so popular.

Module 9: Stutter Gesture I – Looping, Rhythmic Stutter
Creation of the first stutter preset, which is a rhythmic loop, sync’d to the tempo of a project, ideal for quick fills or longer build-ups.

Module 10. Stutter Gesture II – Classic Build-Up
Creation of the second stutter preset, which is a classic build-up that doubles in tempo as it progresses.

Module 11: Stutter Gesture III – Looping C Stutter
Creation of the third stutter preset, which is a tuned, lead-style sound, ideal for noisy EDM tracks!

Module 12: Stutter Gesture IV – 1-bar Beat Destroyer
Creation of the fourth stutter preset, which is a fill that uses time-stretching and gated stuttering to glitch things up!

Module 13: Stutter Gesture Summary
A recap on the stutter gestures and some final touches, as well as naming and saving of presets.

Module 14: Stereo Delay Options
A guide to all the controls in the Stereo Delay section, explaining the range of effects they can produce.

Module 15: Stereo Delay Gesture I – Stereo Flanger
Creation of the first stereo delay preset, which is a looping flanger.

Module 16: Stereo Delay Gesture II – Looping, Build Up Delay
Creation of the second stereo delay preset, which is gradual looping delay that builds in intensity, ideally suited for breakdowns.

Module 17: Stereo Delay Gestures III, IV and V – Vinyl Effects
Creation of the last 3 stereo delay presets, which are a variety of vinyl stops and scratching sounds.

Module 18: Summary of Stereo Delay Gestures 
Stereo delay preset naming and saving, followed by a quick demo.

Module 19: Distortion Effects 
Provides an overview of the Bit Reduction and Lo-Fi effects, before showing how to create a subtle, distorted send effect layer.

Module 20: Generator Gestures I – Impact FX
Introduces the other main type of gesture, the generator, showing how to create an impact FX preset, ideal for the start of a breakdown.

Module 21: Generator Gestures II – Riser FX
Shows another example of generator gesture creation, this time a longer riser FX preset, ideal for leading into a drop.


71. Precision Drum and Bass Construction in Maschine (Producertech)

by Producertech

Precision Drum and Bass Construction in Maschine (Producertech)

In this instalment by Drum and Bass technician Icicle, you’ll receive a rigorous and meticulous course, giving you a thorough insight into his methodical approach to drum and bass production and sound design in Native Instruments Maschine. Constructing a track from the initial sound design through to arrangement and mastering, you’ll learn professional techniques from one of the world’s most technically-minded DnB producers.

Jeroen Snik aka Icicle is a household name in the electronic music scene, having released on some of drum and bass’s most renowned labels, including Hospital Records, Critical Music and Shogun Audio. His 2011 debut album ‘Under the Ice’ received widespread critical acclaim, and this was followed up in 2015 by ‘Entropy’, topping DnB charts worldwide and spawning the Entropy Live tour, an audio-visual experience like no other! Icicle has always been hugely respected for his intricate sound design and meticulous production, which has won him plaudits across the globe and cemented his place as one of DnB’s biggest names.

Starting with the core elements, Icicle designs the drum parts, giving a thorough explanation of Maschine’s different drum engines, before creating an entirely original drum sample to slice and resequence. Next, he creates the bass, taking great care to carve a hole for the drums using specific processing techniques. Moving onto the leads and pads, Icicle precisely contours the sound to express his musical idea before moving on to arranging and mastering the track. Throughout the course, Icicle demonstrates how he integrates the Maschine hardware to give him immediate, hands-on control of the many parameters available in Maschine. 

Available to stream immediately and unlimited after purchase, the course includes almost two and a half hours of precision tutorials and two bonus modules covering additional sound design skills in Maschine, as well as 2 Maschine projects, 7 Groups from the course, and 100MB of bonus DnB samples courtesy of Loopmasters. Check out the trailer and sample module now!

Course Track:

Modules:

Module 1: Designing the Kick

In the first module, Icicle gives a detailed explanation about designing and layering kick drum sounds, giving a methodical description of Maschine’s many drum parameters.

Module 2: Designing the Snare

Continuing the drum parts, you’ll learn about the different Maschine drum engines in the layering of a powerful snare sound and how to apply precision processing to the combined snare.

Module 3: Designing the Hi-Hats

Next, Icicle moves onto the other parts of the drums, starting with the hi-hats. He begins by creating an initial sound, before adding a side-chain compressor, EQ and transient shaper to give the hi-hats remarkable clarity.

Module 4: Creating an Original Drum Sampler

In module 4, Icicle starts by applying some precision buss processing, then resamples the drum break into Maschine’s Sampler and sets it up for slicing and resampling to create a completely original drum sound. He applies additional processing, adding power to the sound, and creates the first drum break. 

Module 5: Layering Additional Percussive Elements

In this module, you’ll learn how to add additional, unique percussive sounds to the drums. With great care, Icicle meticulously layers these additional elements adding excitement to the track.

Module 6: Creating the Bass

In Module 6, Icicle starts on the melodic elements of the track. Starting with the sub bass, he gives a thorough insight into using NI Massive to create a deep and powerful sub sound. 

Module 7: Sidechaining the Bass

In this module, Icicle adds a sidechain to the bass, showing how to apply effects to groups, carving a hole for the drums which keeps them sounding punchy and powerful.

Module 8: Shaping the Lead Sounds

In Module 8, you’ll see how to quickly process lead sounds from Icicle’s Loopmasters pack. He adds various FX and filters to contour the sound precisely, adding the parameters as macros for hands-on control ready for automation. 

Module 9: Automating and Editing the Leads

Continuing from the previous module, Icicle demonstrates how to add evolving automation to the lead sound, using the hardware, extending his musical idea and beginning to shape the distinctive sound of the track.

Module 10: Adding Pad Textures

In Module 10, Icicle adds the pads, creating several progressive sequences which add a futuristic sounding atmosphere to the track. Using Maschine’s built in arpeggiator, these evolving sounds fill out the track, adding movement and enriching the sound.

Module 11: Beginning the Arrangement

Before starting the arrangement, Icicle adds FX and features sound including crashes, noise and risers, demonstrating how to precisely integrate the sounds in Maschine. Next, he begins the arrangement, methodically working through the different parts adding variations. 

Module 12:  Arranging the Track

In Module 12, Icicle goes into detail as he creates the different sections of the track. He creates variations in sound, instrumentation and automation to give each section a distinct flavour, taking the listener on a musical journey.

Module 13: Mixing, Mastering and Completing the Track

In the final module, Icicle demonstrates his mastering chain, giving a thorough explanation of what, why and how he processes the final mix. He uses a variety of plugins to EQ, Compress and Limit the track, with playing out to the club always in mind.


72. Complete Music Production Tutorial (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Music Production Tutorial (Producertech)

Singomakers are very proud to present this ultimate 2 GB of knowledge – Complete Digital Music Production Tutorial!  Over 5 Hours of Secrets and Tips for Mixing, Mastering, Sound Design Tips, Creation of a Track From Scratch, Ideas for Inspiration and many more!

Here you will discover many tricks how to make your sound Fat and Dynamic, Present and Powerful but Super-wide in same time, Loud, Clear, Diverse and Professional!

Suitable for a huge range of Electronic music genres from House, Progressive to Techno, Diablo House, EDM, Trap and many more.

In these videos Singomakers are using plugins from Fabfilter, Waves, Logic Pro plugins, iZotope Ozone, but all this settings and tricks can be applied in any DAW to any other plugins.

In detail expect to find 1,89 GB, 59 Episodes – over 5 hours of video tutorials in total, including chapters:

Arranging

  • 01 Creating A Drum Loop From Scratch
  • 02 Creating Harmony
  • 03 Creating Base Groove 
  • 04 Creating Main Theme Melody
  • 05 Creating Reverb Synth Reverb
  • 06 Creating Bass
  • 07 Creating Voice
  • 08 Making Arrangement Livelier
  • 09 Creating Mutual Side Chain
  • 10 Creating Breakdown
  • 11 Creating A Snare Roll
  • 12 Creating A Build Up
  • 13 Creating  An Impressive Drop Start
  • 14 Creating  Diversity In The Drop
  • 15 Drums Arranging Example
  • 16 Melody Arranging Example

Mixing

  • 01 Mixing Kick & Bass
  • 02 Mixing Drums
  • 03 Mixing Piano
  • 04 Mixing Main Lead
  • 05 Mixing Vox Lead
  • 06 Mixing Transients
  • 07 Mixing Reverb Send
  • 08 Mixing Chorus And Big Sound Tips
  • 09 Mixing Cool Reverb Tip
  • 10 Mixing Saturation
  • 11 Mixing Equalisation
  • 12 Mixing Kick Compression
  • 13 Mixing Final Tweaks

Mastering

  • 01 Mastering Kick & Bass
  • 02 Mastering Drums
  • 03 Mastering Piano
  • 04 Mastering Main Lead
  • 05 Mastering Vox Lead
  • 06 Mastering Transients
  • 07 Mastering Reverb Send
  • 08 Mastering Chorus And Big Sound Tips
  • 09 Mastering Cool Reverb Tip
  • 10 Mastering Saturation
  • 11 MasteringEqualisation
  • 12 Mastering Kick Compression
  • 13 Mastering Final Tweaks

Sound Design

  • Chopped Vocal Sound Design In Key
  • Chopped Vocal Sound Design Processing
  • Chopped Vocal Sound Design Tips
  • Kick Sound Design Tips
  • Kick Sound Design
  • Chopped Vocal Sound Design
  • Big Pryda Snare Sound Design
  • Bigroom Lead Sound Design
  • Bigroom Lead Sound Layering
  • Bigroom Lead Sound Processing
  • Clap Sound Design Tips
  • Clap Sound Design
  • Percussion Sound Design Fattening Tip
  • Percussion Sound Design
  • Pluck Sound Design Layering Tip
  • Pluck Sound Design
  • Reversed Reverb Design
  • Simple Bass – Sound Design Tips

Ideas & Inspiration

  • 01 Inspiration From The Groove
  • 02 Inspiration From The Harmony

All chapters are available to purchase in Full and ready to stream instantly directly from your Loopmasters Account 24/7!

Don’t miss this ultimate chance to improve your Electronic music production skills and step to the NEXT LEVEL!

  • Online Stream Course
  • Over 5 Hours of Online Music Production Tutorials
  • 60 Episodes covering:
  • Arranging
  • Mixing
  • Mastering
  • Sound Design
  • Ideas & Inspiration

73. Maschine Hip Hop & Trap Beat Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Maschine Hip Hop & Trap Beat Design (Producertech)

Powerful, energetic and vibrant drums are the foundations of every great track. In this course, Brighton based producer CAPSUN invites you into his studio to share the secrets behind designing, sequencing and mixing unique catchy drum parts for a variety of styles, using Native Instruments Maschine.

CAPSUN is a well respected figure amongst producers, known for his meticulous sound design skills which have seen him release a slew of highly successful sample packs with Loopmasters, Native Instruments and his own CAPSUN Pro Audio Label. He also has a string of successful productions under his belt, with releases on Stripes Records and electronic music giant All Trap Music.

In the following lessons, CAPSUN takes you through the process of designing all of the percussion elements in a track. Beginning with the sound design of each individual part, CAPSUN creates each component and then demonstrates his drum and percussion processing workflow. He sequences and plays in drum patterns and finally adds a melodic part to demonstrate a starting point for a full track, using the Maschine hardware heavily throughout.

Available immediately after purchase, the course can be streamed 24/7/365 anywhere with an internet connection. The course also comes complete with a selection of samples courtesy of Loopmasters for you to use in your own productions. Make sure to check out the sample module and course trailer now!

Course Track:

Modules:

Module 1: Intro

To begin, Capsun introduces the course.

Module 2: Layering Kicks Part 1 (10:18)

In this module, Capsun demonstrates how to layer and process multiple different drum sounds, including sounds from the Maschine drum engine and processed samples, to create a powerful and original kick sound.

Module 3: Layering Kicks Part 2 (07:28)

Next, Capsun begins creating the second kick, starting with a dirty and distorted 808 sample and some Foley, which he combines and edits. He then processes the new sound to create a dirtier, synthetic kick sound.

Module 4: Creating a Future-Bass Snare (07:15)

In Module 4, Capsun demonstrates how to create a Future-Bass style tonal snare, used by the likes of Jack U, Diplo and DJ Snake. He combines several tonal samples and processes them, adding the resulting sharp and percussive sound to the drum kit.

Module 5: Creating a Trap Snare (03:45)

In the next module, Capsun creates a percussive snare sound, beginning with a well known Alesis trap snare sample. He cleans up the sample and adds additional processing, widening the sound, before adding it to the drum kit.

Module 6: Creating a Clap Group (07:56)

In Module 6, Capsun demonstrates how to create a stack clap sound, by layering different styles of claps from his sample packs. He discusses playing in the claps to create a more natural sound, which he then resamples and processes.

Module 7: Creating a Live Sounding Hi-Hat (05:44)

Next, Capsun moves on to the hi-hats. He starts by demonstrating how to turn a clean hi-hat loop into a crunchy and live-sounding breakbeat style hi-hat sample. 

Module 8: Creating an 808 Style Hi-Hat (03:26)

In this module, Capsun creates open and closed versions of an 808 style hi-hat, using Maschine’s drum synth. 

Module 9: Creating Percussion Elements Part 1 (03:07)

In Module 9, Capsun discusses creating your own percussion loops. He begins by creating a tambourine sound which he pitch shifts and processes. 

Module 10: Creating Percussion Elements Part 2 (03:45)

In this module, Capsun discusses creating your own library of Foley sounds to layer into your drums. 

Module 11: Creating Percussion Elements Part 3 (05:26)

In the final percussion elements module, Capsun creates a reverse cymbal from scratch, demonstrating how he produces this iconic sound which he then tweaks to make his own.

Module 12: Overview of the Drum Sounds (06:39)

In Module 12, Capsun goes back over all of the drum sounds that you’ve created so far. He tidies up the sounds, editing the ADSR envelopes and adjusting the levels of each individual element. 

Module 13: Programming a Sequence (09:36)

In this module, Capsun demonstrates how to create drum sequences  by inputting MIDI notes. He layers up the different parts, explaining how to edit the sequences to prevent them from sounding robotic. 

Module 14: Playing in a Sequence (02:58)

In Module 14, Capsun demonstrates how to play in a similar pattern using the hardware. He demonstrates how to align the hits and then adds additional percussion parts.

Module 15: Next Steps (07:33)

In the penultimate module, Capsun discusses his approach to processing the drum group. Next, he adds some melodic parts, demonstrating how he’d start building a track.

Module 16: Outro

In the final module, Capsun concludes the course.


74. Operator Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Operator Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

In this thorough course from acclaimed UK producer Seppa, you’ll gain an unrivalled understanding of the powerful Operator Ableton Live synthesiser. Riding high after the release of his dark and atmospheric Displaced EP, Seppa is a UK producer gaining a legion of fans for his exceptional ability to craft tracks infused with incredible moods and grooves.

In this detailed course, Seppa demonstrates his mastery of Ableton’s Operator instrument, giving a comprehensive and incredibly applicable series that teaches all of the ins and outs of this powerful synth, as well as demonstrating how to create some classic bass sounds that are guaranteed to find a place in your next track.

The course is available 24/7/365 after purchase and can be watched again and again. Complete with five free presets set up in device racks, this course will take your sound design skills to the next level. Check out the trailer and sample module now!

Modules:

Module 1: Operator Overview

In the first module, Seppa begins to walk you through Operator’s various functions and gives a thorough explanation of each one.

Module 2: LFO, Filter and Pitch Envelope

In the second module, Seppa describes how to set up and use Operator’s LFO and filter. Continuing, Seppa discusses the pitch envelope controls.

Module 3: Creating a Sub Bass with Character

In module 3, Seppa demonstrates how to create a sub bass sound with additional flavour, to translate better onto different systems and add a thunderous foundation to your track.

Module 4: Creating a Richer Bass Sound

In this module, Seppa creates a richer and fuller bass part. Starting from the same sine-wave configuration, Seppa uses oscillator B and a variety of filters to create a more mid-range heavy sound.

Module 5: Creating a Variety of Original Bass Sounds

In the penultimate module, Seppa walks you through designing complex and twisted bass sounds. Full of distortion and noise, these bass parts will transform your track into a bass monster!

Module 6: Seppa Bass Design Operator Presets

In the final model, Seppa goes through the five included presets.


75. Analog Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Analog Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

In this thorough course from acclaimed UK producer Seppa, you’ll gain an unrivalled understanding of the powerful Analog Ableton Live synthesiser. Riding high after the release of his dark and atmospheric Displaced EP, Seppa is a UK producer gaining a legion of fans for his exceptional ability to craft tracks infused with incredible moods and grooves.

In this detailed course, Seppa demonstrates his mastery of Ableton’s Analog instrument, giving a comprehensive and incredibly applicable series that teaches all of the ins and outs of this powerful synth, as well as demonstrating how to create some classic bass sounds that are guaranteed to find a place in your next track.

The course is available 24/7/365 after purchase and can be watched again and again. Complete with five free presets set up in device racks, this course will take your sound design skills to the next level. Check out the trailer and sample module now!

Modules:

Module 1: Analog Overview

In the first module, Seppa begins to walk you through Analog’s various controls and gives a thorough explanation of each.

Module 2: Filters and LFOs

Next, Seppa delves into Analog’s powerful feature functionality, explaining how to manipulate them to gain total control over your sound, then moves on to a detailed description of Analog’s LFOs. 

Module 3: Global Parameters

In module 3, Seppa runs through the powerful global controls in Analog. He describes their vast functionality and how and why to use each control.

Module 4: Creating an 808 Style Bass

Moving on to creating some examples, Seppa design an 808 style bass sound. He walks through the different components of the 808 sound, describing in detail how to sculpt each aspect in Analog.

Module 5: Creating the ‘Attack Wobbler’ 

In module 5, Seppa walks you through creating a dirty and twisted bass sound. With powerful attack, it cuts through the mix, with the wobble and distortion creating a thunderous undertone.

Module 6: Creating a Reese Bass

In the penultimate module, Seppa demonstrates how to create a classic bass sound, the Reese bass. Famous for the dynamic and moving texture it adds to any track, the Reese bass is used in genres from drum and bass and dubstep to electro house.

Module 7: Seppa Bass Design Analog Presets

In the final model, Seppa goes through the five included presets.


76. Tribal and Tech House Production in Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Tribal and Tech House Production in Live (Producertech)

With almost thirty years in the UK’s dance music scene, Ian Bland a.k.a Blandy has an incredible wealth of knowledge in all things music and production. Blandy, who now owns Maison Records which releases House and Prog-House bangers, is here to take you through the production of a huge tribal/tech-house track in this superb course that spans almost four hours.

Beginning with the sound design, Blandy comprehensively describes the creation of the drums, bass, percussion, vocals, synth parts and exciting stabs and sweeps. Next, Blandy discusses his approach to setting out the track with a detailed section on arrangement. In the final section of the course, Blandy demonstrates his detailed and effective mixing and mastering style and compares the completed track to commercial examples.

The course is available immediately after purchase and comes complete with the Live project and 100MB of bonus samples, courtesy of Loopmasters. To learn more about the course and Blandy’s high-energy teaching style, check out the trailer and sample modules now!

Course Track

Module 1: Course Introduction

In the first module, Blandy introduces the course and discusses the completed track.

Module 2: Drums Part 1

In module 2, Blandy starts designing the drum parts, beginning with the kick drum, clap sounds and hi-hat. 

Module 3: Drums Part 2

In the next module, Blandy continues by adding percussion loops and applying processing to fit the different parts together before using his drum fx secret weapons!

Module 4: Creating the Bass

In module 4, Blandy starts on the bass, using resampling and MIDI to create a driving bassline to underpin the track.

Module 5: Adding 909 Percussion

A stalwart of house and techno, Roland 909 drum sounds can be heard on countless records. In this module, Blandy adds some 909 percussion samples and then processes them to fill out the track.

Module 6: Adding Vocals

In this module, Blandy adds some glitchy vocal parts which add excitement to the track. He processes them and applies FX to fit them in the mix.

Module 7: Synths 1

In Module 7, Blandy introduces a free third party synth, then gives a walkthrough of its features. He then creates a fat synth line and applies processing and FX. 

Module 8: Synths 2

In the second synths module, Blandy designs more synth parts, building up different riffs and stabs, before working on the breakdown.

Module 9: FX Sweeps and Stabs

In the next module, Blandy begins to add stabs and sweeps to the track, creating a rich and exciting texture. He builds up additional layers and processes them to sit together.

Module 10: Arrangement 1

In Module 10, Blandy begins the arrangement. He starts by tidying up the project and then starts work on the intro. Using automation, he sculpts the initial section of the track, building the excitement into the first break. 

Module 11: Arrangement 2

In the second arrangement module, Blandy continues to construct the track, progressing the melodic themes that are introduced at the start of the track. He sets out the sections of the track in bars and then adds fills and vocal parts in a methodical manner. 

Module 12: Arranging the Breakdown

In Module 12, Blandy creates the breakdown and describes how a breakdown in a tech house track differs to EDM style breakdowns. He changes the texture then adds filters and other processing and keeps the energy high throughout.

Module 13: Final Arrangement

In this module, Blandy completes the arrangement, building a middle section, mini-breakdown, additional variations and an outro. He adds new elements, automation and maintains the high energy feel.

Module 14: Mixdown

In the penultimate module, Blandy walks you through his mixdown process. He describes the tools that he uses on all of his tracks and discusses his mixing workflow, tips and tricks.

Module 15: Mastering

In the conclusion to the course, Blandy describes his mastering process and the workflow he’s refined over decades in production. He compares the track to commercial releases and demonstrates how to tweak the Ableton stock parameters to great effect. 


77. Essential Guide To Ableton Racks (Producertech)

by Producertech

Essential Guide To Ableton Racks (Producertech)

Racks are one of Ableton Live’s most powerful features for working with effects, plug-ins and instruments in a track’s device chain. Giving you incredible control over your many devices, they both streamline your workflow and create brand new possibilities for creative sound design and mixing. Not just for placing control directly under your fingertips, racks can be used for creating dynamic performance instruments, stacked synthesizers and powerful processors.

In this course by Paul Maddox, half of duo Spektre and one of Producertech’s most prolific tutors, you’ll gain a complete understanding of everything racks. Beginning with an introduction to creating your own, Maddox takes a logical and thorough approach, going into depth about the intricacies of creating original instrument racks for bass and drums and efficient processing racks for vocals, drums, breakdowns and many more.

Streamed directly from the website and with unlimited availability after purchase, the course comes with five free Live rack presets for you to use in your own productions. Check out the trailer and sample module now and take the next step to mastering racks in Ableton Live!

Sample Module:

Modules:

Module 1 – Intro to Racks – Macro Controls
An explanation of what racks are for and how to create a basic effects rack, including importing of effects, macro mapping and customisation.

Module 2 – More Rack Basics
Teaches some more simple techniques, in the context of useful applications, including ‘sweet-spotting’, multiple and inverse parameter mapping.

Module 3 – Chain Selection    
Shows how layers of effects chains can be switched and blended using chain selection, both within the rack and via macros.

Module 4 – Instrument Racks I    
Introduces Instrument Racks, showing two examples of how they can be useful add depth and texture to sounds.

Module 5 – Instrument Racks II    
Detailed explanation of the chain select area, looking at key and velocity mapping sections and showing more practical uses of each. Finishes with a demonstration of how to create MIDI effects racks 

Module 6 – Drum Racks I    
Introduces Drum Racks, showing how they differ from other racks and all of the main controls, including an explanation of the pads area, sample and instrument importing and mapping of macro controls.

Module 7 – Drum Racks II    
More techniques for working with Drum Racks to help improve your workflow, including copying to siblings, working with chains, choke groups, send effects and more.

Module 8 – Drum Racks III    
Shows some popular uses of Drum Racks, including manual and automatic sample slicing to create unique patterns or rearrangements, and how to make a Sample Selection Rack for one pad within a drum rack, allowing multiple kicks to be imported and then auditioned using a macro control whilst a drum groove plays.

Module 9 – Parallel Processing Racks    
Two lessons that show different examples of how Effect Racks can be used to add various parallel send effects layers, including one for adding spaciousness and one for beefing up drums.

Module 10 – More Advanced Effect Racks    
Two further Effect Rack lessons looking at additional advanced techniques, with the first building a rack for adding evaporation-style processing, suited to breakdowns, and the second showing how to map controls deeper in more complex rack setups to macros and how to add sidechaining to effect chains.

Module 11 – Bonus Rack Modules    
Some lessons that demo and explain the completed Rack Presets that come with the course.


78. Bass Mixing Techniques (Producertech)

by Producertech

Bass Mixing Techniques (Producertech)

In this thorough course from acclaimed UK producer Seppa, you’ll gain an unrivalled understanding of how to process and mix bass to create a professional sound using only Live’s built-in effects. Riding high after the release of his dark and atmospheric Displaced EP, Seppa is a UK producer gaining a legion of fans for his exceptional ability to craft tracks infused with incredible moods and grooves.

Following his individual courses on Live’s Suite instruments, Seppa now embarks on a quest to teach the main stages of bass processing involved in filling out and fattening up a patch, whilst also making sure no unnecessary artefacts are present. Effects covered include Erosion, Overdrive, Filtering, Multiband Dynamics and of course Compression and EQ, with both insert and parallel processing techniques shown.

The course is available 24/7/365 after purchase and can be watched again and again. Complete with 10 free FX rack presets, this course will take your bass mixing skills to the next level. Check out the trailer and sample module now!

Course Modules:

Module 1 – Sound 1 – Intro and Multiband Overdrive

Seppa introduces the course and begins working with his first sound, analysing the spectrum and applying some multiband overdrive.

Module 2 – Sound  1 – Multiband Filtering and Driven Erosion

Additional movement and textural shifts are applied using parallel filter bands and overdriven erosion effects.

Module 3 – Sound 1 – Final Processing

The Final Squeeze is applied to the bass patch, to maximise dynamics, whilst some EQ tends to any remaining issues across the frequency range. 

Lesson 1 – Final Squeeze        

Lesson 2 – Final EQ            

Module 4 – Sound 2 – Intro and Creative Filtering

Seppa uses parallel notch and band-pass filtering techniques to process the relevant portions of the frequency spectrum, to add interest and colour whilst preserving the sub.

Module 5 – Sound 2 – Amp Distortion and EQ

Extra grit is applied using Amp Simulation, to carefully treat the top end, before corrective EQ removes all the unwanted artefacts.

Lesson 1 – Amp Distortion            

Lesson 2 – EQ            

Module 6 – Sound 2 – Width

3 techniques for boosting the dimensional perception of the bass, including mid/side processing and application of various static and modulating delays.

Module 7 – Sound 2 – Multiband Dynamics and Reverb

An easy way of fattening up the bass using Live presets, followed by a comprehensive guide to using Live’s Reverb to process the patch.

Lesson 1 – Multiband Compression   

Lesson 2 – Reverb        

Module 8 – Sound 3 – Intro, EQ and Overdrive

The final sound is introduced and some EQ and stacked overdrive effects applied, to shape it and create additional high frequency layers.

Lesson 1 – EQ     

Lesson 2 – Overdrive            

Module 9 – Sound 3 – Reverb

Tips for working with Live’s Reverb, including arguments for running in parallel in a rack, as opposed to regular insert processing on the device chain.

Module 10 – Sound 3 – Compression and Limiting 

Seppa creates his Final Squeeze rack on the fly, showing some useful techniques for working with Live’s Glue Compressor and Limiter.


79. Sampler Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Sampler Bass Patch Sound Design (Producertech)

In this thorough course from acclaimed UK producer Seppa, you’ll gain an unrivalled understanding of the powerful Sampler Ableton Live instrument. Riding high after the release of his dark and atmospheric Displaced EP, Seppa is a UK producer gaining a legion of fans for his exceptional ability to craft tracks infused with incredible moods and grooves.

Throughout the tutorials, Seppa demonstrates his mastery of Ableton’s Sampler instrument, giving a comprehensive and incredibly applicable series that teaches all of the ins and outs of this powerful plugin, as well as demonstrating how to create some classic bass sounds that are guaranteed to find a place in your next track.

The course is available 24/7/365 after purchase and can be watched again and again. Complete with five free presets set up in device racks, this course will take your sound design skills to the next level. Check out the trailer and sample module now!

Modules:

Module 1 – Overview Part 1 – Sample Tab Controls

Seppa introduces Sampler and starts working his way through the instrument, with a detailed look at the controls on the Sample tab.

Module 2 – Overview Part 2 – Pitch, Osc and Filter Envelopes  

 A thorough explanation of how the different envelopes on the synth work, including those that manipulate pitch, filter frequency and frequency-modulation.

Module 3 – Overview Part 3 – Modulation, MIDI and Zone Tabs    

Sampler’s overview concludes with a look at the different modulation options, including MIDI assignment, and finally a guide to the Zones areas for sample mapping and selection.

Module 4 – Passing Thru Patch Construction    

Some multiple stacked LFO modulation is employed to add life to a bass sample, shifting it’s pitch and timbre and entirely new character in the process.

Module 5 – Rotator Patch Construction    

Notch filtering, shaping and some alternative modulation methods are utilised for this next patch, which make it undulate in a dark and menacing way.

Module 6 – Don’t Trust Patch Construction     

In this last patch, Seppa shows how to make a shorter stab, with briefer envelopes, which can become part of a multi-sampled patch, where the zones select feature allows switching from one sample to another for complex bassline creation.


80. Complete Guide to Maschine Jam (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Maschine Jam (Producertech)

Maschine has fast become one of the most desirable bits of kit, not just for creating beats like its MPC predecessor, but in fact entire arrangements, for performing or in the studio. In this comprehensive set of tutorials, senior tutor Rob Jones takes you through every detail of the Jam hardware, explaining the many techniques and different approaches to creating music.

After showing the main functionality of the software, so anyone new to Maschine is up to speed, Rob dives into the hardware, beginning with a detailed look at the dedicated Browser for Jam, and how the d-pad and encoder are employed to navigate it. Then, there are thorough explanations of each of the main button modes, including 1-, 4- and 8- sound step modes, pad and keyboard modes, and the piano roll. Rob also shows how to use the touchstrips to mix, edit and automate devices, change step parameters, play notes and control the recently released Perform FX! The course ends with a detailed look at how Maschine Jam works in DAWs like Ableton Live and Logic Pro.

As well as over 3 hours of streamed tutorials, the course comes with the Maschine projects made in the lessons and 4 free Maschine kits from Niche Audio. Before signing up, check out the sample modules for an example of the course content and delivery.

Sample Module

Module 1: Course Introduction and Jam Overview

Rob explains what will be covered on the course and then provides a brief overview of some of the main features of Maschine Jam.

Module 2: Maschine Software Introduction

A guide to some of the main software functionality, for those who are new to Maschine.

Module 3: The Browser

Some tutorials that explain how Jam’s dedicated Browser works, including a way of quickly stepping through instrument presets, swapping out sounds and browsing internal effects.

Module 4: Creating Drums in Step Mode

An introduction to the various Step Modes, showing how to construct beats and edit step parameters from the hardware.

Module 5: Creating Melodies and Basslines in Step Mode

Melodic Parts are added to the beats, including an arpeggiated-style lead hook and bassline, using Jam’s buttons in Piano Roll/Melodic Step Sequence Mode.

Module 6: Playing in Drums in Pad Mode

Shows how to play in drum parts, using different degrees of quantisation and completely freely, as well as various techniques for working with Note Repeat.

Module 7: Mixing with the Touchstrips

An introduction to the main Touchstrip modes, including Level and Control, showing how to balance the mix and tweak instruments and effects.

Module 8: Playing in an Arpeggiated Bassline in Pad Mode

A lesson that shows how to use Jam’s Arpeggiator to play in a rhythmic bassline in Keyboard Mode and then adjust the sound’s amplitude envelope.

Module 9: Playing in an Arpeggiated Chords Sequence

A guide to creating an arpeggiated sequence of chords, and some different techniques for adding variation in level and timing.

Module 10: Creating Strummed Parts with the Touchstrips in Notes Mode/strong>

A series of lessons that focus on Notes Mode for the Touchstrips, which allows MIDI notes to be played for numerous cool and unique ways of making melodic parts.

Module 11: Playing with Scenes

Techniques for jamming or performing, showing how to make and trigger scenes and Lock mode, which allows morphing between different project states.

Module 12: Performance FX

An explanation of how Jam’s Performance FX plugin works, showing the different modes and how to control them from Jam.

Module 13: Using Maschine in a DAW

Some examples of working with Jam inside a DAW, including Ableton Live and Logic Pro.

Bonus Module 1: Ableton Live Controller Editor Template

A walkthrough Jam’s extensive Controller Template for Ableton Live.


81. Building a House Anthem – Reconstructing ‘Maasai’ (Producertech)

by Producertech

Building a House Anthem - Reconstructing ‘Maasai' (Producertech)

Called ‘New Names to Watch’ by Pete Tong earlier in the year, OC & Verde have become firmly in the limelight of the House scene, with their recent productions smashing the charts and receiving praise and support from a long list of A-list DJs. In this set of tutorials, the pair reconstruct one of their best known tracks, ‘Maasai’, which spent several weeks at number 1 on Beatport and lead to a host of DJ gigs around the world.

As the tutorials progress, they lay down more and more of the core elements, explaining the thought processes and methodology behind each one, as well as any mixing considerations. After a basic drop and breakdown are formed, they start to build the arrangement, embellishing it with additional melodic sounds and FX as they go, showing the art to maintaining the energy and interest required to keep the dancefloor going. The remaining lessons then explain in detail how the different sections of the track were constructed, to demonstrate how each part develops throughout the song and ensure a DJ has the devastating drops they need!

As well as the streamed tutorials, the course comes with MIDI files of the main melodic and rhythmic sounds that can be dragged into any music software, as well as 150MB of bonus house samples, so there are plenty of materials for students to play with. Before signing up, check out the sample modules on the course page for an example of the course content, and listen to ‘Maasai’ to hear the track that the pair recreate.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Basic Groove Elements

The pair introduce the Template Project, then build up the kick, hat and snare, as well as additional textural layers.

Module 2 – Additional Main Groove Elements

A low frequency percussion groove is added, then the bassline played in and some tops used to fill out the mix.

Module 3 – Creating Hooks

Some distinctive vocal sounds are worked into the groove, before the pair move onto the all important main plucked synth riff.

Module 4 – Extra Rhythmic Layers and Breakdown Beginnings

A tom loop, made with Maschine, is imported into the arrangement and then the first mini breakdown is created.

Module 5 – Reece Bass

The menacing Reece Bassline is created, which starts to form ideas for future breakdowns.

Module 6 – Building the Intro

The initial section of the arrangement is put together, with more groove layers added to beef it up.

Module 7 – Brass Riser

A CS-80 synth plugin is used to add a distinctive brass hit, to signify transitions in the track. The synth is tweaked and various effects are added.

Module 8 – Mixing and Arrangement

The pair begin working a little more on the mix of main bass elements, and then start to think about the arrangement after the intro, leading into the first breakdown.

Module 9 – The First Drop

The first breakdown and drop sections are developed, adding more automated melodic risers to help build tension before the beat kicks back in.

Module 10 – Vocal Hook

The main vocal hook is added, showing how Logic’s song key facility can be used to automatically pitch shift samples.

Module 11 – Snare Roll and Crash

A snare roll is created with Maschine and then added to the timeline, to add energy to buildups.

Module 12 – Live Snare and Electro Synth

As the main drop section grows, various elements are added to improve the groove and add more energy, including a live, offbeat snare and a cool, syncopated synth stab.

Module 13 – Breakdown Arrangement I

The arrangement reaches the main breakdown and its basic foundations are laid out.

Module 14 – Breakdown Arrangement II

Laying down new Breakdown melodies, adding vocal harmonies and building to the final, devastating drop!

Module 15 – Completing the Arrangement

FX sounds are used to create rises and falls in tension, then a mini breakdown and outro are put together.

Module 16 – Final Mixing and Mastering Tips

A few brief comments on the mastering plugs used on the output bus.

  • Learn to Build a House Anthem
  • Over 2 hours of Vids with OC & Verde
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Includes MIDI Files
  • 150MB Bonus House Samples

82. Producer’s Guide to Avenger (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer’s Guide to Avenger (Producertech)

Vengeance Sound’s eagerly-awaited plugin Avenger is packed with synthesising and sampling power, making the creation of huge basses, leads and other patches easy with just a little know-how. On this detailed course by Producertech senior tutor Rob Jones, you’ll learn every aspect of the instrument and how to combine many of its features in order to create your own cutting edge presets.

Rob begins by working through all of the main sections, including oscillators, filters, envelopes, LFOs, sequencers and arpeggiators, concluding with a look at how to apply insert and send FX, as well as set up macro controls. Once the instrument has been thoroughly explored, there are a series of patch creation lessons that show how to use a whole host of techniques to make basses, leads, pads and more complex multi-sound, sequenced presets.

In addition to the 50+ streamed lessons, which are available immediately after purchasing, the presets from the course can also be downloaded. Take a look at the sample module for an example of the course content, so you can see what to expect from the tutorials, which will take your knowledge of Avenger and sound design to the next level!

Sample Module – Intro to using Wavetables

Module 1 – Course Intro

A brief intro to the course structure and content.

Module 2 – GUI Quick Tips

A lesson with lots of useful tips for working with the Avenger interface.

Module 3 – Browser

A series of lessons that show various aspects of the Browser, for locating, loading and saving presets.

Module 4 – Oscillator Controls

A comprehensive set of lessons that show the wide range of options in each oscillator section, for modifying the fundamental sonic character of presets.

Module 5 – V-Saw and Voicing

An explanation of each main function in the V-Saw and Voicing sections, used to add extra voices to preset, for creating more presence or width, making chords, or adding warbling effects and extra low frequencies.

Module 6 – Oscillator Routing

How the oscillator routing section works, including how to define the level and filtering of oscillators, and how to process them with different types of effects.

Module 7 – Pitch and Mod Envelopes

A guide to the Pitch and Modulation Envelopes, which are used to create pitch shifts or other parameter modulations when patches are played.

Module 8 – LFO and Mod Matrix

Lessons showing how to use LFOs to modulate parameters and then how to manage them in the Modulation Matrix.

Module 9 – Step Sequencer and Arp

How to make various rhythmic patterns using the Step Sequencer and Arpeggiator.

Module 10 – Oscillator FFT Editor

A guide to shaping the frequencies of an oscillator with the FFT Editor.

Module 11 – Wavetable and Sample Editors

How to use the oscillators in wavetable and sample mode.

Module 12 – Creating Waveform Shapes

A demonstration of how waveform shape presets can be made in Avenger.

Module 13 – Drums

Some lessons showing how drums can be played and programmed, for adding fat breaks to a patch.

Module 14 – FX

How to process sounds using insert, send or master FX.

Module 15 – Macros and MIDI Performance Options

A lesson showing how macros are set up and edited on a patch, as well as other performance control options.

Module 16 – Sound Design Examples

A series of lessons that combine many techniques from the course into some patch creation examples, building bass, lead and pad presets, in addition to a sequenced/rhythmic preset that combines drums and FX with an arpeggiated lead and bass.

  • 3 hours of streamed tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Presets from the course

83. Workflow Techniques in Ableton Push By Rob Jones (Producertech)

by Producertech

Workflow Techniques in Ableton Push By Rob Jones (Producertech)

Ableton’s powerful control surface for Live has transformed the way people use the software to create music, allowing rapid and tactile manipulation of sounds and instruments. This course explores a number of creative Push workflow ideas that begin in different ways but all result in the construction of original rhythmic or melodic parts.

Kicking off with three groove modules, the tutorials show how various drum samples can be used as starting points, which go in their own totally unique directions, whilst a default synth preset is easily transformed into a versatile FX loop. The focus then moves onto melodic part creation, showing how to turn chord shapes into the foundations of a track, from which all harmonies and basslines can be made, and how to extract notes from a chord oneshot sample for resampling and sequencing. The last melodic module then teaches how to make vocoded sounds, before the course ends by showing all the ways in which a single sample can be shaped to make a wide range of both percussive and melodic sounds.

As well as learning the workflow techniques themselves, Producertech senior tutor Rob Jones explains a wealth of other considerations along the way, from music theory principles to sonic mixing characteristics. There are also tutorials that go into detail on various effects in the Live collection, including Grain Delay and a number of MIDI effects.

In addition to the streamed tutorials, which are accessible 24/7/365, the course comes with the Live projects made in the lessons, as well as a 100MB bonus samples pack from Loopmasters. Before signing up, check out the free sample modules on the course page, for an example of the lesson content and delivery.

Sample Module

Module 1 – Groove Workflow I – Drum Loop

A guide to extracting one sound from a loop and using it as the basis for a new rhythmic track.

Module 2 – Groove Workflow II – Sound Design

Teaches how to use a synth to create a rhythmic part, which can become a subtle groove element or a more dominant lead.

Module 3 – Groove Workflow III – Resampling

A more creative workflow, which starts with a drum hit from the Live library and uses a process or processing and resampling to create an original groove.

Module 4 – Melodic Workflow I – Chord Shape

A series of 5 lessons for coming up with chord shapes, then developing them into various melodic parts, including leads and basslines.

  • Lesson 1 – Making the Chord
  • Lesson 2 – Chord Effect
  • Lesson 3 – Scale Effect
  • Lesson 4 – Making a Riff
  • Lesson 5 – Making a Bassline

Module 5 – Melodic Workflow II – Chord Sample

Starting with a oneshot chord sample, a process of harmony extraction, resampling and resequencing with a drum rack is employed to make an engaging hook.

  • Lesson 1 – Extracting and Resampling
  • Lesson 2 – Editing and Sequencing

Module 6 – Melodic Workflow III – Vocoded

A workflow for making various vocoded sounds, which are reworked, layered and manipulated to create more complex parts.

  • Lesson 1 – Making the Chord Riff
  • Lesson 2 – Making the Vocoded Loop
  • Lesson 3 – Resampling I
  • Lesson 4 – Resampling II

Module 7 – Sample Development Workflow I

A workflow that shows how to get the most out of a sample, using it to make a number of different percussive and melodic sounds.

Module 8 – Sample Development Workflow II

The concluding lesson, which takes the groove made in the previous module and adds a melody and bassline to it.

  • Creative Workflow Techniques for Push
  • Nearly 3 hours of Vids with Rob Jones
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Includes Projects from the course
  • 100MB Bonus Audio Samples

84. Reso DnB Bass Masterclass (Producertech)

by Producertech

Reso DnB Bass Masterclass (Producertech)

DnB legend Reso returns to the Producertech community to share his secrets for producing incredible Neuro-style basslines. His 2 hours of comprehensive tutorials cover sound design, arranging and composition, mixing and processing, all with Logic’s built-in instruments and effects.

The first few tutorials focus on designing bass patches, where Reso uses Alchemy and EXS24 to create a number of gnarly sounds, featuring different sonic textures and LFO-driven movement. The presets are then drawn and played into the timeline to create an exciting 32-bar phrase, with call and response and automation employed to ensure dancefloor satisfaction. The remainder of the course then shows how to process the basses via different buss channels to get the mix sounding chunky but clear, with both drums and bass finding their own unique space.

As well as the streamed tutorials, signing up to the course gives you access to a download pack comprising the Logic project, some bonus bass oneshot and loop samples from Reso’s Loopmasters pack, and also 20 exclusive bass presets for Logic’s Alchemy. Check out the free sample modules for an example of the course content, which will have you producing your own serious Neuro bass in no time!

Sample Module

Module 1 – Neuro Reece Bass Sound Design

Reso creates the first bass sound with Alchemy, combining multiple vintage sawtooths and adding various modulated filters.

Module 2 – Processing the Reece Bass

Effects are added to the Reece, both within Alchemy and on the channel strip.

Module 3 – Creating a Second Reece

Reso shows a simple trick for creating an alternative Reece, with a variation in timbre.

Module 4 – Making a Sub Bass

Alchemy is used again to make a sub bass, to take care of the Reece’s low end, with some nice tips on increasing bass presence.

Module 5 – Resampling the Reece

The Reece is resampled and imported into EXS to make an additional bass track, with further variations in movement and colour.

Module 6 – Designing the Noisy Bass

A seriously heavy bass sound is designed in Alchemy using a combination of sine waves, noise and applied waveshaping, complete with mod wheel assignments for added performance expression.

Module 7 – Noisy Bass Variation

A quick variation on the Noisy Bass is made with some added tremolo and other minor tweaks.

Module 8 – Resampled Noisy Bass

The Noisy Bass is resampled in EXS24, with some cutoff modulation applied during resampling for some serious extra movement!

Module 9 – Creating the Wub Bass

A classic wub bass is made using EXS’s default preset with added filter modulation.

Module 10 – Bass Sequencing Part 1

Reso creates a 4-bar phrase of call and response between the different bass sounds, by drawing and playing in parts, then editing notes and adding automation.

Module 11 – Bass Sequencing Part 2

Having now made a 32-bar bass arrangement using the same techniques from the previous module, Reso explains any points of interest and additional tips for keeping the interest going.

Module 12 – Bass Buss Processing Part 1

The basses are sent to a buss channel and processed with EQ and various compressors, to allow space in the mix and sort the dynamics.

Module 13 – Bass Buss Processing Part 2

A secondary auxiliary buss is created for adding space and character to the bass, which is then processed and mixed.

Module 14 – Final Mixing Tips

Some final tips from Reso on mixing, arranging and composition.

  • Pro Tips from DnB Legend Reso
  • Nearly 2-hours of Bass Production Tutorials
  • Logic Project from the Course
  • 20 Exclusive Alchemy Presets
  • Bonus Bass Oneshots and Loops

85. Producer’s Guide to Ozone 8 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer’s Guide to Ozone 8 (Producertech)

iZotope’s Ozone 8 is one of the most comprehensive software mastering suites currently available and has quickly become an essential plugin for producers. On this course by accomplished DJ producer and music educator Joshua Casper, you’ll acquire all the knowledge you need to be able create your own professional-sounding masters with Ozone.

After introducing the basics and the mastering assistant, which uses machine learning to automatically create custom presets specifically tailored to your track, Joshua moves onto the learn features, EQ matching and using the references panel, so you’ll quickly get up to speed with the main operational features and already be able to start mastering your own material to a reasonable level. However, the tutorials then progress into a detailed exploration of each of Ozone 8’s modules, covering both modern and vintage types and providing more than a few demonstrations along the way.

In addition to working with Tonal Balance Control, iZotope’s included software for assisted track equalisation, Joshua discusses general and global parameters, dithering, codec previews, and even how to export your track. The course then concludes with a realtime track mastering session, showing 2 different examples of mastering, one with modern and one with vintage modules, to compare the techniques used on each process and resulting mastered sound.

As well as accessing the streamed tutorials, signing up to the course provides access to a download pack containing 10 additional presets for Ozone and the premastered track from the videos, so you not only learn how to master with the software but also have extra materials for doing so. Check out the free sample modules from the course before signing up for an example of the tutorial content, which will enable your knowledge of Ozone and mastering to be fully realised!

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Section 1

Introduction – Learn about the course in general then get a quick look at the Ins and Outs of Ozone 8’s interface, global parameters, and generally get acquainted with the program.

Lesson 1 – Intro

Lesson 2 – Global Controls

Section 2

Mastering Made Easy – This is a close look at all the ways Ozone 8 helps you get in and get high quality masters easily no matter your skill level. The Master Assistant, Learn Feature, Presets and Track Referencing can be found here.

Lesson 3 – Mastering Assistant

Lesson 4 – Presets

Lesson 5 – Learn Feature

Lesson 6 – References

Section 3

Modern Modules – In-depth clinical look at each modern module found in Ozone 8. Learn about every parameter and possibility for each. If you are looking to go to the next level, don’t skip this section.

Lesson 7 – EQ Basics

Lesson 8 – EQ Matching

Lesson 9 – Dynamic EQ

Lesson 10 – Dynamics

Lesson 11 – Exciter

Lesson 12 – Spectral Shaper

Lesson 13 – Imager

Lesson 14 – Maximiser

Section 4

Vintage Modules – In-depth clinical look at each of the vintage modules found in Ozone 8. Learn about every parameter and possibility for each. If you are looking to go to the next level, don’t skip this section.

Lesson 15 – Vintage EQ

Lesson 16 – Vintage Tape

Lesson 17 – Vintage Compressor

Lesson 18 – Vintage Limiter

Section 5

Pro Tip – Learn how to and why you might want to load 3rd party VSTs inside Ozone 8’s standalone app.

Lesson 19 – Using 3rd Party VSTs

Section 6

Tonal Balance Control – Learn everything about this all new feature that ships with Ozone 8 and Neutron 2. How to set your targets and hit them to get that perfect EQ curve! Here we will tackle using this in both the standalone app and in your DAW and talk about how these two approaches are different.

Lesson 20 – TBC Standalone

Lesson 21 – TBC in the DAW

Section 7

Finals Stages – This looks at the Codec Preview, Dithering and Exporting options.

Lesson 22 – Codec Preview

Lesson 23 – Dithering

Lesson 24 – Exporting

Section 8

Mastering a Track – To bring this course to a close we will master a track, from start to finish, together… twice! Once using a modern approach and the second time the vintage! The premaster for my song “It’s a Shame” ft. Bulgarian reggae vocalist Irie Bear is available to download for all enrolled students so that you can follow along at home. This is the song we mixed in the Neutron 2 course here on Producertech.

Lesson 25 – Mastering with Modern Modules

Lesson 26 – Mastering with Vintage Modules

  • Learn every aspect of iZotope’s Ozone 8
  • Realtime mastering example sessions
  • 10 bonus Ozone 8 presets
  • Premastered track included

86. Producer’s Guide to Neutron 2 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer’s Guide to Neutron 2 (Producertech)

Neutron 2 is a huge upgrade to iZotope’s already revolutionary mixing suite, providing yet more innovative tools to help producers achieve incredible-sounding mixes. On this course by accomplished DJ producer and music educator Joshua Casper, you’ll discover the many ways to use Neutron to achieve mixing perfection!

Focusing on the Visual Mixer initially, Joshua shows how it can be used to mix all the individual channels in a project from one UI window, with quick and easy access to panning, levels and even stereo width for each. He also gives a detailed explanation of Tonal Balance Control, showing how to use target EQ curves from reference tracks to get exactly the mix you’re after.

In addition to tutorials that go through each part of the software, there is also a large segment of the course dedicated to using Neutron 2 to mix a track from start to finish, so every student can learn precisely how to put knowledge into practice in a real life mixing example. Each enrolled student has access to the multi-tracked stems of the track mixed in the course, as well as 10 bonus presets for Neutron 2, supplying not only the necessary knowledge but also extra materials to ensure the course delivers everything needed to produce an outstanding mix.

Sample Module

Section 1

Introduction –  Learn about the course in general then get a quick look at the Ins and Outs of Neutron 2’s Mothership, its global parameters, and get acquainted with the program.

Lesson 1 – Intro

Lesson 2 – Neutron Overview

Section 2

Mixing Made Easy – This is the module that starts you off on your mixing adventure with Neutron 2. Learn about the Track Assistant, Masking Feature, Learn Feature, Tonal Balance Control, Visual Mixer and much more. After these videos you will be well on your way to a full-on mixing technician!

Lesson 3 – Track Assistant

Lesson 4 – Masking Feature

Lesson 5 – Learn Feature

Lesson 6 – Visual Mixer

Lesson 7 – Mix Tap Device

Lesson 8 – Tonal Balance Control

Section 3

Modules – If you are looking to go to the next level, don’t skip these videos. Here we will learn everything there is to know about each of the modules found in Neutron 2.

Lesson 9 – EQ Overview

Lesson 10 – Dynamic-External Sidechain

Lesson 11 – Gate

Lesson 12 – Exciter

Lesson 13 – Transient Shaper

Lesson 14 – Compressor

Lesson 15 – Limiter

Lesson 16 – Neutrino

Section 4

Pro Tip – This is a video dedicated to external sidechaining. There are 3 modules that can accept sidechaining in Neutron 2. We will learn the routing and how each module is different and why they might be used.

Lesson 17 – External Sidechaining Advanced

Section 5

Mixing Together – This is where we wrap everything up and put it all to use. We will mix a track from start to finish using Neutron 2, the Visual Mixer and Tonal Balance Control. The stems for my song “It’s a Shame” ft. Bulgarian reggae vocalist Irie Bear is available to download for all enrolled students so that you can follow along at home. We will then fully master our resulting premaster in the Ozone 8 course here on Producertech.

Lesson 18 – Mixing Together Part 1

Lesson 19 – Mixing Together Part 2

  • Nearly 2 hours of Mixing Tutorials
  • Realtime Mixing Session
  • Included Track Stems
  • 10 Bonus Neutron Presets

87. Complete Guide to Maschine MK3 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Maschine MK3 (Producertech)

NI’s latest Maschine controller has elevated the device to whole new levels, transforming it into one of the most incredible platforms for making music. Whether producing or performing, the powerful hardware/software combo provides all the tools you need to create original beats or complete arrangements with ease. On this comprehensive course by certified trainer Rob Jones, you’ll learn every aspect of both the MK3 controller and Maschine software, as well as learn a multitude of techniques for creating many different styles of music with them.

The tutorials begin with a detailed look at how to make patterns with the pads, working in the default pad mode as well as keyboard, chord and 16-velocity modes, explaining the various benefits of each one. Rob then teaches the ins and outs of soundslots in Maschine, by building a kit from scratch, before getting more advanced with Maschine’s Sampler, showing how to record and edit your own samples, slice up loops and lots more.

There is also a thorough exploration of Maschine’s instruments and effects, with lessons on both Drum and Bass Synths, as well as the entire range of built-in effects. Additionally, the course includes tutorials covering more advanced signal routing and effects usage, teaching how to modulate parameters and set up send effects, and also how to use Maschine within DAWs like Ableton Live and Logic Pro.

Signing up to the course provides immediate access to over 4 hours of tutorials, written notes, Maschine projects and 250MB of bonus samples. Before signing up, check out the free sample modules for an example of the tutorial content, which will have you mastering NI’s legendary music-making tool in no time!

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Intro to Maschine
This module provides an overview of the Maschine software and hardware, to demonstrate the extent of its capabilities, showing both completed projects with arrangements and brand new projects for setting up and getting going with pattern creation.

Module 2 – Pattern Creation Part 1
This module starts to teach how patterns can be created, predominantly by playing in events with the hardware pads, as well as some important event parameters like velocity and timing.

  • Lesson 1 – Pad Mode Pattern Creation 1
  • Lesson 2 – Pad Mode Pattern Creation 2
  • Lesson 3 – Software Pattern Editor

Module 3 – Soundslots
This module teaches some soundslot fundamentals, by showing how to build up your own kit in a group, consisting of various drum and bass samples, which are edited and sequenced into a groove.

  • Lesson 1 – Adding Drums and Creating a Break
  • Lesson 2 – Editing Soundslots in Sampler
  • Lesson 3 – Adding Bass and Finishing the Kit

Module 4 – Pattern Creation Part 2
This module continues looking at pattern creation, focussing this time on the additional pad modes, including step, keyboard and chord, as well as 16-velocity mode.

  • Lesson 1 – Step Mode
  • Lesson 2 – Keyboard and Chord Mode
  • Lesson 3 – 16-Velocity Mode

Module 5 – Scenes and Sections
This module shows how scenes and sections can be used to create different fixed combinations of patterns, either for jamming with different loops or laying out an arrangement of a song along a timeline.

  • Lesson 1 – Scene Mode
  • Lesson 2 – Section Mode
  • Lesson 3 – Unique and Auto-Length

Module 6 – Sampling
This module teaches how to record and edit your own samples, including single hits and loops, either from external sources or internally within your project.

  • Lesson 1 – Recording Oneshot Samples
  • Lesson 2 – Recording Loops
  • Lesson 3 – Slicing Samples
  • Lesson 4 – Stretching Samples

Module 7 – Effects
This module runs you through how to apply effects processing to sounds within Maschine, be they individual soundslots in a group, whole groups or the master output, so all groups simultaneously. As well as providing a guide to the range of effects on offer and how to use them, this should also help to further develop your understanding of the Plugins section of the software.

  • Lesson 1 – Guide to Machine’s Effects
  • Lesson 2 – Adding and Editing Effects with MK3

Module 8 – Drum Synth and Bass Synth
This module is a guide to using Maschine’s two synths, for designing and creating your own drums and bass. There is also a demonstration of using the step editor to create a 303 bassline, to accompany the drum break, which is embellished in the next module.

  • Lesson 1 – Drum Synth
  • Lesson 2 – Bass Synth

Module 9 – Advanced Effects and Routing
This module teaches some more advanced effects techniques, including modulation, meaning both automating of effect parameters into patterns and also onboard effects themselves, as well as setting up send effects and using sidechains.

  • Lesson 1 – Modulating Parameters with MK3
  • Lesson 2 – Envelope and LFO Modulation
  • Lesson 3 – Step Mode Modulation
  • Lesson 4 – Send Effects
  • Lesson 5 – Sidechaining

Module 10 – Macros and Performance Features
This module shows how the various performance-related controls on Maschine can be used to add expressive elements to your music.

  • Lesson 1 – Macros
  • Lesson 2 – Lock Snapshots
  • Lesson 3 – Smart Strip
  • Lesson 4 – Perform FX

Module 11 – Using Maschine in the DAW
This module shows how Maschine works running as a plugin in the DAW, to highlight the differences and ways it can be used.

Please Note:  Courses are streamed lessons – access 24/7/365

  • streamed lessons – access 24/7/365
  • Learn every aspect of MK3 hardware and software
  • Over 4 hours of quality tutorials
  • Detailed written notes
  • Maschine projects from every lesson
  • 250MB of Bonus Samples

88. Producer’s Guide to Superior Drummer 3 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer's Guide to Superior Drummer 3 (Producertech)

Toontrack’s Superior Drummer 3 is an unrivalled platform for the creation of acoustic, electronic or hybrid drums, incorporating a huge library of sampled kits, recorded by George Massenburg, with an intuitive mixer that includes 35 built-in effects, comprehensive groove manipulation and much more! On this detailed course by Joshua Casper, you’ll be guided through every part of the software, to get you well on your way to programming incredible drum tracks with this legendary virtual studio.

The course starts with a proper look at the foundations of the software, the drums themselves, showing how kits are loaded up, played and customised. Once the desired kit has been created, the drums are then programmed and edited using the groove and song track panels, before balancing and processing everything with the software’s powerful mixer.

In addition to covering all of the main sections of Superior Drummer, there are separate tutorials on every one of the 35 audio effects onboard! Furthermore, Joshua provides a useful demonstration of how to import audio of multi-tracked drum sessions and extract high quality MIDI using the tracker panel, allowing enhancing or replacing of audio with the software’s high quality drum samples.

Signing up to the course provides 24/7 access to 3 and a half hours of tutorials, as well as 5 bonus kit and mixer presets. Check out the free sample module for an example of the course style and content, which will have you producing pristine beats in no time!

Sample Module

Module 1 – Intro

2 LESSONS: An introduction to the course and overview of the software.

Module 2 – The Drums Tab

4 LESSONS: Joshua works through each area of the drums tab, showing how to select, customise and refine a kit.

Module 3 – The Grooves Tab

3 LESSONS: Joshua shows how to create and edit beats using the grooves tab.

Module 4 – The Song Track

5 LESSONS: A detailed look at the song track, where beats are constructed along a timeline.

Module 5 – Macro Controls

1 LESSON: Joshua teaches how macro controls work inside SP3.

Module 6 – The Mixer Tab

3 LESSONS: A thorough guide to the mixer section, where drum kits are balanced, processed with insert and send effects, and much more.

Module 7 – Effects

36 LESSONS: How effects are used in SP3, including individual guides to every one of the 35 available tools.

Module 8 – The Tracking Tab

4 LESSONS: A useful demonstration of how to import multi-tracked drums into SP3, so that certain sounds can be replaced using the software’s pristine drum samples.

  • 3.5 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Pro Drum Programming & Mixing Tips
  • Access 24/7/365
  • 5 Bonus Kit and Mixer Presets

89. Producer’s Guide To Spire (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer's Guide To Spire (Producertech)

Reveal Sound’s soft synth Spire has quickly become a standard in the plugin collection of most aspiring producers, with its powerful feature set and impressive audio quality allowing the creation of a huge range of desirable sounds. In this 3-hour course from Producertech senior tutor Rob Jones, you’ll be taken through every section of the plugin interface and shown a multitude of techniques for designing a variety of different patches.

Spire’s 4-oscillator sound engines offer a host of unique options for the type of synthesis, with amplitude, pulse width and frequency modulation all available, as well as a sync mode. This is further enhanced by a double waveform feature, where the first waveform is selectable from all standard oscillator types and the second from a long list of sample-based waveforms, which can be combined independently in each oscillator and made to interact in weird and wonderful ways. Once Rob has explained how each mode works and how waveforms can then be processed and blended in the unison and mix sections, he provides a number of patch design examples to help cement the techniques learned so far.

The next part of the course then tackles Spire’s filters and various modulators, including envelopes, LFOs and a stepper, before moving onto the Arpeggiator, EQ and FX. Once every part of the synth has been dealt with, Rob moves onto a series of extensive patch design lessons, with the first showing the designing of a gritty, raucous bass, the second a gripping lead and the last a multi-part, groove sequence.

Signing up to the course gets you instant 24/7 access to the streamed tutorials for as long as you need, plus a download pack containing the patches made on the course and 10 bonus presets from Loopmasters. Check out the free sample modules before signing up for an example of the course style and content, which ensures you’ll walk away with a much improved understanding of how to use Spire to create your own masterful sounds!

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Wave Section – 2 Lessons

A guide to the oscillator engines and the many different modes within them for creating classic, PWM, FM and sync sounds with the synthesiser and sample-based waveforms.

Module 2 – Unison and Mix Sections – 2 Lessons

A module showing how the unison section allows a host of detuning effects and also intervals and chords to be made, before the width and panning of the oscillator is defined.

Module 3 – Example Wave Designs – 2 Lessons

A simple example of using all 4 oscillators to create a detuned saw preset, followed by a more complex example of layering oscillators to create a patch.

Module 4 – Filters – 2 Lessons

A guide to the filter section, including the individual filter controls and how to set up and use them in series and parallel modes.

Module 5 – Modulators – 2 Lessons

Spire’s main modulators are covered, looking at how to modulate oscillator pitch in one-shot and continuous looped fashion with the envelopes and LFOs, respectively.

Module 6 – Stepper – 1 Lesson

A module showing how to use Spire’s stepper to modulate the filter cutoff up and down, in order to create a classic, rhythmic bass patch.

Module 7 – Arpeggiator – 1 Lesson

The Arpeggiator is used to create a dancing, melodic patch, with the sequencer bars shifting the pitch of notes across several octaves in a syncopated rhythm.

Module 8 – FX and EQ – 2 Lessons

The final sections of the synth are covered, showing how they enable the application of numerous effects as well as parametric EQ to the master output.

Module 9 – Patch Design 1 – Bass Part 1 – 4 Lessons

The first part of a lengthy series of lessons showing how to create a bass patch, which includes a guide to the different monophonic modes available, creative use of filtering to add additional layers of sound, and application of effects.

Module 10 – Patch Design 2 – Bass Part 2 – 3 Lessons

The bass sound from the previous module is expanded, with a bass layer added using another oscillator, modulation applied to the shaper effect, and then important parameters on the synth mapped to different macro controls.

Module 11 – Patch Design 3 – Lead – 5 Lessons

A multi-layer lead patch is made, consisting of an FM striking sound, bolstered by filtered noise, followed by a more gradual sync’d oscillator for the secondary part of the sound.

Module 12 – Patch Design 4 – Sequence – 2 Lessons

A rhythmic, looping sequence is created, which includes a psy style bass, syncopated minor chord stab and up-beat hi hat.

  • 3 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Pro Sound Design Tips and Tricks
  • 13 Included Spire Presets

90. Complete Guide to Wavetable (Producertech)

by Producertech

Complete Guide to Wavetable (Producertech)

Ableton’s stunning new synth Wavetable, only surfacing recently in Live 10, is already making huge waves with its powerful engine and engaging graphic interface. On this course from certified trainer Rob Jones, you’ll be shown how to create a number of presets in step-by-step fashion, and in doing so will learn how each section of the instrument works and an array of techniques for using them to create quality patches of your own. You’ll also get a series of free bonus tutorials on another new Live 10 device, Echo, which show how to add interesting textures and processing to the Wavetable patches made on the course.

After a brief overview, Rob dives straight in to looking at some simple examples of oscillator modulation and waveshaping, demonstrating how impressive sounds can be made with relative ease. He then develops the sound with other sections of the synth, to improve students’ understanding of the device and as a gentle introduction to designing sounds. The subsequent modules then move into more advanced territory, looking at increasingly complex and layered modulation techniques, used to create a Neuro Bass patch, a Spacey Plucked Lead and a Glitchy Rhythmic Sequence.

Although the bulk of the course is dedicated to Wavetable, there are 40 mins of bonus lessons on Echo, a fantastic new delay in Live 10. Rob uses Echo to add an extra dimension to lead and bass patches, making use of many of the unique features on the effect, such as modulation and mid/side mode. All modules are divided into shorter lessons, making digestion of lesson content and future referencing a great deal easier.

Signing up gets you instant access to the streamed tutorials, plus all the projects and 10 Wavetable presets made on the course. Free sample modules are available directly on the course page, as an example of the lesson style and content, which will ensure a significant improvement to your knowledge of wavetable synthesising and sound design.

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Overview

A tour through the graphic user interface, including filter routing, modulators and global controls.

Module 2 – Oscillator Modulation I

An explanation of Wavetable Synthesis, showing some simple examples of oscillator envelope modulation and waveshaping.

Module 3 – Adding Sub and Filtering

Using the sub and filter sections to add bass and shape the frequencies of sound over time.

Module 4 – Oscillator Modulation II – Neuro Bass

Some more complex examples of oscillator modulation, including looped envelopes, stacked or summed modulation, pulse width modulation and sync, and changed to global matrix timing.

Module 5 – Stereo Pad Design

Modulating oscillators to create stereo effects, and using them to form different textures across the stereo field.

Module 6 – Rhythmic Glitch Preset

A final patch design demonstration, showing how to create an FX loop preset.

Module 7 – Final Presets – Bonus Tips

Some comments on additional course presets, including shaped, sync’d LFO modulation and multiple amp envelope usage.

Module 8 – Bonus Echo Tutorials I

An introduction to Echo, starting with a look at delay timing and graphic controls.

Module 9 – Bonus Echo Tutorials II

A look at reverb and other stereo effects within Echo.

Module 10 – Bonus Echo Tutorials III

Using Echo’s Modulation and Character tabs.

  • 2.5 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Wavetable & Echo Tips and Tricks
  • Included Live Projects
  • 10 Free Wavetable Presets

91. Producer’s Guide to VocalSynth 2 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer’s Guide to VocalSynth 2 (Producertech)

iZotope’s latest release comes in the form of VocalSynth 2, an immersive vocal experience with an impressive flexibility that allows it to adapt to a wide range of situations. The plugin comprises five powerful vocal tools, including a Vocoder, Talkbox and several modules for applying the sonic qualities of real life or digital vocal effects. On this course from Producertech, you’ll be taken through each part of the software and then shown a series of practical studio applications, to help develop a good understanding of VocalSynth 2 and learn how to achieve great results in your music.

The course begins with Joshua Casper giving an overview of the plugin architecture and main graphical editing facilities, before getting stuck into each of the five main synth modules, beginning with the all new Biovox, which uses modelling of a human vocal tract to simulate multiple biological characteristics, including nasality, vowel shapes, formants and breathiness. He then works through the remaining vocal synth sections, every one of the effects and then MIDI and sidechain modes.

Once the GUI has been sufficiently explored, Joshua walks through a number of different projects, showing how VocalSynth 2 can be used to add mesmerising textures to a variety of parts, vocal or otherwise. Topics covered include retuning vocals in MIDI mode, adding flare, compression and Major Lazer effects, creative drum processing and using non-vocal sources with the plugin.

Signing up to the course gets you immediate access to the 100 minutes of streamed tutorials, plus 3 Ableton Live projects to try out the techniques covered and 10 bonus VocalSynth presets created by Joshua Casper. Several free sample modules are available as tasters of the lesson style and content, which will assist you greatly in taking your understanding of VocalSynth 2 to the next level!

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Introduction to VocalSynth 2

4 lessons that provide an overview of the plugin GUI, working through the main architecture and functionality, the meter and XY pad, pitch correction and voicing.

Lesson 1 – VocalSynth 2 GUI Tour         05.38

Lesson 2 – Meter and XY Pad        02.18

Lesson 3 – Pitch Correction        03.43

Lesson 4 – Voicing        01.41

Module 2 – The Synth Modules

A lesson for each of the synth processors in the plugin, used to create a number of classic, digital and biological vocal effects.

Lesson 1 – Biovox        04.30

Lesson 2 – Vocoder        03.18

Lesson 3 – Compuvox        03.12

Lesson 4 – Talkvox        03.03

Lesson 5 – Polyvox        01.37

Module 3 – Effects

Joshua provides a guide to using effects within VocalSynth 2, working through each one of the available audio processors and the controls within them.

Lesson 1 – Effects Overview        05.04

Module 4 – MIDI and Sidechain Modes

An explanation of the additional modes for VocalSynth 2, where the plugin can be used in MIDI or Sidechain modes, as opposed to audio.

Lesson 1 – MIDI Mode        04.19

Lesson 2 – Sidechain Mode        03.48

Module 5 – Studio Applications

A series of lessons that show a number of different practical applications for using VocalSynth 2 in real sessions.

Lesson 1 – Retuning Vocals in MIDI Mode    05.39

Lesson 2 – Dealing with Wet Vocal Samples    04.39

Lesson 3 – Adding Flare to Vocal Loops    07.42

Lesson 4 – Improving Results with Compression    03.57

Lesson 5 – The Major Lazer Effect        05.42

Lesson 6 – Creative Drum Processing        05.14

Lesson 7 – Using Non-Vocals with VocalSynth    07.49

  • 100 mins of streamed VocalSynth 2 Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • 3 Ableton Live Projects
  • 10 Exclusive VocalSynth Presets

92. Producer’s Guide To Hybrid 3 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Producer's Guide To Hybrid 3 (Producertech)

AIR Music Technology’s Hybrid 3 is a hugely powerful virtual synth, with a vast array of features under the hood. As with any instrument, the key to unlocking its potential is an understanding of how to access and make good use of everything it has to offer. This course by Producertech senior tutor Rob Jones teaches exactly that, taking you on a sound design journey through every nook and cranny of the software, to have you editing and creating patches with ease in no time!

To keep things interesting and prevent tedious walkthroughs, every lesson on Rob’s course is an example of patch design, kicking off right from the offset with a demonstration of how to make a detuned saw preset, with oscillators in their default states and a minimal amount of envelope adjustment. Increasing gradually in complexity, Rob works through many of the main categories of patch, showing the techniques involved with making basses, leads, pads, FX, arps and more.

Despite the plugin interface’s relatively simple appearance, every area of the instrument has a lot of flexibility, with oscillators providing sync, pulse width modulation and wavetable synthesis with just a few clicks. Dual filtering and saturation also offer a massive amount of sound manipulation right from the main window, with other unique features including a pump LFO and filter FM facility, all of which is explored thoroughly on the course.

After all of the main areas of the plugin have been sufficiently explained, Rob wraps things up with a series of quick tips, giving some additional 1-2 minute sound design tricks, to help Hybrid users achieve instant results.

Signing up to the course provides students with well over 2 hours of streamed tutorials, along with 20 presets for the synth, offering both a useful collection of inspiring patches as well as clear and precise instructions on how to make them. Before signing up, check out the sample modules, for examples of the lesson style and content, which will soon make Hybrid your go-to instrument for producing high quality sounds.

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Sound Design Basics

An introduction to Hybrid 3, showing how to make a simple patch from the default state, by mixing all oscillators and shaping with the amp and filter envelopes.

Lesson 1 – Adding and Tuning Oscillators – 04.43

Lesson 2 – Amplifier and Filter Envelope – 06.22

Module 2 – Pad Design 1

A second simple design example, making a chord pad preset with global unison voicing.

Lesson 1 – Creating a Unison Pad – 06.05

Lesson 2 – Adding Extra Voices – 04.05

Module 3 – Pad Design 2

The pad preset from the previous module is modified by high-pass filtering with inverted envelope modulation.

Lesson 1 – Customised Filter Enveloping – 06.27

Module 4 – Classic Lead Design

A quick and easy way to make a highly usable lead sound by modulating an oscillator in Saw Sync mode.

Lesson 1 – Intro to the Oscillator Modes and Modulation – 05.30

Module 5 – Wavetable Synthesis     

Using oscillators in Wavetable mode to create an evolving bass preset, which is filtered to create an even bassier and more distorted alternative.

Lesson 1 – Setting up Oscillator 1 – 03.52

Lesson 2 – Adding Extra Oscillators – 08.23

Lesson 3 – Filtering Options – 02.33

Module 6 – Parallel Filter Design

How to use parallel filters to create separate layers of frequencies, with stacked filter modulation adding extra movement and interest.

Lesson 1 – Setting up the Oscillators – 03.07

Lesson 2 – Modulated Band-Pass Filter 1 – 03.12

Lesson 3 – Parallel Filter Application  – 06.01

Module 7 – Creating Percussion

Another example of oscillator modulation, this time to create a classic 808 tom patch.

Lesson 1 – Oscillator 1 Transient Strike – 03.42

Lesson 2 – Oscillator 2 Tuned Pitch – 05.10

Lesson 3 – Osc 2 Pitch Mod and Effects – 03.49

Module 8 – Velocity Modulation

How to use the velocity of MIDI notes to change the sound of a patch, as well as showing how the filters can be used to independently process oscillators 1 and 2.

Lesson 1 – Osc 2 Setup and Velocity Intro – 04.34

Lesson 2 – Att Vel, Dec Vel and Keytrack – 02.52

Lesson 3 – Adding Osc 1 and Fine Tuning Velocity Mod – 05.57

Lesson 4 – Osc (Split) Filtering – 05.15

Module 9 – Step Sequencer

A guide to Hybrid’s Step Sequencer, used to create an arpeggiated patch.

Lesson 1 – Sequencing a Pattern – 05.07

Lesson 2 – Adding Velocity Variation and Adjusting Length – 03.34

Module 10 – Pump LFO and Filter FM

Some tips for using the pump LFO and filter FM features, to create more dynamic and exciting presets.

Lesson 1 – Filter FM– 06.46

Lesson 2 – Pump LFO – 03.05

Module 11 – Insert Effects

A quick lesson to show how insert effects are applied within Hybrid.

Lesson 1 – Using Insert Effects – 02.31

Module 12 – Multiple Part Preset Design

How to create presets using both parts A and B in Hybrid. Rob demonstrates how to edit factory presets in both parts to create an epic riser FX patch.

Lesson 1 – Intro to Part Presets & Part A Setup – 06.07

Lesson 2 – Part B Rhythmic Perc – 03.13

Lesson 3 – Morph Controls – 03.15

Module 13 – Bonus Quick Tips

A series of quick tips for extra sound design inspiration, including additional modulation options, filter sequencing and assigning of parameters to MIDI controllers.

Lesson 1 – LFO Drift Tip – 01.30

Lesson 2 – Assigning the Mod Wheel – 0.44

Lesson 3 – Creating Filter Sequences – 01.52

Lesson 4 – Adding Glide – 01.14

Lesson 5 – Assiging Morph Control to Aftertouch – 02.31

  • Well over 2 hours of streamed tutorials
  • 32 individual lessons
  • 20 bonus Hybrid presets
  • Access 24/7/365

93. EQ Fundamentals (Producertech)

by Producertech

EQ Fundamentals (Producertech)

Equalisation is one of the most essential skills to master when mixing a track, and having a solid understanding of the core principles that govern its usage is tantamount to creating a professional-sounding mix. On this course from certified trainer Rob Jones, you’ll be taken through each of the fundamentals of EQ, so you come away armed with the knowledge and direction you need to confidently apply equalisation in your music.

As EQ is about shaping frequencies, many areas of the course focus on the composition of sounds, to help students fully understand each part of the frequency spectrum and what exactly it contributes to different musical parts. The course is peppered with a multitude of ‘frequency demos’, as well as practical production examples, to ensure a thorough grasp of frequencies is attained.

Once all the key aspects of spectral content and main types of EQ have been taught, there are lessons showing how to EQ a number of different sounds in a track, both independently and with respect to one another. Sources shown include vocals, guitar parts, bass, piano, organs and other accompaniment. There is also a module dedicated to drums, which conveys some important considerations for EQing your kick drum, snare and cymbals, as well as the whole kit together on a drums buss.

A specific focus is also given to mixing bass, with a module looking at a number of different kick and bass combinations, to help with achieving the all important tight bottom end.

After covering EQ on the master channel, the course wraps up with a summary of the provided practice material, which includes 2 separate sets of stems, given both as raw audio and mixed and unmixed projects for a number of the main DAWs. With this wealth of material, plus a multiple choice assessment at the end of the course, students can be assured they’ll have everything necessary to progress their EQ skills to the next level!

Sample Module – 4a – Frequency Spectrum Focus

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Introduction to Frequencies

Two demonstrations showing the composition of sounds in terms of frequencies, and how various complex sounds can be manipulated with EQ to become much simpler ones.

Frequency Demo #1 – Turning noise into a single pitch – 02.58

Frequency Demo #2 – Turning a piano into a sine wave – 02.30

Module 2 – EQ Controls

A series of lessons teaching the various controls available on different types of EQ, including gain, frequency and Q, as well as a look at the different types of EQ band.

Lesson 1 – Simple 3-Band EQ – 03.44

Lesson 2 – Parametric Bands – 05.12

Lesson 3 – EQ Curve, Shelving & Filters – 03.16

Module 3 – EQ in isolation

Two lessons showing different approaches to EQing a bass guitar, with one focussed more on boosting and the other attenuating frequencies.

Example #1 – Mainly Boosting  – 03.11

Example #2 – Mainly Attenuating (Reducing) – 03.12

Module 4 – Frequency Demo #3 

A demonstration of frequency overloading when similar bands of frequencies combine.

Combining the Piano and Sine Wave – 02.57

Bonus Module 4a – The Frequency Spectrum Explained

A more detailed look at the Frequency Spectrum, including a demonstration of sine waves with octave spacings, an analysis of a more complex tuned percussion sample and a breakdown of low, mids and highs.

Frequency Spectrum Focus – 07.34

Module 5 – EQ with respect to other parts  

Some examples of using EQ to shape the frequencies of sounds with respect to one another.

Intro  – 02.09

Example #1 – Vocal & Guitar – 02.56

Example #2 – Organ and Guitar – 04.49

Module 6 – EQing Drums

Tips for applying EQ to individual and grouped drums.

Individual Drum EQ #1 – Kick – 04.22

Individual Drum EQ #2 – Snare – 03.36

Individual Drum EQ #3 – Hat  – 01.50

Group or Drum Buss EQ – 05.16

Module 7 – Common EQ Practices

A few common objectives when using EQ, to help guide a workflow and provide solid aims to work towards.

EQ Objectives – 06.42

Module 8 – EQing Kick and Bass

A detailed lesson focussing on low frequencies and the considerations for using EQ on kick and bass parts in heavy sub bass Trap.

Lesson 1 – Kicks and Groove Intro – 08.19

Lesson 2 – EQing the Kicks and Sub – 10.20

Lesson 3 – More Sub Tweaks and Lows Focus Tip – 05.50

Module 9 –  EQ on the Master Channel

Some pointers for using EQ to shape the entire mix.

Master Channel EQ – 07.20

Module 10 – EQ In The Mix

A realtime mixdown EQ session, working through every part in the second set of stems to fully sculpt the sound of a dense and melody-laden mix.

Lesson 1 – Pre Mix Analysis – 03.23

Lesson 2 – Drums EQ – 08.28

Lesson 3 – Bass EQ – 05.46

Lesson 4 – Vocal and Piano EQ – 08.52

Lesson 5 – Organ EQ – 04.57

Lesson 6 – Strings EQ – 04.39

Lesson 7 – Guitar EQ – 08.58

Lesson 8 – Drum Buss EQ – 07.23

Lesson 9 – Master EQ – 05.26

  • 2.5 hours of streamed EQ tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • 2 practice EQ mixing sessions
  • Audio stems and DAW projects
  • EQ Assessment

94. Classic House Production & Sound Design (Producertech)

by Producertech

Classic House Production & Sound Design (Producertech)

Maison Records owner Ian Bland returns to Producertech to deliver another course on constructing a classic house track from scratch, this time in Logic Pro. Using almost exclusively Logic’s built-in instruments and effects, Ian shows how to design bass grooves, leads, pads, vocals and more, then arrange and mix them into a professional-sounding track.

The completed track, ‘Living for the Moment’, which has now been released on Rebel Eye under his alias Dancing Divaz, is supplied with the course in mastered and pre-mastered format. Ian also goes under aliases Hollywood Hills, Quake, Dejure, Blandy and many others, releasing on a host of popular labels, as well as his own label Maison Records. His impressive discography includes remixes for Queen and Prince, and dates right back to his formation of legendary rave outfit Dream Frequency in 1990!

On the course, Ian shows how to design and sequence every one of the musical parts, including grooving bass, stabbed synth and organ chords, sustained strings and vocals, using Logic’s EXS24, ES2, Alchemy, B3 and Retro Synth. This allows students to see how each part of a house track can be created from the ground up, without relying heavily on samples. Once all parts have been produced, Ian then builds his arrangement, spending a decent amount of time on each section, so you’ll learn how to maintain continuity and interest throughout the track. Finally, levels are balanced and effects applied, to ensure the end result is comparable to other professional releases in the genre.

Signing up to the course gets you instant 24/7 access to over 5-hours of tutorials, for as long as you need, plus all the Logic projects from the course and a 100MB bonus pack of house samples from Loopmasters. Before signing up, check out the free sample module and listen to the completed track on the Producertech SoundCloud page.

Track from the Course: 

Sample Module

Course Breakdown

Module 0 – Intro

Ian introduces the course and plays through his completed arrangement.

Module 1 – Designing the Kick

The sculpting and layering of a house kick from scratch using Sonic Academy’s Kick 2 Plugin.

Module 2 – Main Groove 1

Ian uses Logic’s EXS24 Sampler and Loopmaster’s free Loopcloud plugin to put together the main groove elements.

Module 3 – Main Groove 2

A final percussion rhythm is added before all tracks are mixed, to ensure a tight and pounding groove.

Module 4 – Making the Bassline

Logic’s Retro Synth is employed to sequence a bassline, which is then processed with various insert and send effects.

Module 5 – Chords Riff Creation

The main melodic motif of the track is conceived with Logic’s Alchemy synth and a number of factory effects plugs.

Module 6 – Adding an Organ

A secondary chords progression is laid down using Logic’s classic B3 Organ, providing a detailed explanation of the instrument’s bars and controls.

Module 7 – Creating Strings

Ian uses Logic’s ES2 Synth & Classic Korg M1 plugins to make accompanying strings, explaining the layout of both synths along the way.

Module 8 – Vocals

Slicing, arranging and making melodies using Loopcloud, slicing edit functions and convert to sampler in Logic.

Module 9 – Final Music Tweaks 1

Additional tracks, edits and mix adjustments.

Module 10 – Final Music Tweaks 2

More sounds are added, regions manipulated and effects reworked.

Module 11 – Arrangement 1

The drums intro is constructed.

Module 12 – Arrangement 2

Continuing the intro, the verse 1 vocals are added.

Module 13 – Arrangement 3

The arrangement is completed up to the second verse.

Module 14 – Arrangement 4

Ian finishes off the arrangement, leaving a good, mixable outro.

Module 15 – Mixdown

Logic’s EQ and match EQ function are utilised, as well as comparison to a reference track using Sample magic A/B.

Module 16 – Final Master

The completed master track is made using Logic’s EQ, Multipressor, Match EQ, Limiter and Sample Magic’s A/B plugin.

  • 5 Hours of Streamed Tutorials from Label Boss
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Pro Mixing Tips and Tricks
  • Included Logic Projects
  • 100MB Bonus Samples
  • Premaster and Final Master Track Audio

95. Neuro Tech DnB Production (Producertech)

by Producertech

Neuro Tech DnB Production (Producertech)

With his technical mastery of production and highly critical ear, Proxima is one of the leading figures in Drum & Bass today. His music rapidly caught the attention of popular labels, leading to his first release on Renegade back in 2008. Since then, he has been a regular artist on the roster of Tempa, Shogun Audio and more recently Icicle’s label Entropy.

In this online course, Proxima takes students on a journey as he sculpts a twisted Neuro Tech DnB track from scratch. Practically every one of the musical parts, including basses, leads, FX and even drums, are created using Live Suite instruments like Analog, Operator, Collision and Wavetable. Students can therefore expect to be treated to a huge wealth of sound design expertise and insight, as each sound is carefully crafted from an initialised state.

In addition to sound design, Proxima shares his invaluable mixing and arrangement tips, showing how to achieve a perfect balance throughout a track. Using audio processing and automation to great effect, he demonstrates how to juxtapose sounds to create melodic and rhythmic interest, whilst delivering a satisfyingly gnarly and devastating groove, guaranteed to have a dancefloor rocking!

As with all Producertech courses, a free sample lesson is supplied, so students can see an example of Proxima’s lesson style before signing up, to make sure the course is right for them. Signing up then allows access to well over 3 hours of streamed lessons, the completed Live project from the tutorials and a 100MB taster of Proxima’s Looptone Drum & Bass Masterclass sample pack, providing students with a huge package for producing massive DnB anthems of their own!

Sample Module – Proxima begins to construct an Arrangement

Proxima Module Descriptions  

Module 1 – Technical Setup

Proxima explains a couple of 3rd party plugins he commonly uses, including Voxengo’s popular shareware plugin Span, which he configures with his preferred settings. 

05.21

Module 2 – Kick 

Kick layers are designed from the ground up, using Operator and various effects, to gain maximum control of each part of the sound.

Lesson 1 – Kick Layer Sound Design 06.12

Lesson 2 – Kick Layer Effects 05.06

Module 3 – Snare 

The main snare is similarly designed from scratch using multiple instances of Operator and a number of Live’s factory effects.

Lesson 1 – Snare Layer Sound Design 04.45

Lesson 2 – Snare Layer Effects 05.17

Module 4 – Hi Hat and Drum Buss Effects 

Additional drums are added to the main break, including a hat loop, which undergoes dynamics processing, whilst the other drums are grouped on individual busses and treated with a number of effects and editing techniques. 

Lesson 1 – Adding Hat and Dynamics Processing 05.29

Lesson 2 – Snare Drum Buss, Position and EQ 02.49

Lesson 3 – Transient Preservation and Level Automation 04.26

Module 5 – Additional Drum Layers and Buss Effects 

Continued work on drums, including adding an extra snare, which is blended into the groove, and setting up limiters on every buss. Proxima also treats kick and snare busses with Live’s pedal effect, before wrapping up with some final comments.

Lesson 1 – Additional Snare Layer 03.23

Lesson 2 – Buss Limiters 03.22

Lesson 3 – Pedal Effect 04.12

Lesson 4 – Final Comments 02.16

Module 6 – Bass 1

Proxima designs the first main Neuro bass sound, using Live 10’s Wavetable synth. Layers are constructed with the 2 oscillators and sub, which are processed using a range of built in effects.

Lesson 1 – Wavetable Intro 03.48

Lesson 2 – Creating the Bass 1 Layers 07.04

Lesson 3 – Mid/Side EQ and Pedal Distortion 07.28

Lesson 4 – Pitch Mod, FM and Sidechain Compression 08.28

Module 7 – Bass 2

Proxima constructs the second main bass part, which is an FM patch made with Operator. After setting up the synth, the preset is processed with EQ and phaser.

Lesson 1 – Making an FM Bass with Operator 08.08

Lesson 2 – Bass Modulation and FX Processing 07.59

Module 8 – Arranging and Mixing Considerations

Proxima starts to arrange and mix the bass sounds with the kick and snare, making adjustments to position and level via automation, and commenting on the overall dynamics.

07.52

Module 9 – Stab 

Live’s Collision is employed to create a more percussive, stab patch, to alternate with the sustained bass sounds. After designing the sound, it is processed with various distortion effects and EQ.

Lesson 1 – Intro to Collision 05.41

Lesson 2 – Designing and Processing the Stab 08.24

Module 10 – Lead

Proxima uses Operator to make a lead sound, which is layered and processed with multiple effects, including Mid/Side EQ, Erosion and Chorus.

Lesson 1 – Designing the Lead 09.28

Lesson 2 – Layering and Additional Processing  11.10

Module 11 – Arranging Part 1

A 4-bar drop section is developed to start the arrangement, duplicating and adding variations to bass sounds, and tweaking different aspects of the mix to improve the sound.

Lesson 1 – Creating a 4-bar Drop 09.36

Lesson 2 – Tweaking the Stab 06.44

Module 12 – Noise

Proxima creates a noise patch to add upper textures to the mix. The sound is made with Analog and then processed with effects to shape the sound and add extra depth.

07.23

Module 13 – Risers and FX

2 Risers are added to the arrangement, both made with Wavetable. One is a shorter 1/2 bar filler, to add extra textures to the break, and the second a longer, 2-bar riser, to help build tension at the end of the section. Finally, a crash type FX sound is added to the start of the drop.

Lesson 1 – Short Riser 07.03

Lesson 2 – Long Riser 04.12

Lesson 3 – Impact FX 03.49

Module 14 – Arranging Part 2

An intro section is explained and developed, before some adjustments are made to different parts in the mix, ironing out inconsistencies in dynamics. 

Lesson 1 – Intro 06.05

Lesson 2 – Mix Tweaks 07.12

Module 15 – Master Bus Tweaks

Proxima ends the course with some comments on the master buss frequencies and level, refining the settings on the Limiter and EQ.

09.14 

  • 3.5 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Pro DnB Tips & Tricks
  • Included Live Projects
  • 100MB Bonus Samples

96. Beginner’s Guide to Synthesis (Producertech)

by Producertech

Beginner’s Guide to Synthesis (Producertech)

With the huge range of synthesisers available today, comprising both DAW factory instruments and 3rd party synth plugins, a knowledge of how to use them is an essential part of modern production. This course aims to give you all of the fundamental skills and confidence to tackle sound design with any synthesiser with ease, to enable easier patch editing and creation of your own presets from scratch.

The tutorials work through all of the main sections of a synth, including oscillators, filters, envelopes, LFOs, arpeggiators and more, explaining the function and control set of each one. To make the course as universal as possible, a wide range of synths are featured in the tutorials, with many of the most popular synth plugins and DAW built-in instruments shown.

The tutorials are punctuated with white board demonstrations, to help convey the main synthesising principles, combined with numerous examples of patch creation every step of the way. Students will learn how much can be done with relatively little on a synth, whilst also absorbing a wealth of techniques that will provide a solid foundation for designing many different types of sound. Although the course is primarily aimed at beginners, due to the technical nature of sound design, the level is mostly intermediate with an occasional foray into more advanced territory in one or two places!

Signing up to the course provides immediate access to 3 hours of streamed tutorials, as well as an included assessment, to provide some interactive feedback on students’ synthesising knowledge. As with all Producertech courses, free sample module(s) are available to enable viewing of excerpts before signing up, for an example of the course style and content, which will have you mastering synthesis in no time!

Sample Module – Making a sweeping pad

Module Descriptions  

Module 1 – Introduction

Rob introduces the course, with an overview of the basics of synthesis, explaining the structure and main sections on a synth, with audio examples along the way. Then, he provides a demonstration of how oscillators can be layered to create different sounds.

Lesson 1 – What is synthesis?        04.10

Lesson 2 – Layering Oscillators        04.09

Module 2 – Waveforms Demo

A guide to the main types of waveform available in most oscillators, how they sound and what they are normally used for.

04.20

Module 3 – Oscillators

A thorough look at the foundations of the synthesiser, the sound-generating oscillators, beginning by working through the basic controls and then exploring additional features that are commonly found.

Lesson 1 – Oscillator Controls I – Waveform and Tuning            05.11

Lesson 2 – Oscillator Controls II – Blending, Sync and Unison       09.00

Module 4 – Designing with Oscillators I

2 examples of patch creation using only the oscillators, one that shows how to create intervals and chords and another showing how to make a detuned patch.

Lesson 1 – Creating Chord and Interval Patches       04.30

Lesson 2 – Creating Detuned Patches     05.03

Module 5 – Designing with Oscillators II

2 further examples of patch design using just the oscillators with increasing complexity, layering multiple waveforms together and combining many of the techniques introduced so far on the course.

Lesson 1 – Simple Layered Patch               04.18

Lesson 2 – Layered Bass with Unison      05.51

Module 6 – Filters

A guide to filtering on a synth, explaining the most important considerations and unique aspects of filtering presets.

Lesson 1 – Filters Overview                        03.35

Lesson 2 – Serial and Parallel Filtering       03.00

Lesson 3 – Filter Routing & Keytrack          06.54

Lesson 4 – Filter Blend                                 03.58

Module 7 – Envelopes

An introduction to a fundamental part of synthesis, the ADSR envelope, beginning by looking at the amplitude and then filter envelope.

Lesson 1 – Amplitude Envelope            07.32

Lesson 2 – Filter Envelope                 05.20

Module 8 – Classic Envelope Patch Design

Two examples of using filter enveloping to create classic synth presets.

Lesson 1 – Simple Pluck                    02.39

Lesson 2 – Old School Mwarp Bass    03.43

Lesson 3 – Emerging Pad                04.56

Mod 9 Quick Simple Synth Focus – Maschine’s Bass Synth

A look at a cutdown synth, to emphasise the most important controls seen so far on the course, and show how much can be done with a relatively limited control set.

03.18

Module 10 – LFO Modulation

How LFOs work on a synth, beginning with an overview and then walking through the creation of a popular LFO-modulated synth preset, the wub wub bass, before showing how to modulate pulse width and the sound it creates.

Lesson 1 – LFO Modulation Explained               08.21                                    

Lesson 2 – Wub Wub Bass                           05.28

Lesson 3 – Pulse Width Modulation               02.52

Module 11 – Pitch Modulation

A guide to modulating the pitch of synth presets, including both envelope and LFO modulation. The last 2 lessons then show how to design 2 classic pitch-modulated sounds, a sub bass drop FX and kick drum patch.

Lesson 1 – Pitch Envelope                 06.09

Lesson 2 – LFO Pitch Modulation         04.00

Lesson 3 – Sub Bass Drop Patch        02.49

Lesson 4 – Kick Drum                     01.52

Module 12 – Sequencers & Arpeggiators

A demonstration of additional modulators and sequencers found on synths, including complex curve modulators, step sequencers and arpeggiators.

Lesson 1 – Sequencers                     06.12

Lesson 2 – Arpeggiator                     04.43

     Module 13 – Effects

Some general tips for using effects to process synth presets.

07.41

Module 14 – Common Synth Settings

Some brief tutorials explaining fundamental synth settings, for creating performance effects and patch characteristics.

Lesson 1 – Monophonic/Polyphonic         01.56   

Lesson 2 – Portamento/Glide                  01.13

Lesson 3 – Legato                                 02.33

Lesson 4 – Velocity                              03.05

Lesson 5 – Key-tracking                           01.20

Lesson 6 – Pitchbend                               01.26

Lesson 7 – Aftertouch                           01.29

  • 3 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Synthesis Fundamentals
  • Included Assessment

97. Beginner’s Guide to Studio One (Producertech)

by Producertech

Beginner's Guide to Studio One (Producertech)

PreSonus Studio One is among the more recent Digital Audio Workstations yet one of the most popular, due to its streamlined workflow, powerful set of factory devices and user friendly music creation tools. On this beginners complete guide, you’ll be taken through all of the main areas of producing with Studio One, to help develop solid foundations for using the software to create quality music of your own.

Leading the tutorials is certified PreSonus Studio One professional, audio engineer, synthesist and sound design teacher, Adam Pietruszko. Teaching everything from scratch, Adam starts with configuration and setup, continuing through using on-board loops, effects and instruments, all the way to mixing and exporting songs.

As well as the main software features, a variety of audio engineering concepts, mixing and processing techniques are all demonstrated, so intermediate users will also benefit from the course. Furthermore, sound design tutorials covering synthesis and sampling basics will help you to create your own sounds, beats and loops. Throughout the course, detailed diagrams will aid in the understanding of concepts like compression, gating, signal routing, as well as the inner workings of synths.

In addition to the 8 hours of streamed tutorials, students also have access to a download pack containing all the songs and projects created within the course, so you can play around with the material presented. Plus, there’s an eclectic 600MB collection of bonus samples from Loopmasters, providing you with a fresh load of hits and loops to invigorate your music. Sign up to get access to this wealth of materials and take your Studio One production knowledge to a whole new level!

Although the majority of the course was made with Studio One 3, the course is fully compatible with Studio One 4, including comparison tutorials and lessons focussing on the new instruments and editing features. Studio One Professional edition is recommended to make the most from the course.

Sample Module – Recording Guitar with Studio One

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – SO3 Structure Overview

This module describes the basic structure and configuration of Studio One. We’ll be going through setting up your audio and MIDI interfaces, creating a new song, and accessing different sections. It also describes navigating the arrangement view, adding on-board loops, instruments and effects to the song, as well as configuring various track types and their parameters through the Inspector.

Lessons

Studio One 3 vs 4 – Using the course

Start Screen and Setup

Creating a New Song

Arrangement View

Track Types

Browser

Track Parameters and Inspector

Module 2 – Working with Audio

You’ll learn how to record external audio sources in various modes (take recording, punch in), use the guitar tuner, metronome. The section will also describe audio editing tools and Studio One’s mixer basics.

Lessons

Recording Audio

Tools and Audio Editing

Mixer

Module 3 – Using effects

In this section we’ll be looking at a plethora of effects available in Studio One 3. We’ll go through all the effect types and the principles of their use. Basics of EQ, compression, gating and adding reverbs and delays will be covered.

Lessons

Effects Overview

EQ

Gating

Compression

Channel Strips

Modulation and Distortion

Delay

Reverb

FX Sends

Module 4 – Automation

We’ll be learning to make the parameters of tracks and effects change in real time as the song plays, using automation curves.

Lessons

Automating Volume and Pan

Automating Effect Parameters

Module 5 – Mixing

This module presents the principles of mixing your song. We’ll mix the song from scratch using EQ, compression and effects, we’ll create a space using reverb and delay, mix the levels and perform master bus processing, as well as export the arrangement as a finished audio file.

Lessons

Mixing principles

Cleaning and Enhancing with EQ

Mix Dynamics

Creating Space

Mixing the Levels

Master Bus Processing

Exporting the Mix

Module 6 – Instruments and MIDI

We’ll start working with on-board synths and samplers of Studio One 3. This section covers recording and editing MIDI, quantization, programming drums and melodic parts, as well as using MIDI Note FX.

Lessons

Instruments introduction – Presence sampler

Recording and Editing MIDI

Quantization and Step Recording

Programming Drums

Pattern Editing [STUDIO ONE 4]

Note FX

Module 7 – Synthesis

This section will present basic synthesis techniques using the Mai Tai synthesizer, so you can program your own sounds from scratch. A variety of timbres will be programmed, utilising different synth concepts.

Lessons

Synthesis introduction. Mai Tai – Bass

Synthesis – Chord Stabs

Synthesis – Pluck

Synthesis – Gated Pad

Synthesis – Sine Bell Arp

Synthesis – Percs

Synthesis – Lead

Synthesis – Organ

Module 8 – Producing the Track

We’ll be putting together a track by arranging the drums, layering synth and sampled instrumental parts, as well as mixing the arrangement.

Lessons

MODULE 9 – Sampling

In this module we’ll learn about using the Impact drum sampler to create beats. You’ll learn to import your own hits, as well as sample them from audio loops. Beatslicing techniques will also be presented, as well as melodic sampling with Sample One.

Lessons

MODULE 10 – Creating a Track with Samples and Synths

We’ll put together a song using sampling techniques, as well as creating bass and leads using the Mojito synthesizer. You’ll also learn how to sample and pitch vocals. Methods of making your song sound lo-fi and vintage will be shown.

  • 8 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Software + Production Skills
  • Included Projects
  • Diagrams and Notes
  • 600MB Bonus Samples

98. Catching Flies Pro Tips – Creating ‘Mama’s Wisdom’ (Producertech)

by Producertech

Catching Flies Pro Tips - Creating ‘Mama’s Wisdom’ (Producertech)

Catching Flies has been producing professionally for the last 6 years, leading to radio support from DJs like Giles Peterson and Annie Mac, and tours with artists including Bonobo and Nightmares on Wax. On this course, he walks through his track ‘Mama’s Wisdom’, which featured in Radio One’s Essential Mix, providing the Producertech community with an exclusive look at his compositional style.

Working through all the individual parts, he shows how he meticulously constructs beats, basslines and interwoven melodies, providing insight into his production method and approach to making music. Signing up to the course gets you immediate access to the streamed tutorials as well as a bonus selection of samples from his Loopmasters sample pack.

Before signing up, check out the sample module and listen to the track from the course, embedded below:

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Drums Part 1

In this first lesson, Catching Flies shows how the main drums are laid out, comprising of the kick and numerous snares and claps.

Module 2 – Hats and Percussion

A look at the additional percussion parts, including hats, recorded foley and loops, showing their processing and automation.

Module 3 – More Percussion and Buss Processing

An explanation of extra drum loops, added later in the arrangement, including some tips for adding energy and excitement to the mix.

Module 4 – Main Bass and Synths 

Catching Flies shows how the main bassline and most dominant synths and pads are created.

Module 5 – Synth FX Creation  

A quick tip for creating a synth FX build.

Module 6 – Rhodes

A demonstration of the lower level organ parts, showing how they were conceived and processed.

Module 7 – Drones and Synth Fill

More techniques for filling out and adding interest to a mix.

Module 8 – Kalimba Melody and Piano Sample

A guide to the main melodic percussion and leads throughout the arrangement.

Module 9 – Vocals

A few of Catching Flies techniques for creating vocal textures in a track.

Module 10 – Guitars

A look at the last main melodic element, showing how it is developed through layering and automation.

  • Catching Flies Production Tips
  • 70 Mins of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • 200MB of Bonus Samples

99. Creative Sampling Techniques (Producertech)

by Producertech

Creative Sampling Techniques (Producertech)

Sampling is perhaps the most popular means of creating musical parts in modern production, inherent in a vast number of applications, from drum construction, to leads, to FX. This course covers all of the core concepts of sampling, using a range of DAW factory and 3rd party plugin instruments, providing students with a fundamental understanding of how to confidently work with whatever samplers they own.

Alongside lessons on many of the standard sampler parameters and behavioural aspects, including root note and transposition, start and end controls and looping, and the main types of envelope, there are numerous examples of how to apply techniques in the creation of unique and natural-sounding parts. Examples include pitch-shifted and modulated percussion, old school and current vocal presets, classic basses and velocity-modulated hats.

Once all areas of single-sampling have been covered, the lessons move on to multi-sampling, initially explaining the main considerations like keyboard mapping and velocity zones. Following this, there is a step-by-step guide to sampling a vintage accordion, teaching students how to convert any instrument in their studio into a multi-sampled patch.

Accompanying the streamed tutorials from the course are both the samples from the lessons and a 100MB bonus pack of varied oneshots and loops, giving students both the physical materials required for sampling and the ability to competently use them!

Sample Module – 6_2 – Old School Looping Bass

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – What is Sampling?
A summary of the main sampling applications in music production, and the ways in which they can benefit your workflow.
04.47

Module 2 – Sample Pitch
An introduction to the way pitching and transposition is handled in a sampler, including an explanation of root note.
Lesson 1 – Root Note & Standard Pitch Behaviour – 02.24  
Lesson 2 – Transposition & Changing the Root Note – 04.01

Module 3 – Sample Length
An introduction to changing sample length, looking at start and end positions, one-shot and amplitude envelope modes, and sample snap.
Lesson 1 – Sample Start and End Positions – 01.27  
Lesson 2 – Oneshot Mode & Amplitude/ADSR Envelope – 04.03
Lesson 3 – Snap Mode – 01.50

Module 4 – Envelopes
A look at the two most common envelopes after amplitude, those being filter and pitch envelopes.
Lesson 1 – Filter Envelope – 03.03
Lesson 2 – Pitch Envelope – 03.19

Module 5 – Drum Sampling Techniques
Some tips for working with drum samples, including more radical ways of modulating percussion and techniques for achieving varied and natural-sounding hats.
Lesson 1 – Re-pitching Percussion – 05.01
Lesson 2 – Velocity Modulation – 08.03

Module 6 – Looping
How looping works in samplers, covering loop length, position, fading and synchronisation, as well as how to make a classic, old school looped bass.
Lesson 1 – Looping Controls – 03.12
Lesson 2 – Old School Looping Bass – 03.34
Lesson 3 – Synchronised Looping – 03.37

Module 7 – Re-pitching and Time-stretching
A look at the way many different popular samplers handle re-pitching and time-stretching of samples, when played with a MIDI keyboard for example.
06.30

Module 8 – Creative Vocal Sampling
Two examples of ways of sampling a vocal to make musical parts, including a 90s rave lead and a deep stab patch.
Lesson 1 – 90s Rave Vocal – 03.34
Lesson 2 – Deep Chord Stab Vocal – 05.00

Module 9 – Multi-sampling
A guide to multi-sampling, showing how to map sample zones to areas of the keyboard and particular velocity ranges.
Lesson 1 – Intro to Multi-sampling – 02.02
Lesson 2 – Keyboard Zones – 02.57
Lesson 3 – Velocity Zones – 07.06

Module 10 – Sampling an Acoustic Instrument
A walkthrough of sampling an accordion, including recording and editing the instrument, then how to import and set up samples to make a realistic emulation.
Lesson 1 – Recording and Editing Samples – 02.52
Lesson 2 – Setting up the Preset – 05.41

Module 11 – Outro
Some final comments from the tutor and advice about where to go next.
00.23

  • 90 mins of streamed lessons
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Samples from the course
  • 100MB of Bonus Samples

100. The Art Of Sampling (Producertech)

by Producertech

The Art Of Sampling (Producertech)

Following on from his beginner’s guide ‘The Art of Sampling’, which covers all of the fundamentals of how to sample, ‘Creative Sampling Techniques’ sees certified trainer Rob Jones applying different sampling methodology in original ways to produce all of the musical parts in a Glitch Electronica track within Ableton Live. Whilst the 2 courses work together well as a sequence, producers with sampling experience already may prefer to dive straight in with this set of tutorials, offering more advanced inspiration and tips to develop their workflow.

Starting proceedings with a kick and snare groove, powerful drums are constructed using various layering techniques, with unusual foley incorporated to add unique textures to an otherwise simplistic break. To this, Rob adds undulating bass, created from a single sample, shaped and modulated in differing ways to show how many possibilities can arise from a basic oneshot. Similarly, a vocal is taken in several directions, with one featuring tempo-locked stuttering whilst another employs more drastic time-stretching envelopes.

Multiple velocity-modulation assignments are then used to create a melodic groove from a complex orchestral sample, whilst other acoustic and synthesised samples are woven together to make pulsing pads and syncopated, arpeggiated leads. After switching to the arrangement area to start laying out parts, Rob introduces two additional samples, showing how to convert one to MIDI for stacking up other samples on top, and how to transform and resample another, for creating more experimental vocal phrases to sing along to the groove.

Included with the 2 hours of streamed tutorials are the Ableton Live project from the course and a bonus 100MB pack of samples, allowing students to more closely inspect the track and try out techniques with a new collection of sounds. Before signing up, check out the free sample module from the course and listen to the arrangement on Producertech’s SoundCloud page.

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Drums
Multi-layering techniques are combined with re-pitching, filtering and dynamics shaping to fuse numerous samples together into a simple alternating kick and snare.
Lesson 1 – Kick – 7.19
Lesson 2 – Snare – 6.34

Module 2 – Foley Tops
Foley loops are employed to create more unique sounding rhythmic tops, the first using Live’s slice to MIDI function and the second Simpler’s Slicing mode.
Lesson 1 – Mids Rack – 2.52
Lesson 2 – Highs Sliced – 5.31

Module 3 – Bass Variations
A bass sample is edited in numerous ways and then arranged to create several evolving basslines to go with the drums groove.
Lesson 1 – Creating Bass Variations – 6.23
Lesson 2 – Editing the Groove – 6.39
Lesson 3 – Laying Down the Bass – 4.42

Module 4 – Vocal Textures
A spoken word vocal sample is distorted using enveloping to create a gnarly vocal phrase that punctuates varies points throughout the groove.
Lesson 1 – Vocal Selection and Looping – 3.43
Lesson 2 – Pitch Envelope and Sequencing – 3.54

Module 5 – Melodic Groove
An evolving orchestral sample is used to form a choppy, harmonically-shifting melodic line, using a combination of velocity modulation and filter enveloping techniques.
Lesson 1 – Velocity Modulation and Filtering – 6.22
Lesson 2 – Tuning and Re-sequencing – 6.38

Module 6 – Background Pads
Two layered, melodic samples form the basis of an undulating pad line, modulated with an LFO, which pulses gently underneath the beats.
09.58

Module 7 – Dotted Lead
Three samples are found using Loopmasters’ Loopcloud, which are then stacked up and sequenced into a dotted phrase, to inject some interesting cross rhythms and consistent harmonies into the groove.
Lesson 1 – Browsing and Sequencing – 5.55
Lesson 2 – Additional Layering & Processing – 4.59

Module 8 – New Harmonies
A 4-bar strings chords progression sample is imported in to add some extra harmonies and take the track in a new direction. It is converted into MIDI and then used to sequence additional sampled layers, to fill out the original sample.
Lesson 1 – Summary of Edits and Sample Intro – 3.23
Lesson 2 – Converting Sample to MIDI – 4.47
Lesson 3 – Adding Extra Layers – 5.31

Module 9 – Glitchy Vocal Chops
A vocal sample is processed with effects, resampled and sliced, then recorded and resequenced to form a unique melodic lead in the arrangement.
Lesson 1 – Resampling and Slicing – 5.27
Lesson 2 – Resequencing – 4.33
Lesson 3 – Filtering – 2.46

  • Nearly 2 hours of streamed lessons
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Ableton Live Project from the course
  • 100MB of Bonus Samples

101. DnB Melodies & FX Masterclass (Producertech)

by Producertech

DnB Melodies & FX Masterclass (Producertech)

The third part in this trilogy of courses from one of DnB’s most talented producers and educators, Reso, sees him giving a masterclass on arranging, with a focus on melodic elements and FX. The 90 mins of streamed tutorials come complete with the Logic project from the course and a bonus 100MB pack of DnB samples from Loopmasters.

The course begins with a wealth of tips for how to build the foundations of an intro and breakdown, using mostly existing drums and bass elements from the drop, edited and processed in various ways. Reso then provides a detailed guide to creating, sequencing and processing different melodic phrases and FX, in order to produce a harmonious progression that develops musical themes whilst adding the necessary suspense and growing tension. As well as learning an abundance of sound design, mixing and arranging techniques, entirely with Logic’s instruments and effects, Reso even imparts his process for setting up the master bus, to create a mix-ready track for playing out.

Signing up to the course provides immediate access to well over 90 minutes of streamed tutorials, whilst the completed Logic project from the course can be downloaded for further scrutiny, or to use as a template for producing your own tracks. Furthermore, there are additional samples with the course, so you have not just the knowledge to create professional arrangements of your own, but a number of instant materials to use to do so. Before signing up, check out the free sample module and listen to the arrangement from the course on Producertech’s SoundCloud page, both embedded below.

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Intro Drums
In this module, Reso takes you through his techniques for structuring an intro and build up, showing how existing and new drums are processed and arranged, to lay down the foundations for the start of the track.
Lesson 1 – Course Intro – 4.03
Lesson 2 – Intro Drums 1 – 13.23
Lesson 3 – Intro Drums 2 – 8.19
Lesson 4 – New Percussion & Booms – 8.50
Lesson 5 – Cymbals – 2.59

Module 2 – Intro Bass
Reso continues to explore the introduction, showing how the main bass grooves from the drops are slowly introduced into the arrangement, to create an exciting build up and intimate at themes that develop fully later on.
Lesson 1 – Intro Bass 1 – 5.23
Lesson 2 – Intro Bass 2 – 3.06
Lesson 3 – Intro Bass 3 – 3.35

Module 3 – Melodic Elements
The first of the melodic modules, where Reso shows how brass elements and an arpeggiated synth are conceived, then used to embellish the drums and bass with musical parts to heighten tension and create a harmonious build up.
Lesson 1 – Brass – 9.08
Lesson 2 – Arp Synth – 7.41
Lesson 3 – Arp Synth Layers – 4.24
Lesson 4 – Chord Stab – 5.37

Module 4 – FX
Reso explains how the FX that punctuate the intro and drop are created, either from samples or synthesisers, processed with a number of effects, to produce impacts, risers and fillers, to add to the drama and fill out the arrangement.
Lesson 1 – Impacts and Risers – 5.54
Lesson 2 – Atmos and Builds – 4.32

Module 5 – FX and Mastering
More techniques for sequencing, editing and processing parts in the arrangement, to create energy, variation and interest, as well as some tips on producing a rough master for playing out.
Lesson 1 – Final Edits – 7.46
Lesson 2 – Mastering – 5.52

Please Note:  All courses are Stream only

  • Pro Tips from DnB Legend Reso
  • 2 hours of Melodies & FX Production Tips
  • Logic Project from the Course
  • 15 Bonus EXS24 Presets
  • 100MB Bonus DnB Samples

102. Beginner’s Guide to Music Theory for Producers (Producertech)

by Producertech

Beginner's Guide to Music Theory for Producers (Producertech)

With so many producers today approaching the art without any classical training in music, composing tracks with more melodic elements can be a challenging task. This course is designed to help students with little to no knowledge of music theory get a solid grasp on the basics, to help with creating quality basslines, leadlines, hooks and riffs in their music.

Going right from the very start, with a guide to the different musical notes, Rob then progresses onto the most popular scales, showing how they can be figured out and played in various ways, depending on your preferred workflow. These skills are then applied into some lengthier lessons that provide basic guidelines for making basslines and melodies.

Subsequent lessons then introduce students to polyphonic accompaniment, with simple intervals and chords, including the major and minor triads in their regular, transposed and inverted forms. All techniques are shown in practice along the way, through the construction of various phrases inside projects, including a guide to building your own chord progression. There’s also a lesson dedicated to arpeggios, showing what they are and how different MIDI tools can be utilised to create engaging rhythmic sequences.

Signing up to the course provides instant access to the streamed lessons, plus MIDI files of all the patterns made throughout the tutorials, in addition to a cheat sheet and even theory quiz, for putting any newly-acquired knowledge to the test. By the end of the course, students will be armed with all the necessary skills to confidently create musical parts in the key of their song, and have a deeper understanding of the theoretical side of music production.

Course Aims:

• be able to locate notes on a piano keyboard
• know what the key of a song is
• understand the meaning of scale, and basic types like major and minor
• be able to create basslines and melodies in key
• know what intervals and chords are, including the triad
• know the basics of rhythm and using it to create more interesting melodic phrases
• know the MIDI tools available to help with playing and composing in key
• know how to compose without any MIDI tools or hardware
• be able to make riffs with single intervals
• be able to make simple chord progressions
• know how to create arp lines, with or without an arpeggiator

Sample Module – Intro to Triads and Chord Inversion – Module 7 Lesson 2

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Intro
Rob gives an introduction to music theory and the course, explaining the various topics that will be covered and goals to achieve once the course is completed. (1.37)

Module 2 – Music Theory Fundamentals
The basic principles of music theory, going from the very beginning with a look at the different notes and simple rhythms, as well as most popular scales like major and (natural) minor.
Lesson 1 – White Note Values (4.09)
Lesson 2 – Black Note Values (5.21)
Lesson 3 – Major Scale (4.47)
Lesson 4 – Minor Scale (2.48)
Lesson 5 – Rhythm (4.19)

Module 3 – Helpful MIDI Tools
A guide to the different kinds of MIDI devices, software and hardware, both DAW-factory and 3rd-party, to help with playing and composing in key. (5.42)

Module 4 – Bassline Basics
A comprehensive lesson that shows how an assortment of basslines can be made, from the simplest, through to more complex, lengthier patterns that move through many different notes in the scale.
Lesson 1 – Fundamental Notes [1, 3 and 5] (7.03)
Lesson 2 – Additional Notes (3.06)
Lesson 3 – Using Hardware & Transposing to Different Keys (2.36)

Module 5 – Making Melodies
Techniques for creating melodies, including an introduction to target and passing notes, suspensions and resolutions, and motifs. (10.52)

Module 6 – Playing in Tricky Scales
A step-by-step guide to playing with a MIDI keyboard in a trickier scale like Eb (starting on a black note), beginning with the hardest method and ending on the easiest. (8.51)

Module 7 – Intervals & Chords
A series of lessons introducing polyphonic accompaniment creation, starting with single intervals and then moving into chords, working through the triad in its regular, inverted and transposed forms.
Lesson 1 – Single Intervals (9.22)
Lesson 2 – Regular & Inverted Triads (4.45)
Lesson 3 – Chord Progressions (5.38)

Module 8 – Arpeggios
A guide to arpeggios, showing the traditional form and then moving into some different techniques for using arpeggiators in the DAW to make engaging, rhythmic melodies. (9.30)

Module 9 – QWERTY Keyboard Quick Tip
A Quick Tip for playing in key with a QWERTY keyboard. (3.34)

Module 10 – Applying Techniques in the DAW
A realtime session, putting all techniques into practice, by making a bassline, leadline, padline and arp sequence, purely with the mouse in the DAW. (16.22)


103. Mainroom Future House Production (Producertech)

by Producertech

Mainroom Future House Production (Producertech)

Combining rolling basslines and heavy beats with vibrant melodies and pounding chords, Future House has become one of the most prominent styles in modern Electronic Dance Music, and the contrasts with light and dark are no better represented than with Ukrainian duo Cyborgs. On this course, they show how samples from their recent Loopmasters pack, along with a smattering of sound design, can be artfully combined into a winning arrangement, with all the necessary components to deliver an engaging breakdown and satisfying drop.

Going right from the very beginning, the initial tutorials show how all of the main elements are constructed, including a slamming drum groove, dynamic bassline and catchy chord progression. These parts are woven together into a main drop section, then embellished with additional melodic lines, brass, vocals and FX. Parts are made in a variety of ways, such as sample manipulation and editing, as well as designing from the ground up with synths.

The second half of the course moves on to the breakdown, which introduces the harmony from the drop, whilst building tension and energy, with supporting rhythms and FX. Melodic parts are again created from scratch, or taken from the drop section and edited to help unify the arrangement and smooth transitions as the song develops. After some final tweaks, the mix and arrangement are completed and some mastering is carried out, largely with Ozone 8.

The track is made in FL Studio and uses an assortment of 3rd party plugins, including Serum and Avenger soft synths, but all techniques can be easily transferred over to whatever DAW you use. Signing up gets you immediate access to the streamed tutorials, plus the FL Studio project and a bonus pack of Future House samples to download and use in your music. Check out the free sample lesson and listen to the track on the Producertech SoundCloud page, before signing up and being on your way to producing quality Future House of your own.

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Drum Creation
Drum and percussion samples are laid out into a basic groove, which is then processed with compression and EQ.
Lesson 1 – Laying down the Groove – 8.26
Lesson 2 – Mixing the Drums – 9.50

Module 2 – Bass Creation
A bassline is created using a Serum preset, which is sequenced into an interesting 4-bar phrase, and then processed with a variety of effects, including compression, EQ, distortion, saturation and ducking. (9.10)

Module 3 – Adding a Chords Hook
A simple lead patch is designed with Serum, then sequenced into a chord progression, processed with a multitude of effects, then layered with additional instruments, with automation to add extra movement and interest.
Lesson 1 – Designing and Sequencing the Chords – 12.10
Lesson 2 – Mixing the Chords – 14.10
Lesson 3 – Adding Extra Layers – 9.03

Module 4 – Adding FX
The Drop is embellished with risers, impacts and high frequency shimmers, which are laid down and then mixed and processed with effects.
Lesson 1 – Adding Samples – 7.46
Lesson 2 – Mixing and Processing the FX – 7.13

Module 5 – Brass
Brass Stabs are added to the arrangement using Kontakt, then various effects processing applied, as well as bouncing and reversing a reverberant stab to create custom FX. (9.44)

Module 6 – Vocal
A vocal loop is chopped up and re-sequenced, processed with effects and then laid out across the arrangement, with automation helping to build tension at the end of the drop. (8.18)

Module 7 – Creating Intro Bass
A Reece patch is made using Serum, then sequenced to form a repeating 4-bar phrase, which forms the basis of the intro. This is then processed with multiple effects, including saturators and multi-band compressors. (9.56)

Module 8 – Saving CPU
To help reduce CPU overload due to large numbers of 3rd-party plugins, several tracks are bounced to audio. (5.26)

Module 9 – Intro Melodies Part 1
A factory Avenger patch and a custom-made Serum patch are combined to form the two main rhythmic leads that develop across the intro. Both parts are mixed and automated. (13.24)

Module 10 – Intro Melodies Part 2
Piano and Strings parts are added using Kontakt, which are sequenced, mixed and automated across the intro. (10.58)

Module 11 – Intro Drums
Drums are added to the intro to form 3 separate sections, with a basic snap, breakbeat groove and classic snare roll.
Lesson 1 – Sequencing the Drums – 9.57
Lesson 2 – Mixing and Processing the Drums – 11.53

Module 12 – Improving Transitions
Each part of the intro is filled out with FX to manage tension levels, with crashes, risers, reverse FX and more. (6.49)

Module 13 – Adding Intro Vocals and Brass
Vocals and Brass from the main drop are incorporated into the intro, sequenced by unique phrases and processed with a number of automated effects. (13.19)

Module 14 – Intro Finishing Touches
A spark of creativity leads to the creation of another LFO-modulated leadline, which is laid down in the breakdown, as well as some final, additional FX. (12.20)

Module 15 – Completion of Arrangement
The entire arrangement is doubled and then many edits made to the first breakdown, to create a greatly simplified and shorter intro to the track. (11.18)

Module 16 – Mastering
A bounce of the mix is mastered, mostly using Ozone 8, as well as a couple of extra limiters, to achieve the fullest sound and an appropriate RMS level. (8.42)

Please Note:  All courses are Stream only

  • 3.5 hours of Pro EDM Production Tips
  • Completed Future House Track
  • FL Studio Project from the Course
  • 100MB Bonus EDM Samples

104. Serum Sound Design Masterclass (Producertech)

by Producertech

Serum Sound Design Masterclass (Producertech)

Serum has firmly established itself as one of the best soft synths on the market today, with powerful wavetable synthesis capabilities and a stylish and intuitive user interface. On this course from Senior Tutor Rob Jones, you’ll be guided through every area of the instrument and shown numerous examples of how to design a wide variety of different patches, from basses and leads to pads and FX.

The tutorials begin by focussing on the unique aspects of each of the main synth sections, manipulating waveforms in the oscillator section, adding sub layers and boosting transients, applying dual-filtering, and giving examples of the numerous ways of modulating sounds. Rob then provides a thorough guide to the FX rack, including lessons on each of the individual effects.

After explaining what wavetable synthesis is and how exactly it’s implemented in Serum, as well as the different ways of creating your own wavetable, there are a series of patch design modules, constructing multiple leads, an acid bass and evolving FM pad. The course then ends with a realtime sound design and arrangement module, in which Serum is used to design all of the main sounds in a Neuro-style break, which is laid out in Ableton Live.

After signing up to the course, students get immediate access to the 4 hours of streamed tutorials, along with the presets made, the Ableton Live project and samples, plus a bonus pack of presets from Loopmasters.r.

  • 4 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Sound Design Tips and Tricks
  • 18 Course Presets
  • Live Project & Samples
  • 20 Bonus Serum Presets

105. Advanced Guide To Music Theory (Producertech)

by Producertech

Advanced Guide To Music Theory (Producertech)

Following on from the success of the Beginner’s Guide to Music Theory for Producers, this Advanced Guide promises to expand your knowledge of music theory to greatly assist in the creation of more musical tracks. Whatever your level of music theory, there are tonnes of useful techniques and workflows for working both with a keyboard and purely in the DAW, all demonstrated in the production of various popular genres like Hip Hop, House, DnB and Trap.

The course begins with a summary of the Beginner’s Course, showing how to create melodic accompaniment and chords to go with a jazzy break, before moving onto the first advanced topic of modulation, meaning moving to a different key, starting off with the relative major and minor. There is also a thorough look at diatonic triad harmonies, covering the ways that triads change when shifted to different positions in the scale, and how this affects the mood of a song. A funky organ phrase is then put together with a House beat, which moves through a series of regular and inverted triads to create a catchy hook.

The next section shows how a track can move to a different key in a breakdown, and how the harmony and so rules for other melodic parts changes when doing so. There is also a focus on the circle of fifths relationship, showing how it connects all 12 chromatic tones, and the many different ways it’s been used to create popular music from the Baroque period right through to classic House!

After exploring a lush bassline, which is used as the basis for a Liquid DnB groove, there are a series of lessons that work through some of the more advanced chord types, including 7ths and 9ths, with both used to construct Hip Hop and Trap grooves, working mostly with the mouse. The course ends with a module on advanced scales, covering modes, pentatonic and chromatic, as well as a workflow for creating your own scale based purely on note selection in the piano roll.

In addition to all the streamed tutorials, signing up to the course provides access to a download pack containing all the projects, MIDI patterns and samples from the course, as well as a bonus assessment, for testing your newly acquired skills.

Sample Module – Creating a i-iv-VI Liquid DnB Groove

Module Descriptions

Module 1 – Basics Recap – Working with a Jazzy Break
Rob works through all of the subjects covered on the Beginner’s course by first analysing the melodic content in a bassline, to figure out the key of the track, and then showing many different examples of monophonic and polyphonic accompaniment to go with it.
Lesson 1 – Finding the Key – 9.59
Lesson 2 – Creating Melodic Accompaniment – 14.23

Module 2 – Related Major and Minor Keys
An intro to related keys, starting with the simplest, the relative major or minor. After explaining what it is, Rob shows how it works in a breakbeat track, demonstrating the changes that a melodic phrase needs to make in order to work with the new harmony. 10.43

Module 3 – Advanced Chords I – Working with Triads
This first chords module is a detailed exploration of the ways in which diatonic triads present themselves in a major and minor scale, providing a wealth of knowledge about which ones to use when creating triad chord progressions.
Lesson 1 – Minor Scale Triads – 8.38
Lesson 2 – Major Scale Triads & Roman Numerals – 8.58
Lesson 3 – Triad Chord Progressions in a Minor Key – 7.32
Lesson 4 – Triads following the Bass – 5.30

Module 4 – More Related Keys
Rob moves on to additional common keys to modulate to when producing, beginning with the dominant. This is shown in a number of examples, with one being the creation of a breakdown in a House track, and the others a range of compositions that utilise a ‘cycle of fifths’ technique.
Lesson 1 – The Dominant – 10.42
Lesson 2 – Circle of Fifths – 12.01

Module 5 – i-iv-VI Progression – Liquid DnB Groove
A guide to creating melodic content around a bassline, playing a i-iv-VI pattern of notes. Basslines and triads are recorded into a project and then edit, with an additional descending melody played in on top. 10.22

Module 6 – Advanced Chords II
This second chords module expands the palette further with richer and more interesting chords like 7th and 9ths, both of which are used to form chord progressions in grooves, with one played in and edited and the other drawn in entirely with the mouse.
Lesson 1 – 7ths/9ths/11ths/13ths – Major 7 Chill Trap Groove – 10.53
Lesson 2 – Minor 9 Hip Hop Groove – 9.53

Module 7 – Advanced Scales
Rob explains the principles that govern some of the most popular additional scales, beginning with a reminder of major and minor, before working through popular modes, chromatic, pentatonic and wholetone scales. He then shows an example workflow for choosing a scale based on note selection in the piano roll, then using that template as a basis for the harmony in a project, from which other melodic parts can be made.
Lesson 1 – Modes
Lesson 2 – Chromatic Scale and Accidentals
Lesson 3 – Scale Selection DAW Workflow

Outro

  • 2.5 hours of streamed tutorials
  • Projects, MIDI Patterns & Samples
  • Diagrams & Course Assessment

106. Melodic Deep Tech House & Techno Part 3 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Melodic Deep Tech House & Techno Part 3 (Producertech)

This tutorial series is an epic journey through the production of a Melodic Deep Tech House/Techno track, covering every aspect of the process along the way, from initial conception to final mixdown (this course is part 3, on mixing down, with creation of sounds and arranging covered in full in parts 1 and 2, respectively). Leaving no stone unturned, the producer Simon Shackleton reveals all of the sound design, audio editing, effects processing, music theory and mixing techniques, so that students receive all the knowledge required to produce professional quality music of their own.

Simon Shackleton has been producing professionally for 25 years, going under aliases such as Lunatic Calm, Zodiac Cartel and Elite Force. His music has received support by DJs across the globe and been featured in films like ‘Charlie’s Angels’ and ‘The Matrix’. Renowned for his meticulous nature, eloquence and ability to produce heavy but musical dancefloor tracks, Simon is the ideal tutor for this course.

In the first part, Simon provides a thorough guide to the creation of every part in the track, from drums, bass and leads, to vocals, pads and FX. An assortment of Loopmasters samples are used for the job, carefully sculpted and layered together, with occasional synths employed for melodic parts. Part 2 then continues the journey, with a detailed look at working the parts into a full-on organic arrangement, which is mixed down in part 3.

THIS COURSE IS PART 3, TAKING A COMPREHENSIVE LOOK AT MIXING DOWN THE FINAL ARRANGEMENT.

Signing up to the course gives immediate 24/7 access to the streamed tutorials, as well as the Live project from the course, whilst users of all music software can benefit from the 130MB pack of bonus audio samples. Before signing up, check out the free sample module and listen to the track from the course on the Producertech SoundCloud page, for examples of the high standard of tutorial and music quality you can expect from the course. Sign up today to jumpstart your production skills and get on the road to creating Melodic Deep Tech House or Techno anthems of your own!

Sample Module – Adding Width to Tambourines with Panning & Track Delay

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Mixdown Discussion
In this first module, Simon talks about the nature of the mixdown, explaining the most important considerations and obstacles a producer faces, including recommendations on software and hardware to rectify them. He then gives his top mixing tips, to assist in clarifying the key aims of the process and help fellow producers achieve the primary objectives.
Lesson 1 – The Mixing Process & Environment – 14.15
Lesson 2 – Mixing Top Tips – 19.25

Module 2 – Kick Drum
Simon begins looking at the all important Kick Drum, focussing on the effects processing initially, to make sure the sound is full bodied and clear, and then bouncing down the stem to help keep CPU usage low. He then moves onto the other kick tracks, which are once again balanced, treated with effects and then flattened to new audio files.
Lesson 1 – Main Kick Warmth & Precision – 21.28
Lesson 2 – Additional Kick and Boom Kick – 19.25

Module 3 – Making the Loops Play Nice!
These lessons address the main loops that combine with the kick to form the groove of the track, showing the techniques used to make them ‘team players’. This includes using EQ, multi band compression and panning, as well as overall balancing of levels.
Lesson 1 – Loop Frequency Adjustment – 15.52
Lesson 2 – Balancing and Stereo Considerations – 7.37

Module 4 – Mixing the Snares and Claps
Simon moves on to the other main drum components, those being the snares and claps, paying close attention to the frequencies and alignment of each, to provide all the missing elements to the driving groove and add subtle variation in each bar.
Lesson 1 – Processing the Snare – 13.38
Lesson 2 – Working on the Claps – 12.23

Module 5 – Tambourines and Rides
By combining artful EQ and track panning with delay, Simon blends together the high frequency rhythms into a coherent, energetic layer that sits comfortably on top of the mix, whilst adding some pleasing stereo information to the track.
Lesson 1 – EQ & Stereo Spread – 17.31

Module 6 – Finding Space for Percussion
A reminder of the way the 2 conga sounds are placed in the track, with a look at the different automation on each, with regard to panning and send effect routing.
Lesson 1 – Conga Treatment – 11.08

Module 7 – Bassloop EQ & Sidechain
The first module looking at one of the toughest jobs of the mixing process; getting the bottom end right! Simon starts by focussing on the syncopated bass loop, showing the various effects used to bring it out in the mix and remove unnecessary elements, then moves on to level handling by means of compression and automation.
Lesson 1 – EQ, Saturation and more – 11.44
Lesson 2 – Level Sidechain and Automation – 7.04

Module 8 – Sub Bass in a Balanced Rhythm Section
A look at the sub bass track, making sure its content has the relevant frequencies and amount of gain, so that it provides the necessary fatness without treading on the toes of the other kick and bass elements and balancing nicely with the drums and percussion.
Lesson 1 – Working on the Sub Bass – 16.09

Module 9 – Pads, Strings and Novachord Lead
Simon moves through the first of the main melodic parts, flattening then forensically analysing the levels and frequencies, making changes to devices and adding automation when required, to ensure all parts are fulfilling their required roles.
Lesson 1 – Pads – 9.22
Lesson 2 – Strings – 8.29
Lesson 3 – Novachord – 6.33

Module 10 – Making the Synth Leads sing
The synth leads are treated with the same precision and care as the previous melodic parts, paying particular attention to compression and EQ, whilst also adding stereo enhancement via effects return channels.
Lesson 1 – Oberheim 1 – 15.31
Lesson 2 – Oberheim 2 – 6.52
Lesson 3 – Bouncing Lead Synth – 16.02

Module 11 – Chords Unity and Placement
The final group of melodic instruments is mixed, firstly looking at the chord stabs, which are balanced, EQ’d and compressed, as well as additional panning automation applied, before moving on to the atmospheric dub chord.
Lesson 1 – Stabs – 13.25
Lesson 2 – Dub Chord – 8.49

Module 12 – Vocals Groove Layering
A detailed lesson on EQ treatment of the vocal parts, ensuring that they contribute exactly the right pitches into the mix to help them sing and sit as a perfect additional groove layer for the rhythms.
Lesson 1 – EQing the Vocals – 14.13

Module 13 – Effects Sweeps – A family affair
The various noise sweeps and transitional elements are mixed, balancing, EQing, compressing and automating them with the same due diligence.
Lesson 1 – Working on FX – 12.26

Module 14 – Ambient Effects – Time & Place
Simon carefully balances the vinyl crackle and ambient vocals to help them sit correctly in the mix and stereo field, automating levels so that they tell a story and add the necessary real world components to the track.
Lesson 1 – Mixing the Ambient FX – 16.09

Module 15 – Bus Mixing – New Perspectives
How to create Mix Buses for all the main sound groups, to allow a smaller group of individual faders purely for adjusting of levels.
Lesson 1 – Mix Bus Creation – 15.16

Module 16 – Effects Returns – Attention to Detail
As with all other channels, the effects returns require the same scrupulous attention to detail, making sure no unnecessary frequencies or sonic artefacts are being added to the mix.
Lesson 1 – Mixing the Effects Returns – 29.06

Module 17 – Final Balancing – References and Blind Mixing
Reference tracks are added to the project to serve as comparisons and help calibrate the ear, then the bus mix channels are used to rebalance the master, making absolutely sure the levels of each of the main components is sitting perfectly in the mix.
Lesson 1 – Adding Reference Tracks – 10.13
Lesson 2 – Rebalancing the Master – 13.08

Module 18 – Final Tweaks 1
The last minor changes are made to the parts in the track, working first through the groove elements, with small automation adjustments here and there, as well as additional EQ, and then the master channel, to help maintain a good level balance between breakdowns and drops.
Lesson 1 – Rhythms & Master Automation & EQ – 13.10
Lesson 2 – Melodies Automation – 11.07

Module 19 – Final Tweaks 2
Simon completes the mix by making some final adjustments to level automation, making sure the various leads and melodic accompaniment is all playing nicely, then exporting the final mix as an audio file.
Lesson 1 – More Automation Tweaks – 11.06
Lesson 2 – Final Play-throughs & Export – 8.59

  • 7 hours of streamed lessons
  • Tips from World Class DJ Producer
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Ableton Live Projects from the course
  • 150MB of Bonus Samples

107. The Art Of Filtering (Producertech)

by Producertech

The Art Of Filtering (Producertech)

Filters are a hugely important tool in the producer’s collection, whether mixing, sound designing or adding interest and variation in an arrangement. On this course from Producertech Senior Tutor Rob Jones, you’ll learn all of the basics, as well as a whole host of techniques for applying both static and dynamic filtering to all sorts of sounds in your mix.

The course begins with an overview of the different ways filters are used, followed by a guide to the main filter types and standard controls. Following this is a demonstration of numerous static filtering applied to all of the sounds in the course project, a laid-back Downtempo groove. Once the basics are covered, Rob progresses things into more advanced territory, introducing different types of filter modulation, with envelopes and LFOs. Again, after going through the theory, he switches back to the course project, to show how different dynamic, modulated filtering can be applied to various sounds, explaining the reasons for doing it in the process.

Other techniques covered include controlling filters with external signals using sidechaining, modulating 3rd party plugins with Max 4 Live tools, working with filter pattern software like Cableguys Shaperbox, and lots more. Examples are once again shown both in the course project, as well as a dedicated module on bass processing.

Enrolling on the course gets you immediate access to the streamed tutorials, plus all the downloadable materials, with accompanying written notes, software projects and samples. Additionally, there’s a course assessment, featuring both written questions and listening exercises, to ensure that the information is sinking in and the ears are being technically trained. Sign up now, for access to this wealth of content and to start learning all about filtering today! Or, become a Producertech member to gain access to every course on the site for just a small monthly fee.

Sample Module – Bass Filtering Techniques Part 1

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Filtering Basics
In this first module, Rob introduces the concept of filtering, by giving a quick overview and demonstration of the wide range of applications. He then takes a more detailed look at filter frequency, resonance and slope, and provides an explanation of the main types of filter, including low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and notch.
Lesson 1 – What are filters and how are they used? 3.46
Lesson 2 – Standard Filter Controls – 8.35
Lesson 3 – Filter Types – 6.12

Module 2 – Basic Filtering Practice
Rob applies filtering to all the individual sounds in the course project, to show the huge part filters play in shaping the frequencies of each instrument and so cleaning up the mix.
Lesson 1 – Project Intro – 3.00
Lesson 2 – Kick Drum Filtering – 8.29
Lesson 3 – Snare and Hat Filtering – 6.37
Lesson 4 – Snare and Hat Filtering – 8.23
Lesson 5 – Guitar, Organ, Marimba and Piano Filtering – 13.02
Lesson 6 – Pluck Arp and Bass Filtering – 4.43

Module 3 – Filter Modulation
A demonstration of how to modulate filters, using the two main modulator types, envelope and LFO. These techniques are shown with a sustained chords phrase, which is transformed into a classic lead and rhythmic pad sequence.
10.02

Module 4 – Applied Filtering Modulation Techniques
Rob continues to develop the Downtempo track, by applying a series of dynamic, modulated filtering techniques to the sounds within it, helping to tighten and shape sounds, as well as add extra movement and width.
Lesson 1 – Bass Envelope Modulation – 4.22
Lesson 2 – Percussion and Snare Envelope Mod – 7.39
Lesson 3 – Pluck Arp LFO Mod Stereo Notch Filter – 15.26

Module 5 – Filter Sidechain/External Triggering
A guide to using sidechaining to create filter modulation using external signals, such as drum loops, custom made patterns and even MIDI clips within the DAW. Rob also provides a demonstration of how to use filter sidechaining to create a ducking effect similar to a sidechained compressor.
Lesson 1 – Using External Signals to Trigger a Vocal Filter – 10.58
Lesson 2 – Creating ‘Ducking’ with a Filter – 3.23

Module 6 – Filter Sidechain and Automation Techniques
The final session with the Downtempo project sees Rob using sidechaining and automation to control filter parameters in the arrangement, creating rhythmic patterns and allowing parts to flow and play well with one another.
Lesson 1 – Sidechain Modulation on the Pluck Arp – 5.00
Lesson 2 – Downwards Sidechain Modulation on Organ and Guitar – 09.50
Lesson 3 – Organ and Pluck Arp Automation – 10.05

Module 7 – Bass Processing
A set of lessons dedicated to bass processing, showing 4 different techniques for creating rhythmic filter patterns in the DAW, working with a distorted bass sample accompanied by a Glitch Hop Beat.
Lesson 1 – Drawing Automation – 04.22
Lesson 2 – Recording Automation – 03.46
Lesson 3 – Applying LFO to 3rd Party Plugs – 03.20
Lesson 4 – Using Cableguys ShaperBox – 4.34

Module 8 – Assessment
A few questions to test your knowledge, as well as listening exercises to help with technical ear training.
00.23

Module 9 – Outro
Some final comments from the tutor and advice about where to go next.
00.23

  • 3 hours of streamed tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Live Projects
  • Audio Stems & Samples
  • Written Notes
  • Filtering Quiz

108. Compression Fundamentals (Producertech)

by Producertech

Compression Fundamentals (Producertech)

Compression is one of the most essential aspects of producing music, ensuring tracks have consistent dynamics and loudness levels that meet professional standards. On this comprehensive course from Senior Tutor Rob Jones, you’ll learn the main principles behind the technique, plus a tonne of different methods for how to apply it.

The course begins with a demonstration of how compression affects an audio signal, before moving into a series of lessons covering each of the main parameters. Once the theory is covered, Rob moves into his first realtime Compression Session, starting work on the course project by showing how to process the snare and leads.

The second half of the course then focuses on more advanced techniques, including sidechain options, peak and RMS detection, parallel processing and multi-band compression. Again, after the theory is explained, Rob develops each technique further in another realtime Compression Session.

Signing up to the course provides instant access to 3 hours of streamed tutorials, as well as the projects and samples featured in them, plus written notes to refer to and assist in the learning process. There is even an included assessment, complete with listening exercises to help with technical ear training.

Check out the free sample module for an example of the lesson content before signing up to the course, which will have you mastering compression and fattening up your mixes in no time!

Sample Module – Sidechain Compression/Ducking Demonstration

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – What is Compression?
Rob starts the course with a brief explanation of what compression is used for, followed by a more comprehensive demonstration of what exactly compression does to an audio signal.
Lesson 1 – Introduction – 1.31
Lesson 2 – Compression Demonstration – 6.41

Module 2 – Main Compressor Controls
A guide to the main controls on a compressor, which determine how much compression occurs, including the level adjustment options and speed of the effect.
Lesson 1 – Threshold and Ratio – 6.39
Lesson 2 – Attack and Release – 4.49
Lesson 3 – Makeup (Gain) – 5.34

Module 3 – Compression Session Part 1
In this first realtime session module, Rob works his way through various sounds in a project, to show how compression can be used to even out dynamics and fatten up sounds.
Lesson 1 – Snare Compression – 15.23
Lesson 2 – Lead 1 Compression – 10.00
Lesson 3 – Lead 2 Compression – 11.27
Lesson 4 – Leads Summary – 9.08

Module 4 – Compressor Sidechain
Rob explains the various options you often find for the compressor sidechain, allowing you to filter the signal triggering the compressor, or change it to a different track entirely.
Lesson 1 – Sidechain EQ – 8.56
Lesson 2 – External Signal Triggering/Ducking – 4.48

Module 5 – Additional Compressor Options
A guide to the range of additional controls found on compressors, including Dry/Wet, Knee, Peak & RMS Detection and Vintage modes.
Lesson 1 – Parallel Compression – 7.03
Lesson 2 – Knee, Peak & RMS and Vintage Modes – 8.39

Module 6 – Multiband Compression
A module looking at the benefits of multi-band compression, including instructions for how to set it up without a multi-band compressor, before showing the same process within iZotope’s Neutron.
9.38

Module 7 – Compression Session Part 2
In this second realtime session module, Rob continues working through the course project, showing some tips for compressing Kick Drums and all drums together on the group track, before moving into sidechaining the bass and leads. He then shows some alternative techniques for fattening up the snare and 2 different approaches for compressing the whole mix.
Lesson 1 – Kick Drum Compression – 17.51
Lesson 2 – Drums Buss Compression – 11.06
Lesson 3 – Sidechain Compression/Ducking – 9.08
Lesson 4 – Alternatives to Compression – 5.40
Lesson 5 – Master Channel Compression – 16.13

Outro
A brief farewell from Rob, with some recommendations for further study and assessment.
0.31

  • 3 hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Live & Logic Projects
  • Written Notes
  • Audio Samples
  • Course Assessment

109. Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques 2 (Producertech)

by Producertech

Advanced Bass Music Production Techniques 2 (Producertech)

With its gigantic basslines and seriously heavy beats, Bass Music is regarded as amongst the most challenging genres to produce, requiring a substantial amount of knowledge and technical precision. Thankfully, one of the top producers in the field, Seppa, has returned to the Producertech community to deliver his second set of tutorials on Advanced Bass Music Techniques, sharing his accumulated experience from the last 12 years of producing professionally, so help is very much at hand!

The course begins with a series of sound design tutorials, showing how Seppa creates his varied palette of melodic and textured sounds from which the bulk of his tracks are constructed. These include 2 serious bass patches, both built from scratch with Serum and then processed with a wide range of 3rd-party and factory DAW plugins, as well as a custom delayed and pitched FX composition, which uses a default synth patch used as the basis. The final sound design session then shows how to transform an old vinyl sample into digital gold!

In the next section, Seppa moves onto beats, beginning by designing the main kick and snare, then combining them with an assortment of percussion samples, which are sequenced into a trio of solid breaks. The beats are mixed and laid out in the arrangement, forming the backbone of the first main drop section.

The last part of the course sees Seppa guiding through a lengthy series of arrangement tutorials, starting by building a fat drop and 2 accompanying variations. Textures are applied from the sound palette, as extra layers for the drums and bass, whilst melodies are added to the last passage, to form the beginnings of the first breakdown. This is then developed into a second drop, which extends the ideas from the first half, and the arrangement is then completed and any mixing issues and improvements addressed.

Signing up to the course gives you immediate access to the streamed tutorials, as well as the Ableton Live project created on the course and a 100MB bonus pack of Bass Music samples from Loopmasters. Check out the sample module before signing up and listen to the arrangement from the course, both embedded on the course page, so you can see and hear for yourself the quality of Seppa’s music and broad depth of knowledge imparted in his tutorials.

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Designing a Complex Bass with Serum
This first module is loaded with insane techniques for making rude basses, as Seppa creates a custom bass patch in Serum and then processes it with a huge amount of modulated effects, culminating in the recording of a performance that lays down the first major addition to his sound palette.
Lesson 1 – Setting up the Oscillators in Serum – 13.33
Lesson 2 – Effects Processing Part 1 – 16.04
Lesson 3 – Effects Processing Part 2 – 15.17
Lesson 4 – Final Filtering & Recording – 16.07

Module 2 – Designing a Simpler Bass with Serum
The next bass sound, also made with Serum, is a more static one, developed using similar techniques only with the intention of creating something with a more consistent low end and less dramatic shifts in character and tone.
Lesson 1 – Setting up Serum and Adding Saturation & EQ – 14.30
Lesson 2 – Adding Filtering & Depth then Recording – 16.33

Module 3 – Additional Textures & Melodies
In this module, Seppa shares invaluable secrets for making captivating melodies and trippy FX, this time by transforming a default synth patch and old vinyl sample, again processed with a tonne of effects and laid down into further recordings for the sound palette.
Lesson 1 – Creating Textures with Delays – 13.29
Lesson 2 – Turning Vinyl Samples into Digital Gold! – 18.31

Module 4 – Kick Design
The Kick is created by layering synth tones with samples, mixed and processed together to form a punchy sound.
9.30

Module 5 – Snare Design
Seppa uses similar techniques to his Kick design, combining a synthesised fundamental with a drum sample and then processing with effects to create his hard-hitting snare.
12.08

Module 6 – Creating Beats
Combining his kick and snare with a smattering of percussion samples, Seppa works the sounds into a couple of serious drum breaks.
Lesson 1 – 4-bar Break 1 – 19.37
Lesson 2 – 4-bar Break 2 – 14.00
Lesson 3 – Mixing the Beats – 7.28

Module 7 – Track Arranging Part 1
Working the beats together with the sound palette, Seppa edits clips in the arrangement to come up with different sections for the first main Drop, embellishing with additional layers and automation and refining the mix as he goes.
Lesson 1 – 8-bar Drop 1 – 19.54
Lesson 2 – 8-bar Variation – 11.36
Lesson 3 – Finding a New Groove – 18.32
Lesson 4 – Developing the Groove – 18.47

Module 8 – Track Arranging Part 2
The arrangement is continued with the creation of contrasting breakdown and intro sections, and then developed further with a second pounding Drop!
Lesson 1 – Breakdown and Intro – 18.22
Lesson 2 – Drop 2 Part 1 – 15.42
Lesson 3 – Drop 2 Part 2 – 14.46

Module 9 – Track Arranging Part 3
Seppa reviews the completed arrangement, adding some final adjustments and improvements to the mix.
Lesson 1 – Final Mix Tweaks 1 – 21.01
Lesson 2 – Final Mix Tweaks 2 – 14.05

  • 6 hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Full Track Creation
  • Ableton Live Project
  • 100MB of Bonus Samples

110. Raw Techno Production Techniques (Producertech)

by Producertech

Raw Techno Production Techniques (Producertech)

Techno legend Paul Maddox, one half of Spektre and resident course creator, returns to deliver a new set of tutorials on producing raw Techno in Ableton Live. With a wealth of production and teaching experience combined with an extensive knowledge of the software, these tutorials are a must-have for anyone wanting to learn the essentials for making heavy Techno tracks of their own.

On the course, Paul shows the fundamentals for building up a techno track, through 2 separate groove examples, with increasing intensity. The first groove has a deeper and dubbier vibe, with a hypnotic, tribal bass and filtered piano stab, whilst the second is an even more full-on, super high energy track with a wonky synth lead line driving the groove.

All the parts are made using factory samples from Live’s library, mostly 707s, with an additional foley recording from Paul’s collection, whilst melodic parts are designed from the ground up using Sampler and Wavetable. As well as learning how to design and sequence parts, you’ll acquire a wealth of mixing knowledge and some different approaches to creating an arrangement, with both manual layout and timeline recording included.

Signing up to the course gives you immediate access to over 2 hours of streamed tutorials, along with the projects made and a 100MB bonus pack of Techno samples from Loopmasters. Check out the free sample lesson before signing up, for an example of Paul’s clear teaching style and technique-laden video content, which will enrich your production skillset and have you making Techno bangers in no time!

Sample Module – Using MIDI FX to make Techno Leads

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Groove 1
In this first module, Paul constructs a deep and dubby groove, complete with tribal bass, foley percussion and a custom-made noisy piano stab, all of which are sequenced into a break and then manually arranged and automated to create a basic song layout.
Lesson 1 – Kick & Bass – 9.12
Lesson 2 – Hats – 13.16
Lesson 3 – Drum Buss and Rides – 7.16
Lesson 4 – Piano Stab – 7.46
Lesson 5 – Piano & Master Processing – 9.39
Lesson 6 – Manual Arrangement – 13.32

Module 2 – Groove 2
This heavier and more intense groove is made in strict 4/4, along with an alternative syncopated version, combining 707 drums and samples from Live’s factory library with a synth line generated from the ground up with Wavetable and an assortment of MIDI effects. After processing the lead and master channel, Paul sets up an instrument rack complete with macro assignments, so the groove can be performed and recorded into the timeline.
Lesson 1 – Kick – 11.44
Lesson 2 – Bass – 8.07
Lesson 3 – Hats and Percussion – 12.50
Lesson 4 – Creating the Lead – 12.32
Lesson 5 – Finding the Hook – 6.11
Lesson 6 – Lead Processing – 8.19
Lesson 7 – Lead Rack Setup & Mapping – 10.08
Lesson 8 – Recorded Arrangement – 11.41

  • Over 2 Hours of Streamed Tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Ableton Live Tips & Tricks
  • Included Software Projects
  • 100MB Bonus Techno Samples

111. Music Production Essentials Collection (Producertech)

by Producertech

Music Production Essentials Collection (Producertech)

This collection of award-winning courses from Producertech Senior Tutor Rob Jones provides expert tuition on the most essential subjects a producer needs to master. Covering mixing, music theory and sound design, these Beginners Guides are the perfect introduction to the core techniques that’ll take your music to the next level.

Included in the bundle are the following 6 Courses:

EQ Fundamentals

Learn to competently apply EQ in your music, understanding fully what frequencies make up a sound and how to shape them to improve your mix.

Compression Fundamentals

Get to grips with the basics of compression, as well as learning about sidechain options, peak and RMS detection, parallel processing, multi-band compression, and lots more!

The Art of Filtering

From standard static filtering, right through to dynamic, modulated frequency shaping, this course will cement your understanding of this crucial audio effect.

Beginner’s Guide to Synthesis

Learn the basics of sound designing with a range of popular synths, to enable easier patch editing and creation of your own presets from scratch.

The Art of Sampling

The core concepts of sampling, getting you fully up to speed with the common controls and how to use them to design drums, leads, basses and more.

Beginner’s Guide to Music Theory for Producers

Become confident with scales, intervals and chords, to help with making basslines and other melodic accompaniment in the key of your music.

Purchasing the bundle gives you immediate access to the 25 hours of streamed tutorials, along with the supporting materials included in each course, such as written notes, software projects, practice sessions, assessments and bonus samples. All in all, a huge package to ensure the highest quality learning experience!

Check out the individual course pages for more details, where you’ll also find sample lessons for each course to watch before purchasing.

Any references to any brands on this site/page, including reference to brands and instruments, are provided for description purposes only. For example references to instrument brands are provided to describe the sound of the instrument and/or the instrument used in the sample. Loopmasters do not have (nor do they claim) any association with or endorsement by these brands. Any goodwill attached to those brands rest with the brand owner. Loopmasters or its Suppliers do not accept any liability in relation to the content of the sample or the accuracy of the description. “RHODES” is a registered trademark of Joseph A Brandstetter.

  • Please check the individual Courses for full details on the modules included.
  • Stream Only Courses

112. Beginner’s Guide to Music Production in Ableton Live (Producertech)

by Producertech

Beginner's Guide to Music Production in Ableton Live (Producertech)

This massive bundle combines the Music Production Essentials Collection (6 Courses) and the Beginner’s Guide to Music Production in Ableton Live, to give producers a complete package for learning production with Ableton Live.

The Ableton guide covers all the basics of working with Live, from first steps right through to exporting a final arrangement. The Essentials Collection then extends this by delivering comprehensive lessons on each of the core mixing, sound design and music theory areas that’ll extend your skillset and help take your music to the next level. All courses are taught by Producertech Senior Tutor and Ableton Certified Trainer Rob Jones.

Included in the bundle are the following 7 Courses:

Beginner’s Guide to Music Production in Ableton Live

Master the basics of working with audio and MIDI in Live to help with building beats, making backing tracks, performing and producing your own music.

EQ Fundamentals

Learn to competently apply EQ in your music, understanding fully what frequencies make up a sound and how to shape them to improve your mix.

Compression Fundamentals

Get to grips with the basics of compression, as well as learning about sidechain options, peak and RMS detection, parallel processing, multi-band compression, and lots more!

The Art of Filtering

From standard static filtering, right through to dynamic, modulated frequency shaping, this course will cement your understanding of this crucial audio effect.

Beginner’s Guide to Synthesis

Learn the basics of sound designing with a range of popular synths, to enable easier patch editing and creation of your own presets from scratch.

The Art of Sampling

The core concepts of sampling, getting you fully up to speed with the common controls and how to use them to design drums, leads, basses and more.

Beginner’s Guide to Music Theory for Producers

Become confident with scales, intervals and chords, to help with making basslines and other melodic accompaniment in the key of your music.

Purchasing the bundle gives you immediate access to the 35 hours of streamed tutorials, along with the supporting materials included in each course, such as written notes, software projects, practice sessions, assessments and bonus samples. All in all, a huge package to ensure the highest quality learning experience!

Check out the individual course pages for more details, where you’ll also find sample lessons for each course to watch before purchasing.

  • Please check the individual Courses for full details on the modules included.
  • Stream Only Courses

113. Ableton Beginners Complete Music Production Collection (Producertech)

by Producertech

Ableton Beginners Complete Music Production Collection (Producertech)

John Tejada’s ‘Unstable Condition’ is undoubtedly one of the biggest Deep House tracks from the last decade. As such, Producertech are thrilled to release this new course, in which John rebuilds the track from scratch, designing sounds, mixing and constructing the entire arrangement, so viewers can not only witness the process but also download and keep the completed project.

John is no stranger to production with a career in electronic music spanning from 1994 to present. In this time John has released four albums with the revered label Kompakt and had releases on Pokerflat, Cocoon, Plug Research, Seventh City, Playhouse, Defected and his own label Palette Recordings. He’s done over 100 remixes for acts as big as The Postal Service and Télépopmusic and played at clubs and festivals in over 30 countries across the world, as well as gracing the Late, Late show with James Corden and Conan, performing with collaborator Reggie Watts as their duo project Wajatta.

The course starts with a quick analysis of the track and a look at the original project, after which the beats are put together using oneshots from Loopcloud. John then designs each of the synth parts one by one, using entirely Wavetable from the Live Suite. Once all parts are in place, he explains some of the key steps involved in mixing the track, showing the importance of metering in balancing parts and a wealth of techniques for processing individual sounds with effects.

Signing up to the course gives you immediate access to the streamed tutorials, as well as the Live project and a bonus pack of loops from John’s Loopmasters sample pack. For an example of the course style, check out the sample module, where John explains how to implement the Haas effect using factory effects in Live, to improve stereo imaging and the character of secondary leads.

* Cover photo by Holly Parker

Sample Module – Using the Haas Effect to add width

Course Breakdown

Module 1 – Intro to ‘Unstable Condition’ and Original Project
John begins with a quick analysis of the actual track and then listen through all of the individual components within it from the original project.
16.47

Module 2 – Building the Drums
Using oneshot samples from Loopcloud, John recreates the classic drum break from the track, laying out the 8-bar intro along the timeline.
12.01

Module 3 – Designing the Main Lead
Using Ableton’s Wavetable, John redesigns the main lead synth from the track, employing FM synthesis, enveloped filters and unison voicing techniques to get as close as possible to the original.
14.08

Module 4 – Adding the Secondary Synths
Again with Wavetable, John designs the accompanying synths, playing in MIDI notes and then processing them with various effects.
15.09

Module 5 – Creating the Bridge Melodies
After considering the final synth layer in the initial phase of the track, John moves onto the main Bridge section, reconstructing all of the synth lines once again from the ground up.
18.54

Module 6 – Effects Processing
John begins treating various sounds with effects, mostly from Live’s factory library. Echo is used extensively on the bridge section, whilst reverb is added to the drums. 3rd-party plugins are introduced to give the kick some extra life.
10.32

Module 7 – Balancing and Master Channel Metering
After providing some invaluable mixing advice, John looks at level and frequency meters on the master channel, showing his process for getting the mix right.
17.08

Module 8 – EQ and Compression
Regular and mid-side EQ techniques are used to shape the frequencies of various sounds in the mix, whilst some parallel compression is additionally applied to the kick.
13.48

Module 9 – Automation
John demonstrates the important role automation plays in the development of sounds in the track.
8.07

Module 10 – Haas Effect
Considering the width of sounds in the mix, John sets up the Haas effect using Live’s delay and then applies it to different sounds, adjusting levels and panning as he goes.
8.49

Module 11 – Final Master Bus Processing
The width of bass frequencies are analysed and some light compression applied to the master channel, to help get the final mix under control.
4.10

  • Over 2 hours of streamed tutorials
  • Access 24/7/365
  • Included Ableton Live project
  • 60MB bonus audio samples

Write your review and rate this rating The Best 113 Music Courses 2021.

Music courses
Top 113 Music Courses 2021
SOUND QUALITY
94
VALUE FOR MONEY
97
EASE OF USE
91
FEATURES
98
PRESETS
98
Reader Rating0 Votes
0
96
Save on Loopmasters Sample Bundles

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

three × 5 =

Subscribe News
SoundsMag